WBP

Wellbore Planner Users Guide
2004 Landmark Graphics Corporation
Part No. 161888, R2003.12 February 2004

2004 Landmark Graphics Corporation
All Rights Reserved Worldwide
This publication has been provided pursuant to an agreement containing restrictions on its use. The publication is also protected by
Federal copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system,
or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, magnetic, manual, or otherwise, or
disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of:
Landmark Graphics Corporation

Building 1, Suite 200, 2101 CityWest, Houston, Texas 77042, USA
P.O. Box 42806, Houston, Texas 77242, USA
Phone: 713-839-2000
FAX: 713-839-2401
Web: www.lgc.com
Trademark Notice
3D Drill View, 3D Drill View KM, 3Dview, Active Field Surveillance, Active Reservoir Surveillance, ADC, ARIES, Asset
Development Center, Asset Development Centre, Automate, BLITZ, BLITZPAK, CasingSeat, CDDM, COMPASS, Corporate
Data Archiver, Corporate Data Store, DataStar, DBPlot, Decision Suite, Decisionarium, DecisionDesktop, DecisionSpace,
DecisionSpace AssetPlanner, DecisionSpace AssetView, DecisionSpace Atomic Meshing, DecisionSpace Power Grid,
DecisionSpace PowerModel, DecisionSpace PrecisionTarget, DecisionSpace TracPlanner, DecisionSpace Well Seismic Fusion,
DepthTeam, DepthTeam Explorer, DepthTeam Express, DepthTeam Express3, DepthTeam Extreme, DepthTeam Interpreter,
DESKTOP-PVT, DESKTOP-VIP, DEX, DFW, DIMS, Discovery, Drill-to-the-Earth Model, Drillability Suite, DrillModel,
DrillVision, DSS, Dynamic Reservoir Management, Dynamic Surveillance System, EarthCube, EDM, eLandmark, Engineers
Data Model, Engineer's Desktop, EOS-PAK, EPM, Executive Assistant, ezFault, ezSurface, ezTracker, FastTrack, FZAP!,
GeoDataLoad, GeoGraphix (stylized), GeoGraphix Exploration System, GeoLink, GeoProbe, GES, GESXplorer, GMAplus,
GRIDGENR, Handheld Field Operator, I2 Enterprise, iDIMS, IsoMap, Landmark, Landmark and Design, Landmark logo and
Design, LandScape, Lattix, LeaseMap, LMK Resources, LogEdit, LogM, LogPrep, Magic Earth, MagicDesk, MagicStation,
MagicVision, Make Great Decisions, MathPack, MIRA, Model Builder, MultiWell, MyLandmark, MyWorkspace, OpenBooks,
OpenExplorer, OpenJournal, OpenOrigin, OpenSGM, OpenVision, OpenWells, OpenWire, OpenWorks, OpenWorks Well File,
PAL, Parallel-VIP, PetroBank, PetroWorks, PlotView, Point Gridding Plus, Pointing Dispatcher, PostStack, PostStack ESP,
PowerCalculator, PowerExplorer, PowerJournal, PowerModel, PowerSection, PowerView, PRIZM, PROFILE, ProMAGIC,
ProMAX, ProMAX 2D, ProMAX 3D, ProMAX 3DPSDM, ProMAX MVA, ProMAX VSP, pSTAx, QUICKDIF, QUIKCDP,
QUIKDIG, QUIKRAY, QUIKSHOT, QUIKVSP, RAVE, RAYMAP, Real Freedom, Real-Time Asset Management Center, Real-
Time Asset Management Centre, Real Time Knowledge Company, RESev, ResMap, RMS, SafeStart, SCAN, SeisCube, SeisMap,
SeisModel, SeisSpace, SeisVision, SeisWell, SeisWorks, SeisWorks MultiView, SeisWorks PowerCalculator, SeisWorks
PowerSection, SeisWorks PowerView, SeisXchange, Sierra, Sierra (design), SigmaView, SimResults, SIVA, Spatializer,
SpecDecomp, StrataAmp, StrataMap, Stratamodel, StrataSim, StratWorks, StressCheck, STRUCT, Surf & Connect, SynTool,
System Start for Servers, SystemStart, SystemStart for Clients, System Start for Servers, SystemStart for Storage, T2B, TDQ, Team
Workspace, TeamView, TERAS, Total Drilling Performance, TOW/cs The Oilfield Workstation, Trend Form Gridding, Turbo
Synthetics, VIP, VIP-COMP, VIP-CORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-EXECUTIVE, VIP-Local Grid Refinement, VIP-
THERM, WavX, Web Editor, Web OpenWorks, Wellbase, Wellbore Planner, Wellbore Planner Connect, WELLCAT,
WELLPLAN, WellXchange, WOW, Xsection, Xsource, You're in Control. Experience the difference, ZAP!, and Z-MAP Plus are
trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of Landmark Graphics Corporation or Magic Earth, Inc.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Note
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by
Landmark Graphics Corporation. Landmark Graphics Corporation assumes no responsibility for any error that may appear in this
manual. Some states or jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of expressed or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore,
this statement may not apply to you.
Landmark Wellbore Planner User Guide
Contents
Wellbore Planner User Guide
.................................................................................................................................. iii
Introduction ................................................................................................... 1
Overview ............................................................................................................. 1
Main Window Layout ......................................................................................... 3
Main Menu ..................................................................................................... 4
Overview of File Menu Items ................................................................. 4
Overview of Plans Menu Items .............................................................. 4
Overview of Views Menu Items ............................................................. 5
Overview of the Tools Menu Items ........................................................ 6
Overview of the Wellbore Planner Main Window Spreadsheet ............... 6
Calculation Parameters ............................................................................... 7
How Wellbore Planner Interacts with Other Applications ............................. 8
Applications That Connect Directly to Wellbore Planner ......................... 8
Other Applications That Communicate with Wellbore Planner ............... 9
Finding the Information You Need ................................................................... 10
Organization of Sections ............................................................................. 10
Other Sources of Information ..................................................................... 12
Using Online Help ........................................................................................ 13
Conventions Used in the Documentation .................................................. 14
R2003.12 Contents iii

Managing Windows and Dialog Boxes ............................................................ 15
Common Window Features ......................................................................... 16
Using Lists .............................................................................................. 17
Using Menu Bars .................................................................................... 17
Using Menu Options ............................................................................... 18
Using Scroll Bars .................................................................................... 19
Resizing Windows .................................................................................. 21
Moving Windows .................................................................................... 22
Raising and Lowering Windows ............................................................ 23
Activating Windows ................................................................................ 23
Using Dialog Boxes ..................................................................................... 24
Common Features .................................................................................. 25
Other Dialog Box Buttons ...................................................................... 27
Using a File Selection Dialog Box ......................................................... 28
Shortcuts ...................................................................................................... 30
Accepting Parameters ............................................................................ 30
Highlighting ............................................................................................. 30
Opening Button 3 Popup Menus ........................................................... 31
Selecting Items from a List .................................................................... 31
Tabbing Through Dialog Boxes ............................................................ 31
Getting Started ................................................................................................... 32
Setting Up the Initial OpenWorks Session ................................................ 32
Selecting the Database Server for the OpenWorks Session .............. 33
Selecting an OpenWorks Project .......................................................... 33
Selecting an Interpreter .......................................................................... 33
R2003.12 Contents iv
Selecting a System of Measurement .................................................... 34
Selecting an OpenWorks Well List ........................................................ 35
Choosing the Order of the Well List ..................................................... 36
Choosing a Well Name Format .............................................................. 36
Launching Wellbore Planner ............................................................................ 37
Workflows .......................................................................................................... 41
Integrated Well Planning Workflow ............................................................ 42
Designing Well Paths in Wellbore Planner ................................................ 44
Exiting Programs and Applications ................................................................. 46
Exiting Wellbore Planner ............................................................................. 46
Exiting OpenWorks ...................................................................................... 46
Creating a Well Plan ............................................................................. 47
Overview ............................................................................................................. 47
Working with Projects ....................................................................................... 48
About Well Planning Projects ..................................................................... 48
Selecting a Wellbore Planner Project to Display ...................................... 49
Creating a New Project During the Current Session ................................ 50
Opening an Existing Project ....................................................................... 51
Deleting a Wellbore Planner Project .......................................................... 53
Saving a Wellbore Planner Project ............................................................. 53
Introduction to Working with Well Plans ......................................................... 54
Creating a New Well Plan ............................................................................ 55
Opening an Existing Well Plan ................................................................... 56
Making a Copy of the Active Well Plan ...................................................... 56
R2003.12 Contents v
Closing the Well Plan and Canceling Unsaved Changes ......................... 57
Deleting a Well Plan ..................................................................................... 57
Specifying a Well Plan Type ............................................................................. 58
Overview ....................................................................................................... 58
Creating an Unknown Type of Well Plan ................................................... 60
Creating a Surface Well Plan ...................................................................... 61
Creating a Sidetrack Well Plan ................................................................... 63
Adding Existing Wells to the Well Planning Project ........................... 63
How to Create a Sidetrack Well Plan .................................................... 65
Creating a Look Ahead Well Plan ............................................................... 67
Creating a Complex Extension Well Plan .................................................. 69
Creating a Platform Location and Platform Well Plans ............................ 71
Creating a Platform Location ................................................................. 71
Creating a Platform Well ........................................................................ 74
Viewing Well Plans ............................................................................................ 76
Quick Overview of the Shortcut View Buttons .......................................... 76
Displaying the View Windows ..................................................................... 77
Specifying General Viewing Options ......................................................... 78
Defining the Range of Targets and Well Plans Displayed .................. 79
Examples of Target Range and Well Plan Range Viewing

Options .................................................................................................... 80
Selecting a Color Scheme for Displaying Well Plans and

Wells ........................................................................................................ 81
Enabling View Windows to Display Uncertainty Ranges .................... 82
Arranging Windows with the Auto-Tile Function ................................ 82
R2003.12 Contents vi
Using the Plan View Window ...................................................................... 83
Setting Target and Label Display Options for the Plan View
Window .................................................................................................... 86
Displaying a ZGF Backdrop in the Plan View Window ........................ 88
Clearing ZGF Backdrops from the Plan View Window ........................ 90
Using the Section View Window ................................................................. 91
Setting Display Options in the Section View Controls Dialog

Box ........................................................................................................... 93
Displaying a Grid in the Section View Window .................................... 94
Using the 3D View Window ......................................................................... 96
Using the Redline View Window ................................................................. 98
Setting Redline Parameters for a Well Planning Project .................... 101
Understanding the Redline Parameters ............................................... 102
Using the Spreadsheet Controls ........................................................... 103
Using the Diagram Preview Window .......................................................... 104
Displaying the Diagram Preview Window ............................................ 104
Specifying Diagram Preview Display Options ..................................... 106
Working with Targets ........................................................................................ 108
Importing Targets ......................................................................................... 109
Creating New Targets in Wellbore Planner ................................................ 111
Displaying the Target Editor Window ................................................... 111
Using the Target Editor Window to Create a New Target ................... 112
Displaying a Target in the Target Editor Window ..................................... 114
Selecting and Sorting Well Plan Targets ................................................... 115
Selecting Targets for the Well Plan ....................................................... 115
Specifying the Order of Targets in the Well Plan ................................ 116
R2003.12 Contents vii

Setting Target Parameters .......................................................................... 117
Selecting the Target View ...................................................................... 117
Setting the Target Location Coordinates ............................................. 118
Setting the Target Display Color ........................................................... 119
Selecting the Shape of a Target ............................................................ 120
Setting Parameters for the Selected Target Shape ............................. 123
Associating a Target with a Feature Name .......................................... 126
Editing Targets Graphically ........................................................................ 128
Editing Targets Graphically in the Target Editor Window .................. 128
Editing Targets Graphically in the Plan View or Section View

Window .................................................................................................... 130
Updating the Well Plan with Changes Made in Other

Applications .................................................................................................. 131
Establishing Default Parameters for Targets ............................................ 131
Using Reference Targets ............................................................................. 131
Converting Regular Targets into Reference Targets .......................... 132
Converting Reference Targets into Regular Targets .......................... 133
Creating Reference Targets from Grids ..................................................... 133
Making Changes to Reference Targets You Created from Grids ....... 135
Using the Snap Targets Tool to Realign Target Positions ....................... 136
Snapping Target Penetration Points to the Well Path ......................... 136
Snapping Targets to Right Angles Along the Well Path ..................... 137
Optimizing the Penetration Points of Shaped Targets ............................. 138
Renaming Targets ....................................................................................... 141
Deleting Targets ........................................................................................... 141
Closing the Target Editor Window ............................................................. 142
R2003.12 Contents viii

Calculating the Well Path .................................................................................. 143
Setting the Calculation Options ................................................................. 144
Setting Surface and Depth Measurement Units ................................... 144
Choosing a Calculation Method ............................................................ 145
Specifying a Minimum Value for Dogleg Severity ............................... 145
Sorting Targets ....................................................................................... 146
Extending the Depth of the Well Path ................................................... 146
Applying a Hold Point to the Well Plan ................................................. 147
Communicating with Other Applications ............................................. 149
Selecting a Calculation Mode ................................................................ 149
Reading the Well Plan Spreadsheet ........................................................... 150
Cursor Tracking ...................................................................................... 150
About the Data for Well Path Points in the Spreadsheet .................... 151
Understanding the Spreadsheet Columns ........................................... 152
Performing Advanced Well Planning Tasks .............................................. 153
Converting, Importing, and Exporting Data ..................... 154
Overview ............................................................................................................. 154
Converting Time and Depth Domain Values ................................................... 155
Overview of How Time and Depth Values Are Stored .............................. 155
When to Use the Time/Depth Server Utility ............................................... 156
Using the Time/Depth Server Utility ........................................................... 157
Displaying the Time/Depth Server Window .......................................... 158
Choosing a Velocity Model .................................................................... 159
Effects of Changing the Velocity Model ............................................... 160
R2003.12 Contents ix
Keeping the Time/Depth Server Utility Running .................................. 162
Loading a Project into Wellbore Planner in Time-based Mode .......... 162
Changing the Domain Used as the Calculation Basis ........................ 164
Creating and Using a Time/Depth File ....................................................... 166
Importing COMPASS Well Planning Files ....................................................... 167
Exporting Well Plans and Projects .................................................................. 170
Using the Export COMPASS (ASCII) File Dialog Box ............................... 170
Using the Export Dialog Box ....................................................................... 172
Saving a Line of Section to the OpenWorks Database ............................. 174
Creating and Managing Linked Wells .............................................................. 175
Saving a Well Plan as an OpenWorks Well ................................................ 175
Managing Linked Wells ............................................................................... 179
Displaying the OpenWorks Well Manager Dialog Box ........................ 179
Adding and Editing Casing Information for a Linked Well ................. 182
Adding and Editing Completion Information for a Linked

Well .......................................................................................................... 186
Adding and Editing Well Target Picks for a Linked Well .................... 188
Adding and Editing Well Target Faults for a Linked Well ................... 192
Disconnecting and Reconnecting a Plan-to-well Link ........................ 194
Adding a Well to an OpenWorks Well List ................................................. 198
R2003.12 Contents x
Creating Hardcopy Reports and Graphics ...................................................... 199
Creating Data Reports for Well Plans ........................................................ 199
Viewing Well Plan Reports .......................................................................... 203
Turn Point Report ................................................................................... 203
Survey Point (Well Path) Report ............................................................ 203
Penetration Point Report ....................................................................... 205
Target Shape Report .............................................................................. 206
Error Ellipses Report .............................................................................. 207
Creating a Proximity Report ........................................................................ 208
Viewing a Proximity Report ......................................................................... 211
Capturing View Window Contents as Graphic Files ................................. 213
Creating Graphic Files from the Contents of the

Basic View Windows .............................................................................. 213
Capturing the Diagram Preview Windows Contents

as a Graphic File ..................................................................................... 217
Working with Well Position Uncertainty .............................. 220
Overview ............................................................................................................. 220
Uncertainty Workflow ........................................................................................ 222
Calculating Well Position Uncertainty ............................................................. 223
Selecting a Default Survey Tool ................................................................. 224
Working with Survey Histories and

Uncertainty Calculations for Single Wells ................................................. 226
Displaying a Single Wells Survey History and Uncertainty Data ...... 226
Customizing a Single Wells Survey History ........................................ 231
Working with Uncertainty Calculations for Multiple Wells ....................... 234
Making Multiple Well Uncertainty Calculations ................................... 235
R2003.12 Contents xi
Visualizing Well Position Uncertainty ............................................................. 237
Viewing Uncertainty Ranges in Wellbore Planner Views ......................... 237
Enabling Wellbore Planner to Display Uncertainty Projections ......... 238
Selecting View Window Options for Uncertainty Display ................... 239
Viewing Uncertainty Ranges for Wells and Well Plans in OpenVision

or StratWorks 3D .......................................................................................... 241
Displaying the Visualization Dialog Box .............................................. 242
Choosing Wells and Options for OpenVision and StratWorks 3D

Uncertainty Display ................................................................................ 244
Working with Survey Tools .............................................................................. 251
Overview of Tools Dialog Box Functions .................................................. 252
Displaying the Tools Dialog Box ................................................................ 253
Understanding the Error Models ................................................................ 254
Error Cone Model .................................................................................... 254
Systematic Error Model .......................................................................... 255
Inclination Cone of Error Model ............................................................ 256
Choosing Between Good and Poor Tools .......................................... 257
Selecting a Default Survey Tool ................................................................. 257
Customizing the Survey Tool Set ............................................................... 258
Creating Survey Tools ............................................................................ 259
Editing Survey Tool Information ........................................................... 263
Deleting a Tool from the Survey Tool Set ............................................ 264
Importing Survey Tools from the COMPASS Application .................. 264
Managing Project and Company Survey Tool Sets .................................. 266
Exporting the Current Tool Set as a Data File ..................................... 266
Importing a New Survey Tool Set .......................................................... 268
R2003.12 Contents xii

Integrating with EarthCube ............................................................. 272
Overview ............................................................................................................. 272
EarthCube / Wellbore Planner Workflow ......................................................... 273
Overview ....................................................................................................... 273
Creating Well Plans in EarthCube .............................................................. 275
Creating Targets in EarthCube ................................................................... 279
Calculating the Well Plan ............................................................................ 281
Editing the Well Path ................................................................................... 282
Editing the Well Path in Wellbore Planner ........................................... 282
Editing the Well Path in EarthCube ....................................................... 282
Saving the Well Plan .................................................................................... 283
Saving the Well Plan in Wellbore Planner ............................................ 283
Saving the Well Plan in EarthCube ....................................................... 283
Saving the Well Plan to the OpenWorks Database .............................. 283
Integrating with OpenVision and StratWorks 3D ......... 284
Overview ............................................................................................................. 284
OpenVision / Wellbore Planner Workflow ....................................................... 286
Setting Up an OpenVision / Wellbore Planner Session ................................. 287
Launching OpenVision ................................................................................ 288
Opening a Previously Saved OpenVision Session ................................... 291
Adding the Wellbore Planner Interface to OpenVision ............................. 291
Running the Time/Depth Server Utility ...................................................... 294
R2003.12 Contents xiii

Adding Project Data from Other Applications ........................................... 295
Integrating Additional Applications into the Work Session ............... 296
Developing a Well Plan: An Overview ............................................................. 297
Creating Targets in OpenVision ................................................................. 298
Changing the Order of Targets ................................................................... 299
Making Well Plan Changes from Wellbore Planner ............................. 300
Making Well Plan Changes from OpenVision ...................................... 301
Saving the Session Results ........................................................................ 301
Saving the Well Plan ............................................................................... 301
Saving OpenVision Session Data ......................................................... 302
Tips for Working in the OpenVision 3D Window ............................................ 302
Integrating with SeisWorks ............................................................. 304
Overview ............................................................................................................. 304
SeisWorks / Wellbore Planner workflow ......................................................... 305
Creating a Well Plan In SeisWorks ............................................................. 306
Creating Targets In SeisWorks ................................................................... 310
Creating Targets In a Seismic View ...................................................... 312
Creating Targets In a Map View ............................................................. 313
Setting the Display Parameters in SeisWorks ........................................... 315
Editing the Well Path in Wellbore Planner ........................................... 319
Editing the Well Path in SeisWorks ...................................................... 319
R2003.12 Contents xiv

Saving the Well Plan .................................................................................... 321
Saving the Well Plan in Wellbore Planner ............................................ 321
Saving the Well Plan in the OpenWorks Database .............................. 321
Deleting a Well Plan ..................................................................................... 321
Integrating with Stratamodel ......................................................... 322
Overview ............................................................................................................. 322
Stratamodel / Wellbore Planner Workflow ...................................................... 323
Developing the Well Plan .................................................................................. 324
Picking Targets In Stratamodel .................................................................. 324
Viewing the Well Path in Stratamodel ........................................................ 327
Completing Work on the Well Plan .................................................................. 329
Saving a Well Plan to the OpenWorks Database as a Well ...................... 329
Saving Well Plans ........................................................................................ 330
Exporting a Well Plan in Other Formats .................................................... 330
Exporting a Well Plan as an ASCII File ...................................................... 330
Integrating with Other Applications ........................................ 331
Overview ............................................................................................................. 331
Using StratWorks with Wellbore Planner ........................................................ 332
Saving a Well Plan to the OpenWorks Database as a Well ...................... 332
Saving a Line of Section to the OpenWorks Database ............................. 333
R2003.12 Contents xv
Using COMPASS for Windows ......................................................................... 334
COMPASS / Wellbore Planner workflow .................................................... 334
Importing Wellbore Planner Files into COMPASS .................................... 335
Exporting Wellbore Planner Files from COMPASS ................................... 336
Workflows, Strategies, and Tips ................................................. 338
Overview ............................................................................................................. 338
Whats in This Chapter? .............................................................................. 338
Creating and Working in Well Plans ................................................................ 339
Creating Well Plans ...................................................................................... 339
Setting a Targets Parameters .................................................................... 340
Setting the Well Plan Parameters ............................................................... 342
Step 1: Select a Calculation Method ..................................................... 342
Step 2: Specify a Target Sorting Order ................................................. 342
Step 3: Specify a Dogleg Severity Value .............................................. 343
Step 4: Calculate the Well Plan ............................................................. 343
Planning Wells of Standard Types ................................................................... 344
Planning a Straight Well .............................................................................. 344
Planning a Ramp Well (Build and Hold Well) ............................................ 345
Planning a Continuous Build Well .............................................................. 347
Planning an S-shaped Well ......................................................................... 347
Planning an S-shaped Well with No Straight Section

at the Bottom ........................................................................................... 347
Planning an S-shaped Well with a Straight Section,

But with No Bottomhole Target ............................................................. 348
Planning an S-shaped Well with a Straight Section

and a Bottomhole Target ....................................................................... 349
R2003.12 Contents xvi

Planning a Two-Target Well ........................................................................ 350
Planning a Dual Kickoff Well ....................................................................... 352
Planning a Horizontal Well .......................................................................... 353
Planning a Platform Well Project ..................................................................... 355
Setting Up a Platform Well Project ............................................................. 355
Optimizing the Platform Location Manually .............................................. 357
Using Automatic Platform Location Optimization .................................... 362
Monitoring a Wells Progress ........................................................................... 365
Using the Look Ahead Feature ................................................................... 365
Reacting to Changes in Structural Interpretation ..................................... 367
Reacting to Changes in the Velocity Model ............................................... 367
Calculating a Well Path for Simulation ............................................................ 368
Appendix: Directional Drilling ...................................................... 369
Introduction ........................................................................................................ 369
Origins of Directional Drilling ........................................................................... 369
Early Means of Directional Control ............................................................ 371
Oriented Drilling ...................................................................................... 371
Survey Measurement .............................................................................. 372
Modern Directional Drilling ............................................................................... 374
Mud Motor ..................................................................................................... 376
Measurement Systems ................................................................................ 378
Measurement While Drilling ........................................................................ 379
R2003.12 Contents xvii

Emerging Technologies .................................................................................... 382
Coiled Tubing/Under Balanced Drilling ..................................................... 382
Multi-laterals ................................................................................................. 384
Rotary Steerable Systems ........................................................................... 386
Geo-steering ................................................................................................. 388
Glossary ........................................................................................................... 391
Index .................................................................................................................... 397
R2003.12 Contents xviii

Introduction
Overview
Wellbore Planner is an integrated, well planning tool for UNIX

systems. Designed for geoscientists and engineers, Wellbore Planner
identifies potential drilling locations that meet both geologic and
drilling criteria. When you use OpenWorks and Wellbore Planner
together, you reduce project cycle time, because you get instantaneous
updates between your engineering and geoscience applications. In
addition, Wellbore Planner helps you pick better targets, and plan your
wells more effectively.
The application calculates well paths and provides advice regarding

the drilling feasibility of a well. It also gives you the ability to design
wells and evaluate targets, and provides you with the opportunity to
iteratively develop and fine tune the well plan in the geoscience
domain before passing it on to the drilling engineer.
From within Wellbore Planner, you create a well planning project that
contains one or more well plans, where each well plan consists of a
series of targets that define the well path. You can create your targets
in Wellbore Planner, or you can create (pick) them in EarthCube,
SeisWorks, Stratamodel, or OpenVision (as well as in the 3D viewers
in Z-MAP Plus, StratWorks, and Open Explorer.)
In Wellbore Planners Target Editor, you can turn target points into 3D
objects with color, and shape, as well as control other aspects of the
target. As you edit, you can view your targets and the well path
simultaneously in both Wellbore Planner and the integrated
application.
When necessary, Wellbore Planners Time/Depth Server utility

automatically converts the time values of targets to depth values.
R2003.12 Introduction 1
Depending upon the well plan type you choose, Wellbore Planner
can
recommend a surface location or kickoff point for your well
calculate a sidetrack from an existing OpenWorks well or an
existing well plan
calculate the paths of multiple platform wells that are based on a
single platform location
compare a well being drilled to the well plan it was based on and
make adjustments in a timely manner to the actual drilling
Based on your starting location, and selected calculation method,

Wellbore Planner calculates an optimum well path through your
targets.
The resulting well path appears in these locations:

as data in the main window
as a graphic display in any integrated OpenWorks application you
are running with Wellbore Planner (For example, you can
manipulate surface locations and subsurface targets interactively
three-dimensionally in OpenVision, and view the results in real
time.)
as a graphic display in Wellbore Planners Plan View, Section View,
and 3D View windows
The well plan also appears in the Redline View window, which shows
how well the well plan conforms to your specified engineering
constraints.
You can use Wellbore Planners well path uncertainty calculation and
tools to make sure your well plans will not collide with existing wells,
or with other well plans. You can view the results in Wellbore
Planners Plan View and Section View windows, and three-
dimensionally in OpenVision, during an integrated work session.
When you are satisfied with the well plan, you can save it to the
OpenWorks database, export it in various formats, and save it as
hardcopy reports and graphics.
The Wellbore Planner manual provides step-by-step instructions for all
the tasks you will commonly perform as you design potential well
paths and evaluate their feasibility in terms of geologic and drilling
criteria.
This topic explains some of the basic skills and techniques you use as
you create your well path on screen.
Main Window Layout
Wellbore Planners main window can be divided into the following

general areas:
main menu
spreadsheet
calculation parameters
main menu spreadsheet project name
targets selected
well plans in available targets
the project for selection
calculation calculation Calculate context-sensitive

well plan
types methods mode button well plan type
parameters
dogleg
target system of
well list severity well path
controls measurement
sorting pointing extension
options dispatcher (PD)
Main Menu
The following paragraphs briefly describe the contents of each of the
menus on the main menu bar. Each of these items is discussed in more
detail later on in the manual.
Overview of File Menu Items

The File menu contains options for
opening an existing well planning project
creating a new well planning project
saving a well planning project, including all associated well plans
and targets
saving a version of the well planning project under a new name
deleting a well planning project
importing Compass well planning files
exporting well plans as Compass files
adding one or more OpenWorks wells to the well planning project,
to use as the basis for sidetrack or look ahead wells, or to gauge the
proximity of an existing well to your well plans
generating an ASCII report that includes elements such as a well
plans turn points, well path points, or target penetration points
importing well plans in various formats. (Imported well plans
cannot be recalculated.)
importing targets from ASCII files
exporting the active well plan, all well plans, or certain types of
well plan data to a selected format for use with other Landmark
applications
exiting from the Wellbore Planner application
Overview of Plans Menu Items

The Plans menu contains options for
creating a new well plan
calculating the active well plan
copying the active well plan
snapping shaped targets to more optimum positions
moving shaped targets penetration points to optimize the well path
applying a hold point, so that the well path is straight below a set
elevation
managing well plans as OpenWorks wells, by saving well plans as

OpenWorks wells; defining casing, completion, picks, and faults for
the wells; and managing plan-to-well links
writing lines of section to the OpenWorks database
creating a Proximity report that shows how close a well plan is to
existing wells or to other well plans
deleting the active well plan, or deleting the well plan and its targets
canceling a well plan that you have been creating
closing the active well plan
Overview of Views Menu Items

Working with Wellbore Planner and an integrated OpenWorks
application side by side, you can manipulate surface locations and
targets in Wellbore Planner and view the results instantaneously in
both applications.
You can display your well plans in these Wellbore Planner view
windows:
Plan View a map view of the well plan
Section View a cross section of the well plan
3D View a cubic presentation of the well plan, which is capable
of being rotated in two directions
Redline View an interactive chart that shows you where build,
drop, turn rates, dogleg severity, inclination, and total directional
parameters exceed the specified engineering constraints
Diagram Preview a plot of the well plan that summarizes drilling
information
To help in your visualization, you can display only the selected well
plan or all available well plans; likewise, within a well plan you can
display only the selected targets or all the available targets.
The Plan Colors options set up color coding for well plans based on
these criteria:
Active or inactive well plan status
Sections that exceed redline parameters
Build and turn sections
Casing sections
Completion sections
The Views menus Uncertainty options enable or disable display of

uncertainty ranges in Wellbore Planners Plan View and Section View
windows.
Overview of the Tools Menu Items

The Tools menu gives you access to the following utilities
Target Editor to create or edit well plan targets
Time/Depth Server to handle conversions between time and
depth domain values
Add Wellbore Planner Interface to OpenVision to specify
options for the way Wellbore Planner data appears in the
OpenVision 3D Viewer window during an integrated work session
Uncertainty to calculate and view well position uncertainty
ranges
Create Targets from Grids to add reference targets to your well
plan, based on the points at which the well path intersects one or
more specified grids
Overview of the Wellbore Planner Main Window Spreadsheet

The Wellbore Planner main window displays a spreadsheet of the
turnpoint calculations. Associated with each turning point are:
MD (measured depth)
EW Offset
NS Offset
TVD (true vertical depth)
Inclination
Azimuth
Build Rate
Turn Rate
DLS
Tool Face
Target
The spreadsheet is for display only. You cannot edit the data.
You can cursor track between the spreadsheet and the view windows
to relate the spreadsheet numbers to actual positions on the path. When
you click on a cell in the spreadsheet, the cell value is highlighted and
a red + appears at the appropriate place along the well path in the
View window. For additional information on the spreadsheet, see
Reading the Well Plan Spreadsheet on page 150.
Calculation Parameters
At the bottom of the Wellbore Planner main window, youll find
several calculation parameters. These include the desired dogleg
severity, the method of calculation (Curve Only, Curve and Hold, or
Optimum Align), and whether the calculations are to be manual or
automatic. In addition, you can choose to extend the well, sort targets
by depth, by distance or by optimum arrangement. You can update the
values through the pointing dispatcher (PD), either automatically or
manually.
Wellbore Planners algorithms are designed to produce an optimized

well path, based on targets, kickoff points, surface location, and
desired dogleg severity. Digitizing the well path is not necessary.
The application uses a subset of COMPASS for Windows directional

well-planning algorithms to help you design potential well paths and
determine their feasibility.
How Wellbore Planner Interacts with Other Applications
Wellbore Planner is fully integrated with four of Landmarks

geoscience products and can export files that can be read in formats
that can be read by four other applications.
Applications That Connect Directly to Wellbore Planner

Wellbore Planner is integrated with the following Landmark
geoscience interpretive applications:
EarthCube
OpenVision
SeisWorks
Stratamodel
3D viewers in Z-MAP Plus, StratWorks, and Open Explorer
Applications that are integrated with Wellbore Planner give you the
following capabilities:
Once you have pointed Wellbore Planner to an existing time/depth
velocity model, time and depth values are converted whenever it is
necessary.
You can pick targets in the integrated application, then move them
and select their shape, color, size, orientation, dip, azimuth, etc. in
Wellbore Planner, and display the results in both applications.
Any additions or changes made in either Wellbore Planner or the
integrated application will appear at the same instant in both
applications.
When you are satisfied with your well plan, you can save it to the
OpenWorks database, for availability to all OpenWorks
applications.
Other Applications That Communicate with Wellbore Planner

Wellbore Planner provides an ASCII connection to COMPASS for
Windows and VIP.
You can export Wellbore Planner files in formats that can be read by
the following applications:
COMPASS for Windows
StratWorks
Stratamodel
VIP
Z-MAP Plus
For information on importing Wellbore Planner files into COMPASS,

see Using COMPASS for Windows on page 334.
Finding the Information You Need
This topic describes the contents and organization of the Wellbore

Planner manual, lists other manuals that you may find helpful, and
explains how to use online Help. At the end of this topic, you will also
find a description of the conventions used in this manual.
Organization of Sections
This book contains the following sections:
Introduction gives a broad overview of Wellbore Planners

capabilities, including a typical work flow for designing a well plan.
Creating a Well Plan covers all aspects of creating a well plan.

It contains basic instructions for:
creating, opening, and saving Wellbore Planner projects
setting up integrated application displays, creating new well
plans in Wellbore Planner and in the integrated OpenWorks
applications, specifying plan types; also includes instructions
for opening, closing, canceling, deleting, and saving well plans
creating targets in Wellbore Planner and in the integrated
applications. It also discusses opening, selecting, sorting,
setting parameters, editing, closing, renaming, deleting, and
saving targets.
how to calculate (compute) the well plan. It also explains
different methods and tools for viewing the results.
Converting, Importing and Exporting Data includes topics

about translating time measurements to depth, importing and
exporting data to ASCII files, exporting files, saving your data to
the OpenWorks database, and creating hardcopy reports.
Integrating with EarthCube includes information about

picking targets, creating well plans, and editing the well path in the
EarthCube application.
Integrating with OpenVision and StratWorks 3D includes

information about creating well plans and targets, editing well paths
and saving changes made in the OpenVision and StratWorks 3D
applications.
Integrating with SeisWorks includes information about

creating well plans and targets, editing well paths and saving well
plans in SeisWorks.
Integrating with Stratamodel includes information about

creating well plans and targets, editing well paths and saving well
plans in Stratamodel.
Integrating with Other Applications includes information

about importing information into COMPASS for Windows and
exporting information from COMPASS and about using StratWorks
with Wellbore Planner.
Work Flows, Strategies, and Tipsoffers procedures for

designing basic types of wells, planning a platform, and tips on
digitizing a path for simulation.
Glossarycontains definitions of terms used throughout this

User Guide.
Other Sources of Information

In addition to this manual, you may occasionally need to refer to
several Landmark manuals to perform certain tasks. These manuals
include:
EarthCube: Wells. Refer to the Well Planning topic of this

manual for an explanation of how EarthCube interacts with the
Wellbore Planner (i.e., how to create a Wellbore Planner file and
pick targets in EarthCube for use in Wellbore Planner).
OpenWorks Data Import/Export. Refer to this manual for

instructions on how to load and transfer data between applications
running in the OpenWorks environment.
OpenVision and StratWorks 3D. Refer to this manual for

information on how to use Wellbore Planner with OpenVision.
Using OpenWorks. Refer to this manual for an explanation of the

OpenWorks environment and for instructions on using the online
Help system and the Technical Assistance Request Tool.
SeisWorks/2D Wells and SeisWorks/3D Wells. Refer to the Well

Planning topic of this manual for instructions on how to use
Wellbore Planner with SeisWorks.
Creating Displays (Stratamodel). Refer to this manual for an

explanation of how to use Wellbore Planner with Stratamodel.
Mapping and Cross Sections (StratWorks). Refer to this manual for

information on how to use Wellbore Planner-generated lines of
section in the StratWorks Cross Section and MapView applications,
how to write targets to Free-form Drawing files for use in the Cross
Section and MapView, and how data in Wellbore Planners Redline
View window can be tracked in Stratworks MapView.
Using Online Help

The Help menu can be accessed from Wellbore Planners main menu
bar.
The Help menu contains the following options:
Help On Help contains information about the online Help system.
Online Manual enables you to access the online version of the

User Guide.
Version indicates which software version or patch release is open.
Release Notes is an online version of the Wellbore Planner Release

Notes.
When selected, the Help options open an online help window with
information about the feature, utility, or application you are using. To
help you navigate through the online document, the following
interactive shortcuts are located along the bottom of the Help window:
From left to right, these interactive shortcuts perform the following

functions:
Contents takes you to a table of contents for the manual.
Index takes you to an index for the manual.
Exit closes the help window.
Previous Link returns to the last help screen (page) you visited.
Page Up takes you back one screen (page).
Page Down takes you forward one screen (page).
Conventions Used in the Documentation

The following conventions are used in this manual to indicate various
features of Wellbore Planner.
Menu Options Menus, menu options, and pushbutton names

are printed in boldface, for example, Setup.
key Press the indicated key on the keyboard, for

example, Return.
enter startow Text that you are required to enter from the
keyboard is printed in a different typeface:
(Courier). Enter the text exactly as it
appears in the instructions.
Click on Move the cursor to the option or object
specified and quickly press and release the
mouse button. Unless otherwise specified,
use Button 1.
Press and drag Press the mouse button and continue to hold it
down while moving the cursor to the option
you want or to a new location in the graphic
display area; then release the button.
Highlight In a dialog box, move the cursor to the name of
the item you wish to use and select it with the
mouse.
Select Move the cursor to the option or object you
want to select and click on it.
Double-click Click the mouse button twice rapidly without
moving the mouse. The first click highlights
the option, object, or text beneath the cursor;
the second click is equivalent to pressing the
OK button to accept the selection.
Triple-click Click the mouse button three times rapidly
without moving the mouse to highlight a string
of text (more than one word) beneath the
cursor.
Managing Windows and Dialog Boxes
This topic describes the Motif Window Manager, explains how to use
the window tools, and discusses dialog boxes and their components,
and gets you started with some shortcuts for managing windows.
scroll bars
Common Window Features

Some features and options appear repeatedly throughout Wellbore
Planner and other OpenWorks applications. Their functions are always
the same.
menu bar
drop-down
menu
shortcut
buttons
menu bar
graphic display area
Using Lists
Many Wellbore Planner and OpenWorks applications have windows
and dialog boxes with lists. These lists contain one or more related
items (such as a list of OpenWorks wells or active well plan targets).
You generally select one or more of these items to perform a certain
task.
Select items from a list by clicking on the item name to highlight it.
After you make a selection(s), click on OK to close the dialog box.
Using Menu Bars

The Wellbore Planner main window and several dialog boxes have a
menu bar across the top. Click on any of the menu bar options and a
drop-down menu appears with a list of subsidiary options.
menu bar options

drop-down
menu
Using Menu Options

Some drop-down menu items are followed by an arrow or by ellipses.
Each of these special markers is explained below.
Arrows
An arrow ( )after a menu option as in Plans Snap Targets
indicates that a cascade menu will appear when you click on the
option.
Ellipses
Ellipses (...) after a menu item (such as Import Compass (ASCII)
File...) indicate that a dialog box will appear if you click on the option.
In the example shown below, when you click on Import Compass
(ASCII) File, the Import Compass (ASCII) File dialog box appears.
Option Name Only

Menu options with no ending punctuation or arrow (such as Save)
perform the specified task immediately, or put Wellbore Planner in the
right mode to perform the specified task. For example, when you
select Save, Wellbore Planner immediately saves the active well plan
file.
Using Scroll Bars

When the data displayed exceeds the window boundaries, you can use
scroll bars to move the focus of the display. Scroll bars appear in the
main window and on any dialog boxes that contain lists.
Scroll Bars
There are five ways to use scroll bars:
Click directly on the scroll bar and slide it up, down, right, or left to
move the display in one smooth motion.
Click on either side of the scroll bar with Button 1 to move the
width of one scroll bar (one increment with each click).
Click on either side of the scroll bar with Button 2, and the scroll
bar jumps and centers on the new point (greater increments).
Click on either arrow with Button 1 to move in very small

increments (less than one scroll bar width).
Click and hold on an arrow to move the list continuously.
Confirmation Boxes and Information Boxes

Some actions cause a confirmation box to appear, which prompts you
to confirm the action you have commanded Wellbore Planner to take.
In other situations, an Information box appears to display an important
message or report an error.
Information Box
Resizing Windows
You can easily resize any of the Wellbore Planner windows or dialog
boxes using the features illustrated below:
Minimize Maximize
Window Menu button title bar
button button
window menu
resize
border
handles
General Window Features
The Window Menu button opens a drop-down menu with options that
control the position and status of the window or dialog box. You can
use either the menu options or the buttons to resize a window.
To reduce a window to an icon, click on the Minimize option or

button.
To restore an icon to its original window size, double-click on the

icon or press Button 2 to get the window menu and select the
Maximize option.
To enlarge a window to the full size of the screen, click on the

Maximize option or button.
To restore an enlarged window to its former size, click on the

Maximize button again.
To change the horizontal and vertical dimensions of a window,

place the cursor into the corner of a window. When the cursor
changes shape , press Button 1 and drag the window outline to
the size you want; then release Button 1.
To change one dimension of a window, place the cursor on one side

of a window. When the cursor changes shape , press Button 1
and drag the window outline to the size you want; then release
Button 1.
Moving Windows
There are three techniques available for moving windows.
Method 1: From the Title Bar

1. Move the cursor into the title bar of the window.
2. Press Button 1 and move the mouse (thus moving the window).
3. When you have the window positioned where you want it, release
Button 1.
Method 2: From the Window Frame

1. Place the cursor anywhere on the window frame, press Button 2 to
reveal a drop-down menu, and drag to Move.
2. Move the mouse (thus moving the window).
3. When you have the window positioned where you want it, click on
any mouse button.
Method 3: From the Window Menu Button

1. Click Button 3 on the Window Menu button in the top left corner.
2. Select Move from the drop-down menu.
3. Move the mouse (thus moving the window).
4. When you have the window positioned where you want it, click on
any mouse button.
Raising and Lowering Windows

As you work with Wellbore Planner and its integrated applications,
you may have several windows stacked on top of one another.
To raise a window (bring it to the front of all other windows), select

the Raise option or click Button 1 anywhere on its frame.
To lower a window (send it to the back of all other windows), select

the Lower option or click Button 3 anywhere on its frame.
Activating Windows
A window must be active to receive input from the keyboard or
mouse. To make a window active, simply move the cursor into it, or
click on the Title Bar, depending upon how your workstation is
configured. The window frame will change to the color designated on
your system for active windows.
Using Dialog Boxes

In Wellbore Planner, you use dialog boxes to enter data and to set the
display parameters for that data. Use the figures below and the
explanations on the next few pages to familiarize yourself with all the
different features on the dialog boxes.
number
editors
number
editors
selection buttons
Common Features
If you have used other OpenWorks applications, you may already be
familiar with most of the features described in this topic, and a quick
review will be all you need to begin. However, if you are a new user,
read through this topic to see how to use the menu options, buttons,
boxes, and lists you will encounter as you work with Wellbore
Planner.
Check Boxes
Square boxes with highlights are indicate that an option is toggled on.
You can select one item in each grouping or set of options. (The
highlights for option boxes look slightly different in different
platforms. On Sun stations, for example, a check mark also appears
in the highlighted box.)
ON
OFF
Selection Buttons
There are two kinds of selection buttons found on many dialog boxes.
Both buttons are raised rectangles with labels.
One type of button has a flip switch, which indicates that a

drop-down menu is available. Drop-down menus contain two or
more items. To make a selection, press Button 1 on the rectangle,
drag to the desired option, and release Button 1. Your selection
displays on the option button when you are done.
The second button type has no switch. Click on the button with
Button 1 of your mouse. The desired task is performed
immediately, or a dialog box appears.
Number Editor Boxes

Number editors consist of a box, or text field, and spinner arrows,
which enable you to change the value of that particular parameter.
Click in the box to activate it, and click on the appropriate arrow. For
example, if you want to change the X Coordinate value in the
following figure from 2000.00 to 2200.00, click on the Up arrow
twice. The number changes to 2200.00.
You can also double-click on an existing value to highlight it, and

enter a new number from the keyboard.
Text Editor Boxes

A long, rectangular box like the one pictured below denotes a field for
entering text (or for displaying text related to a selection you have
made elsewhere in the dialog box).
text editor box
To enter text in a blank box, click inside the box and enter
characters from the keyboard.
To change an existing one-word entry, double-click in the boxs

contents to highlight the text, and enter new text.
To change an existing multi-word entry, triple-click in the boxs

contents or drag the cursor across the entire entry to highlight it.
Enter the replacement text from the keyboard.
Other Dialog Box Buttons

The following table describes some additional buttons that commonly
appear throughout the Wellbore Planner interface.
Common Dialog Box Buttons

Button Name Function
Apply Accepts your specifications but leaves the dialog box open.
This option is useful as it allows you to see the effect before
you close the box.
Cancel Discards the changes you have made, reverts to the original
settings, and closes the dialog box.
Close Dismisses the window or dialog box. This option usually

appears on dialog boxes that you might have open while
performing multiple computations or tasks where you
cannot revert to the original settings.
For example, the dialog box used to create a prioritized list
of interpreters remains open until you press Close so that
you can select more than one name for the list.
Delete Removes selected (highlighted) information from a list or

from the graphic display area without the possibility of
retrieval.
OK/Execute Implements the changes/actions you have specified (or the

selection you have made) and closes the dialog box.
Using a File Selection Dialog Box

In many cases, Wellbore Planner gives you the option of entering the
full path to a file you need, or clicking on a List button to open a file
selection dialog box, which you can use to build the path by locating
and selecting the file. For example, this is the full path to a file named
default.wbp:
/home/colvin/efrank/default.wbp
The path shows that the file named default.wbp is located in the efrank
directory, which is a subdirectory of the colvin directory, which is in
turn a subdirectory of the home directory.
File location dialog boxes contain four main elements:
The Filter box specifies a directory or subdirectory on your system.

To see all the directorys files of a given type, use a wildcard (*) to
begin the last entry in the character string, and use an extension to
identify the type of files you want to display.
The Directories list displays all the subdirectories under the

directory currently specified in the Filter box.
The Files list displays all the files in the currently selected directory
that match your filter specifications. To display the files you want,
specify the filter, and click on a directory in the Directories list to
highlight it, then click on the Filter button.
The Selection box displays the full path name of the currently
selected file. This is the file and path Wellbore Planner will use.
To select a file, use either of these methods:

Position your cursor in the File box, and single-click to anchor your
cursor or double-click to select the entire path. Enter the correct
information from the keyboard.
Double-click on one of the names in the Files list.
If you dont know the files name or path and do not see it in the Files
list, you can locate it as follows:
Double-click on names in the Directories list to view the contents
of various directories. (Double-click on the entry ending in /.. to
move up one level in the directory structure.)
Enter a new wildcard or extension at the end of the path in the Filter
box. (You must include an asterisk (*) at a minimum, or no files are
displayed.) Press Return or click on the Filter button. The Files list
displays the filtered contents of the highlighted directory.
For example, if you enter

/home/wheezer/rdc/*.depth.wbp
then click on the Filter button (or press the Return key), a list
appears that contains all file names ending with .depth.wbp in the
/home/wheezer/rdc directory.
Refreshing the Contents of the Files List
Newly created files do not automatically show up in the Files list. You must click
on the Filter button to display them.
Shortcuts
Here are a few tips that will save you time as you input information
and work with the application display areas and dialog boxes.
Accepting Parameters
On many of the dialog boxes in Wellbore Planner, the OK button is
outlined with a double border. When this is the case, you can accept
the parameters specified and close the box simply by hitting the
Return key on your keyboard.
Highlighting
To replace one word in the contents of a box, double-click on it and
enter the new string. Double-clicking highlights a single word or value
so you can overwrite it.
To replace a multi-word entry in the contents of a box, triple-click

inside the box and enter the new value. Triple-clicking highlights the
entire boxs contents so you can overwrite it.
Opening Button 3 Popup Menus

As in many OpenWorks applications, a popup menu appears when you
press Button 3 in the display. These menus vary between applications
and they list options specific to the task you are performing.
For more information, refer to your Using OpenWorks manual or the

documentation for the integrated application you are currently using.
Selecting Items from a List

To select an item in a list and close the dialog box, rapidly click twice
on the item.
Tabbing Through Dialog Boxes

You can use the tab key to tab through the fields on certain dialog
boxes, such as the Target Editor window.
Getting Started
Setting Up the Initial OpenWorks Session

When you run Wellbore Planner together with OpenWorks for the first
time, you are asked to specify
which database instance you are connected to,
which Open Works project you will be accessing,
which system of measurement you wish to use, and
which well list (of those available to the selected OpenWorks
project) you wish to access.
The following work flow shows you the order in which you will be
prompted for this information. If you do not enter this information at
the start of your session, you will not be connected to the OpenWorks
database. See the following pages for additional information about
each of these steps.
Start OpenWorks.
Select the OWSYSSID.
Select an OpenWorks project.
Select a measurement system.
Select a well list from the well lists saved for the
OpenWorks project.
Specify the order of items in the well list.
Specify the well list format.
Work Flow for the First Session
Selecting the Database Server for the OpenWorks Session

If you wish to have access to the OpenWorks database, you must
select the OWSYSSID (the OpenWorks System ID) before you can
open and work with the Wellbore Planner application or any of its
utilities.
The OWSYSSID designation contains a list of Oracle database servers.
You can select different OWSYSSIDs to access OpenWorks projects
on different Oracle servers.
Choosing the Correct OWSYSSID
If you do not know which OWSYSSID to use, contact your system

administrator (or the person who installed OpenWorks) for this information.
Selecting an OpenWorks Project

An OpenWorks project is a logical collection of data. If you have
created an OpenWorks project and loaded your well data, all you have
to do is select a project from a list of the available OpenWorks projects
on your system.
If There Are No OpenWorks Projects Listed
The Select Project dialog box lists all the OpenWorks projects that you (the
current user) can access. If no OpenWorks projects are listed, click on <Create
Project> and create a new OpenWorks project for your OpenWorks session.
For detailed information on how to create a new OpenWorks project, refer to
the OpenWorks Data Management manual.
Selecting an Interpreter
So that several people can work in the same OpenWorks project and
use each others interpretations without corrupting them, OpenWorks
assigns interpreters initials to such data as
surface and fault picks and segments
pointsets and grids
lithology interpretations
If, for example, you pick Top A, other interpreters can see the pick and
can use it to create gridded surfaces. However, only you can alter the
picks you make.
When using an OpenWorks project for the first time or when you want
to try alternate interpretations, you must create an interpreter
designation (initials) for yourself. To do this, select Project
Interpreters from the OpenWorks Command Menu. For subsequent
sessions with the same OpenWorks project, you simply select an
existing interpreter designation to work with.
Selecting a System of Measurement

Measurement system is the default system of measurement units for
storing project data in the OpenWorks database. Although OpenWorks
applications can display data in any type of measurement units, you
should select the units you will use most often so the system is not
slowed down by frequent unit conversions. There are four default
systems:
US Oil Field is predominately US english units, with metric units for

some log curve and engineering data. The units are designed to
correspond to those used primarily in the U.S.
US Oil Field Metric Depth is the same as U.S. Oil Field for all units,
except depth. With the following exceptions, US Oil Field metric
depth mirrors US Oil Field:
depth measure = meters

length of the borehole = meters
elevation = meters
SPE Preferred Metric represents the common metric units used in the
oil field. This measurement system is based on information found in
the publication The SI Metric System of Units and SPE Metric
Standard published by the Society of Petroleum Engineers.
density hydrocarbon liquid = g/cm3 (not kg/m3)

density liquid = g/cm3 (not kg/m3)
density solid = g/cm3 (not kg/m3)
permeability = mD (not um2)
viscosity dynamic = cP (not Pa.s)
interval transit time = us/ft (not us/m)
slowness = us/ft (not us/m)
Canadian Metric is very similar to SPE Preferred Metric, but uses

more pure SI units in a couple of cases. This measurement system is
useful to several companies operating in Canada
If you are using a customized measurement system, the units in

Wellbore Planner default to US Oil Field (meter/feet) and Other
default system (meter/meter).
Measurement Units for Older OpenWorks Projects
When upgrading OpenWorks 4.12 projects, Metric maps to SPE Preferred

Metric and English maps to US Oil Field units.
Switching to a Different OpenWorks Project
Exit from Wellbore Planner before switching to a different OpenWorks project if

the two OpenWorks projects use different measurement systems. When you start
Wellbore Planner, it adopts the measurement system you choose for the current
OpenWorks project (in the Select Measurement System dialog box). If you then
change the OpenWorks project and the measurement system, Wellbore Planner
does not register the change in measurement system.
Selecting an OpenWorks Well List

Well lists can contain all wells in the OpenWorks project database or a
subset of those wells.
You can create specialized well lists with the OpenWorks Well List
Manager utility. You then specify a preference for how the well list
names are displayed in dialog boxes from the OpenWorks Project
Status dialog box (Project Project Status).
Choosing the Order of the Well List

Specify the way in which the OpenWorks well list is ordered. Choose
from one of the available ordering criteria:
Alphabetical
Alphabetical - Descending
Well List
<Unset>
Choosing a Well Name Format

Choose from options to specify which well characteristics are used to
identify the wells in the OpenWorks well list, and the order in which
the identifying characteristics are listed. Choose from these available
well name formats:
Common Well Name
Operator | Well Name | Well Number
Operator | Well Number
UWI
UWI | Well ID
Well Name
Well Name | Well Number
Well Number
<Unset>
Launching Wellbore Planner

The purpose of this section is to familiarize new users with the steps
required to start an OpenWorks session with Wellbore Planner.
1. Before you can launch the Wellbore Planner application, you must
first open an xterm window, and launch OpenWorks.
If you have no windows on the screen and you see only a
system prompt, enter startserver and press Return.
If there are windows displayed, but OpenWorks is not running,
move the cursor into a terminal window (xterm).
Type cd $HOME and press Return to go to your home
directory.
Type startow and press Return.
The OpenWorks Command Menu appears.
2. Launch Wellbore Planner by selecting Applications
Wellbore Planner from the OpenWorks Command Menu,
as shown in the illustration below.
3. If you are using dual monitors, you are prompted to click on the
screen where you want to display Wellbore Planner.
If you intend to work with one of the integrated applications, place

the application that requires the highest graphic performance on the
monitor with the best graphics card, and place the application with
lower graphic performance demands on the other monitor. In many
cases, the left monitor has the higher graphics capacity. (Wellbore
Planner typically has the lower graphic performance demands, so
you typically place it on the right-hand monitor.)
4. The Wellbore Planner main window appears. If you have not

already configured the OpenWorks session, a series of dialog boxes
appear, which you use to specify each of six OpenWorks session
configuration parameters. (For information about setting up the
configuration parameters when you start OpenWorks, see Setting
Up the Initial OpenWorks Session beginning on page 32.) The
illustration that follows shows the series of OpenWorks session
configuration and Wellbore Planner project selection dialog boxes
that appear.
Specify these OpenWorks session parameters in the dialog boxes

that appear:
Select an OpenWorks project in the Select Project dialog box,
and click on OK (as described on page 33).
Specify an interpreter in the Select Interpreter dialog box, and
click on OK (as described on page 33).
Select a measurement system in the Select Measurement
System dialog box, and click on OK (as described on
page 34).
In the Select Well List dialog box, select a well list from those
available in the OpenWorks project, and click on OK (as
described on page 35).
Specify the well list order in the Select Wells in Well List
Order dialog box, and click on OK (as described on page 36).
Select a well list format in the Select Wells in Well List Format
dialog box, and click on OK (as described on page 36).
Once all the OpenWorks session parameters are configured, the

Well Planning Project Selection dialog box appears. The dialog box
list contains the names of all the Wellbore Planner projects saved in
the current OpenWorks project. These are the OpenWorks projects
available for you to open.
5. In the Well Planning Project Selection dialog box, highlight the

well planning project you want to open.
6. When the appropriate well planning project name appears in the
Selection box, click on Replace (to open the project in place of any
project that may be currently open) or click on Merge (to add the
selected projects data to the data from any project that may be
currently open). If you click on Merge, you create a new version of
the project. (This new version of the project is not saved until you
select File Save in the Wellbore Planner main window.)
Workflows
This topic contains two workflows:

Integrated Well Planning Workflow (page 42)
Workflow for Designing Well Paths in Wellbore Planner (page 44)
The first of these gives you a birds-eye view of the various phases
involved in planning a well and details the Landmark products you
might use to accomplish this.
Integrated Well Planning Workflow
Identify geologic objectives in the geoscience application

(StrataModel, SeisWorks, EarthCube, OpenVision, or 3D viewers).
Launch Wellbore Planner and provide any drilling constraints.
Define the initial Pick drilling targets in the geoscience application.

targets and well path
Group targets into a well plan, and evaluate drilling feasibility.
Balance the geologic reserves requirements with drilling

requirements in a recommended well path.
Validate the well path in Wellbore Planner and COMPASS.
Develop a well engineering plan by using WELLPLAN.

design the well and
perform cost analysis
Develop a casing plan with the aid of applications
such as Wellbore Manager, Profile, or PetroWorks.
Develop a cost estimate using WELLPLAN.
Evaluate economics using the geoscience applications and ARIES.
continued
Initialize a new location using DIMS For Windows (DFW) and

Production Data Mover (PDM).
Drill well and monitor engineering, using DFW, COMPASS and

WELLPLAN
Drill, monitor, and

geo-steer
Monitor geologic objectives and geo-steering, by using the
geoscience applications, PDM, and Wellbore Planner.
Complete well or plug and abandon

by using DFW, Profile, and Wellbore Manager
End of well report.
Designing Well Paths in Wellbore Planner

The second workflow (see the following page) presents a typical path
that you would follow when designing well paths using Wellbore
Planner with one of its integrated applications.
In the integrated application, select the views or displays of the

geologic feature(s) you are interested in drilling.
Create a new well planning project for your well plan.
Connect to Wellbore Planner from the integrated application and

create a new well plan.
In the integrated application, pick the targets

to be used in this well plan.
In Wellbore Planner, specify a starting location, such as the surface

well location or an OpenWorks well.
Set target parameters in Wellbore Planner.
In the main window, select calculation options and the dogleg

severity (DLS).
continued
Calculate the well path. Check the results in the Wellbore Planner
main and view windows and the other application.
View the well path parameters in Wellbore Planners Redline View

window (page 101) and note any parameters that exceed the default
limits. Adjust the parameter settings as desired.
Continue to edit target parameters, or well path until you are

satisfied with the well plan.
Calculate well position uncertainty for the well plan. View the
uncertainty projections in the Plan View and Section View
windows, and in an integrated work session with OpenVision or
StratWorks 3D. Make any adjustments in the well plan that are
necessary (page 220).
You can create other well plans in the active well planning project,
if you like.
Create hardcopy reports of your well plans.
Save your proposed well plans to the OpenWorks database, or

export them in various formats.
Have the drilling engineer use COMPASS for Windows and

WELLPLAN to develop the complete drilling plan.
Exiting Programs and Applications
The steps for exiting from OpenWorks and from Wellbore Planner
differ slightly, but the procedures are all quick and easy.
Exiting Wellbore Planner

You can exit Wellbore Planner at any time. Generally, if you have any
unsaved data, Wellbore Planner prompts you to save your work before
it shuts down. Default target settings or parameters are retained
automatically.
To exit Wellbore Planner, select File Exit. Unless you receive a

prompt to save first, the application will shut down immediately. Since
the OpenWorks Command Menu remains, you can go on to open
another application or exit from OpenWorks.
Exiting OpenWorks
1. To exit from OpenWorks, select Project Exit.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
2. Click on OK to confirm the exit command.
Creating a Well Plan
Overview
Generally, you organize work in Wellbore Planner according to the

following hierarchy
A project, the top level of the hierarchy, is a planning project that

consists of one or more proposed well plans.
A well plan consists of a set of targets and instructions for how to

hit them. Well plans can relate to one or more proposed well types.
You can create a plan in the Wellbore Planner or in most of the
integrated applications.
A target is a location, represented by an object such as a point or a

circle, through which the calculated well path must pass.
You can pick targets from within an integrated application or create

them in Wellbore Planner. Targets become available to the entire
well planning project, which allows you to select the ones you want
for each well plan. A target can be assigned to one or more well
plans or to no well plan at all.
R2003.12 Creating a Well Plan 47

Working with Projects
When you use Wellbore Planner for the first time or when you begin a
new task, create and name a new project to contain your well plans and
targets.
About Well Planning Projects

Think of a Wellbore Planner project as a file stored in OpenWorks that
contains one or more well plans and their associated targets. You can
store any number of well plans in a single Wellbore Planner project.
However, for project management purposes, you will probably want to
create multiple projects, and group your data by a common thread. For
example, you may want one project to focus on location, another
project to contain wells by drilling season, and yet another project to
subset wells by producing zone.
The following illustration contains a scheme for two sample projects

with their respective well plans and targets.
North Platform Project
Plan A Plan B Plan C

Target T-1 Target T-1 Target T-1
Target T-4
Windsor Development Project
Well A Plan Well B Plan Well C Plan

Target A-1 Target B-1 Target C-2
Target A-5 Target B-5

Selecting a Wellbore Planner Project to Display

When you launch Wellbore Planner, the Well Planning Project
Selection dialog box appears, along with the Wellbore Planner main
window.
Notice the buttons at the bottom of the Project Selection dialog box:
Replace replaces the current well planning project with the newly
selected project
Merge merges the data that is currently up on your screen with the
newly selected project and creates a new version of the project.
Cancel cancels the operation.
From this dialog box, you can either select an existing project or type
in the name of a new project.

Creating a New Project During the Current Session

As described in the previous topic, you can create a new project when
you first launch Wellbore Planner. You can also create a new project
at any time during your current well planning session.
1. Select File New in the Wellbore Planner main window. When

you choose New from the File menu, the Wellbore Planner window
is cleared of any data that may appear in it and is ready for your
new data.
2. Begin to generate the well plans and targets that you want to store
in the project. Once you are satisfied that you want to save this data
to a project, proceed to step 3 where you will actually create the
project.
3. To save your data in a new project, select File Save As. Enter a
name for the new project into the Well Planning Project Save As
dialog box.
Enter a name for the

new project here.
4. Click on OK to create the project. The name of the new project

appears in the title bar.

project name
spreadsheet area
Opening an Existing Project

You can switch to another project at any time during the Wellbore
Planner session. To open an existing Wellbore Planner project:
1. Select File Open.

The Well Planning Project Selection dialog box appears.
2. In the Well Planning Project Selection dialog box, locate and select
the name of the project you want to open.
Your selection appears in the Selection box.
3. Click on OK to open the specified project, and close the Well

Planning Project Selection dialog box.

If you or another interpreter on your project team have created and

saved any well plans in the current project, the well plans appear in
the Plans list on the left of the Wellbore Planner main window. The
first well plan is selected by default. This is the active well plan
until you select another one.
available selected
well plans targets
targets
For example, in this illustration Alpha-1 is the active well plan. The
targets that appear in the Available list are available to be included
in any of the projects well plans, but these targets are not currently
selected to be part of the active well plan. Target 2 and Target 3 (the
targets in the Selected list) are included in active well plan and
affect the well plans calculated path.

Deleting a Wellbore Planner Project

To delete a project (including any well plans, targets and data it
contains), select File Delete in the Wellbore Planner main window.
The following verification message box appears:
Press Yes to delete the project; press No to cancel the deletion.
Saving a Wellbore Planner Project

To save a project, including any well plans, targets, and data it
contains, select File Save in the Wellbore Planner main window, or
click on the Save Project shortcut button.
To save a copy of the project under a different name, select File

Save As. When the Well Planning Project Save As dialog box appears,
type in the name of the project you wish to write the copy to.
As soon as you save and name it, the new project becomes the current
one. This feature is especially useful if you want to create a new
project easily by modifying an existing one.

Introduction to Working with Well Plans
Once you have created a project, you can store one or more well plans
in it. For each well plan, you specify a starting location and up to 49
targets that you want the well path to hit.
Read this section to learn how to

choose a well plan type
create a new well plan
open an existing well plan
save a well plan
delete a well plan
close a well plan
For information on setting up and creating well plans in specific

applications, see
Integrating with EarthCube beginning on page 272

Integrating with OpenVision and StratWorks 3D beginning on
page 284
Integrating with SeisWorks beginning on page 304
Integrating with Stratamodel beginning on page 322
You should already have Wellbore Planner running.
These instructions assume that you have Wellbore Planner running and that you
have created and named a new project for the session. For specific instructions on
how to launch Wellbore Planner, refer to Launching Wellbore Planner beginning
on page 37. For instructions on how to create a new project, see Creating a New
Project During the Current Session beginning on page 50.

Creating a New Well Plan

To create a new well plan in Wellbore Planner, follow these steps:
1. In the Wellbore Planner main window, select Plans New.
2. In the New Plan dialog box that appears, type a name (with a
maximum of 20 characters) for your well plan and click on OK.
3. Enter a name for the new well plan in the Name box, and click on
OK.
The new well plan is created, and becomes the active well plan.
Because it is the active well plan, the well plans name appears
above the spreadsheet in the Wellbore Planner main window, and
the well plan name is highlighted in the Plans list.
new well plan name
If you want the new well plan to be a permanent part of the well
planning project, save the project. For instructions on this step, see
Saving a Wellbore Planner Project on page 53.

Opening an Existing Well Plan

To open a previously created project well plan, go to the Plans list and
click on the plan you want to display.
Click on a plan
name to select it.
The name of the selected well plan appears above the spreadsheet and
the data, if any, changes accordingly.
Switching Between Well Plans
You can easily switch back and forth between well plans by selecting a different
well plan name in the Plans list. If you have modified a well plan, Wellbore Planner
temporarily saves your changes to a buffer while you work in other well plans in
the same project. If you switch to another project, however, your changes are lost
unless you save the project before making the switch.
Making a Copy of the Active Well Plan

To create a copy of the active well plan under a new name, make sure
the correct well plan name is highlighted in the Plans list of the
Wellbore Planner main window, then select Plans Copy As.

The Save Plan As dialog box appears. Enter the new well plan name
and click on OK. The new well plan is added to the current Wellbore
Planner project, and becomes the active well plan.
Closing the Well Plan and Canceling Unsaved Changes

Select Plans Close to close a well plan. Any changes you may have
made up to this point are saved temporarily in a buffer. (You must
select File Save to save the well plan changes permanently.)
At this point, before you have selected another well plan to be the
active well plan, any new targets you create are added to the project as
unassigned targets.
Select Plans Cancel to close the well plan and cancel any changes
you have made since you last saved the well plan. You can use the
Cancel option to cancel any edits you have made to the well plan
parameters, such as sorting the target list and selecting targets for the
well plan. The cancellation does not, however, include any edits you
made to the targets themselves.
Deleting a Well Plan

If you decide that you want to delete the active well plan, simply select
Plans Delete in the Wellbore Planner main window. You have the
option of deleting:
Plan Only
Plan and Targets
A verification message box appears.
Click on Yes to remove the active well plan from the Wellbore
Planner project.
Click on No to cancel the delete operation.

Specifying a Well Plan Type
Overview
Click on the Type button to select a well plan type from the
drop-down list. The well plan type determines which type of starting
location the well plan will have.
You can choose from the following starting location types:

Unknown The well paths starting location is unspecified, so the
well path begins at the first target. This is the default selection.
Surface Well The well path begins at a surface location you
specify or at a surface location recommended by Wellbore Planner.
Sidetrack The well path begins at a point on a parent
OpenWorks well or a parent well plan in the Wellbore Planner
project. The well plan begins at a measured depth (kickoff) you
specify or at a kickoff point recommended by Wellbore Planner.
Look Ahead The well path begins at the bottom of an
OpenWorks parent well. Wellbore Planner calculates the path from
the OpenWorks well to the look ahead well plan targets.
Complex Extension The well path begins at the bottom of an
existing well plan. With a complex extension well plan, you can
plan a well that has different parameters applied to each section of
the well path.
Platform Location This type of well plan identifies the
coordinates of the platform location for the platform wells in the
well planning project. This type of well plan has no targets.
Platform Well The well path begins at a specified measured
depth below the projects platform location.

Elevation or Measured Depth must be in feet or meters.

If you specify a Surface plan type, enter its elevation in feet or meters. If you
specify a Sidetrack plan type, enter the measured depth of the starting location in
feet or meters.
Wellbore Planner stores all values as depth values. If the original location is in time,
you need to determine the equivalent depth from an appropriate time/depth table or
time-depth velocity model.
The following diagram illustrates each of these locations:
Side View
Unknown Surface
Starting location Well
Starting location (First Target)
Look Ahead
Sidetrack
Starting location Well A OpenWorks

Well
Starting location
Plan
Platform
Complex Well
Extension Platform location
Well Plan A
Starting location
kickoff at measured depth
Starting location
Well Plan B

Creating an Unknown Type of Well Plan

Until you make a different selection, the Type button in Wellbore
Planners main window is set to Unknown. A well plan with an
unknown location consists of a series of targets that are joined together
by a well path, but are not linked to a surface location or existing well.
When calculated, a well plan with an unknown starting location begins

at the first target and is oriented in the general direction of the second
target. While it would be impossible to drill a well that does not have
either a surface location or sidetrack point, you may want to leave the
starting location as unknown until you have evaluated the potential
surface locations.
Recommendations for Surface Location and Kickoff Point
Once you have selected your targets, Wellbore Planner can recommend a surface
location and/or the kickoff point. See Creating a Surface Well Plan on page 61
for instructions.
To create a well plan of Unknown type, follow these steps:
1. Click on the Type button in the Wellbore Planner main window and
select Unknown from the drop-down list.
2. Set the target display parameters in the Target Editor window (as
described in the topics beginning on page 119).
3. Select the well plan targets from within any OpenWorks integrated
application you are using with Wellbore Planner, such as
OpenVision (page 284), EarthCube (page 272), or SeisWorks
(page 304). You can also choose targets based on ZGF files you
display in the Plan View window (page 88), and grids you display
in the Section View window (page 94).

Creating a Surface Well Plan

You can specify a surface location as the starting point for a well plan.
This type of well plan begins at a particular x, y, z location and
connects a series of targets.
The well plan can also have a kickoff point that specifies the point at
which the plan first deviates from vertical orientation. If you have
already selected your targets, Wellbore Planner can recommend a
surface location and/or a kickoff point.
If you have existing targets
After you have picked targets, you can ask Wellbore Planner to show a hold angle
or to recommend a starting location or kickoff point. See Setting the Calculation
Options on page 144 for specific instructions.
To specify a surface well location, follow these steps:
1. Click on the Type button and select Surface Well.

The following surface location parameters appear on the right side
of the Wellbore Planner window. The default values place the
surface location directly above the first target.
surface location parameters
2. You can adjust any of the following surface location parameters by

clicking on the up and down arrows or by entering values
from the keyboard.
X Coordinate the geographical point of the surface location
in the East-West direction
Y Coordinate the geographical point of the surface location
in the North-South direction

Elevation distance of the surface location from sea level,

usually at a height above sea level and therefore a positive
number. In OpenWorks, elevation is also referred to as surface
elevation, kelly bushing (KB), or derrick floor. In Wellbore
Planner, elevation is typically KB. If your original elevation is
in time, convert it to depth.
Kickoff Point (MD) the measured depth at the point where
the well path first deviates from a vertical line. (Measured depth
is the actual distance of the well path from the surface location
to a designated pointin this case, the kickoff point.) Specify
this depth in positive measured depth.
Hold Angle the angle at the end of the first build section.
Although the hold angle is not an actual well plan parameter, it
is provided to help calculate the location or kickoff point, or to
help assess whether the location and kickoff point you selected
are reasonable
3. If appropriate, use one of the recommend options to suggest
optimum settings. Click on the button under the Hold Angle box,
and select one of the options (described below) from the drop-down
list. The options allow you to calculate tentative surface location
and kickoff point settings, based on information that you provide.
The menu provides the following options:
Recommend Location If you provide a kickoff point, a hold
angle, an elevation, and a sequence of targets, Wellbore Planner
suggests optimum x and y values. The hold angle is the angle at the
end of the first build section.
Recommend Kickoff Point If you provide x and y coordinates,
an elevation, a hold angle, and a sequence of targets, Wellbore
Planner suggests an optimum kickoff point.
Show Hold Angle For a surface well, provide the x and y
coordinates, an elevation, a kickoff point, and a sequence of targets,
then click on the Show Hold Angle button to post the resulting
hold angle.
4. Select File Save.
Wellbore Planner saves the well planning project, with the changes
you have made.

Creating a Sidetrack Well Plan

A sidetrack well plan begins at a point on a parent OpenWorks well or
a parent well plan in your well planning project. (A sidetrack well is
separate from its parent OpenWorks well or well plan.) The well plan
begins at a measured depth (kickoff) you specify or at a kickoff point
recommended by Wellbore Planner.
Adding Existing Wells to the Well Planning Project

If you specify a well plan as a sidetrack, complex extension, or look
ahead well, you may be using an existing well as the basis (or parent)
for the well plan. To specify an existing well as a parent well, you
must first add it to the well planning project.
Since you can add wells to the well planning project only from the
well list that is currently selected for your OpenWorks session, make
sure the OpenWorks well list is the appropriate one before you begin.
Switching to a Different OpenWorks Well List

To switch to a different well list for your OpenWorks session, follow
these steps:
1. From the OpenWorks Command Menu, select Project
Project Status.
The Project Status Tool window appears.
2. Select Options Change Well List.

The Change Well List dialog box appears.
3. Select a well list, and click on OK.

The OpenWorks session is set to use the new well list.
4. Relaunch Wellbore Planner, so the new well list will be available in

Wellbore Planner dialog boxes.
Adding OpenWorks Wells to Your Wellbore Planner Project

To add one or more existing wells to the current well planning project,
follow these steps:
1. If you have not already done so, create or open a well planning
project (as described on page 50 and page 51), and a create or open
a well plan (as described on page 55 and page 56).

2. Select File OpenWorks Wells in the Wellbore Planner main

window.
The OpenWorks Wells dialog box appears, as shown in the
following illustration. (It may take a moment for the dialog box to
appear, depending on number of wells to be displayed.)
The Available list contains the names of all the wells in the
currently selected OpenWorks well list. The list also contains the
names of any preliminary wells that you or your project team
members have added to the current Wellbore Planner project (as
described on page 175). The well names appear in the well list
format currently selected for the OpenWorks project.
3. Select the well or wells from the Available list that you want to
make accessible in your well planning project. Use these methods
to select wells:
To select wells individually, click on each well name you want
to add.
To select all wells in the well list, click on the All button.
To clear all the current well selections. click on the None
button.
4. When the appropriate wells appear in the Selected list, click on
Close.

The selected wells are added to the current well planning project.
The wells appear in the Plan View, Section View, and 3D View
windows, if you display these windows and set the display option to
include all well plans and wells. The wells are also added to
context-sensitive lists that appear in the Wellbore Planner main
window under the following circumstances:
You select Sidetrack as the well plan type. The right side of
the Wellbore Planner main window displays the Sidetrack list,
which you use to select the parent well for your well plan.
You select Look Ahead as the well plan type. The right side of
the Wellbore Planner main window displays the Look Ahead
list, which you use to select the parent well for your well plan.
How to Create a Sidetrack Well Plan

To specify a well plan as a sidetrack well, follow these steps:
1. If you are going to use an existing well as the basis for the sidetrack
well plan, begin by adding the parent well to your Wellbore Planner
project. Follow the instructions on page 63.
2. In the Wellbore Planner main window, click on the Type button and
select Sidetrack from the drop-down list of well types.
The right side of the Wellbore Planner window displays the

sidetrack configuration options. The sidetrack configuration options
include the Sidetrack list, which contains all the wells and well
plans (other than the active well plan) that are part of the current
Wellbore Planner project, as shown in the illustration that follows.
The Wellbore Planner window also displays the Mill Out Depth
box and the Calculate Mill Out Depth button (as described in the
following text.)

sidetrack configuration options
3. In the Sidetrack list, select the name of the parent well or parent
well plan that will be the basis for your sidetrack well plan. (Click
on the well or well plan name to highlight it.)
The active well plan is set to use the specified well as a basis.
4. Specify a mill out depth, by using either of these methods:

In the Mill Out Depth box, specify the depth at which you
want the sidetrack to kick off from the parent well. Specify this
value as the distance from the parent well or well plans
starting point. If the original distance is in expressed as a time-
domain value, convert it to depth. Use feet or meters, according
to the depth measurement units appropriate for the
measurement system you selected for the current OpenWorks
session.
Wellbore Planner is set to begin the sidetrack well path at the
specified mill out depth along the parent well or well plan.
Click on the Calculate Mill Out Depth button. (This option is

available only for sidetrack wells.) Wellbore Planner calculates
the ideal mill out depth for you (the geometrically optimum
point for the sidetrack well plan to leave the original parent
well path).
Wellbore Planner calculates the mill out point that makes it
possible to hit the well plan targets with the least amount of
drilling, without violating any of the well planning projects
redline parameters. The mill out point must be within a
relatively straight section of well (with a DLS of less than 1.5).
you have made.

Creating a Look Ahead Well Plan

A look ahead well plan compares an existing OpenWorks well with a
well plan (usually the plan the OpenWorks well was based on) and
calculates a path to the remaining targets. The Look Ahead path
extends from the bottom of the OpenWorks well to those targets in the
well plan that are deeper than the total depth of the OpenWorks well.
To create a look ahead well plan that extends from the bottom of an
existing well, follow the steps below:
1. Make sure you have the appropriate well list selected for your
OpenWorks session. If necessary, select a new OpenWorks session
well list, as described in Switching to a Different OpenWorks
Well List on page 63.
2. Add the parent well to the Wellbore Planner project (the well you
are going to use as a basis for the look ahead well). Select File
OpenWorks Wells in the Wellbore Planner main window to
display the OpenWorks Wells dialog box. For step-by-step
instructions, see Adding OpenWorks Wells to Your Wellbore
Planner Project on page 63.
Wellbore Planner adds the well or wells you selected to your
project. The well(s) appear in the Plan View, Section View, and 3D
View windows, if you display these windows and set the display
option to include all well plans and wells. The well(s) are also
added to the Look Ahead well list described in step 4.
select Look Ahead from the drop-down list of well types.

The right side of the Wellbore Planner window displays the Look
Ahead list, which contains all the wells and well plans (other than
the active well plan) that are part of the current Wellbore Planner
project, as shown in the illustration that follows.
4. Select the well name you want to use as a basis for your well plan.
(Click on the well name to highlight it.)
The active well plan is set to use the specified well as a basis.

you have made.
For information about monitoring a well in progress, see Monitoring

a Wells Progress on page 365.

Creating a Complex Extension Well Plan

In a complex extension well plan, the well path begins at the bottom of
an existing well plan. A complex extension well plan looks similar to a
look ahead well plan: in both types of well plans you append the new
well plan to a previous well plan. A complex extension well plan,
however, makes it possible to create multiple sections in the well plan,
and apply different calculation parameters to each section. (For
example, you can use varying amounts of dogleg severity or different
redline parameters.) You base the complex extension well plan on
another well plan, and any changes you make to the parent well plan
also affect the complex extension well plan.
You may want to create a complex extension well plan if the drilling
parameters need to change along the well path. For example,
parameter changes may result from the differences in hole size for
various sections of casing, from the muds used in different sections of
the well, and from the effects of penetrating different types of geologic
structures.
To create a complex extension well plan, follow the steps below:

select Complex Extension from the drop-down list of well types
(as shown below).

The right side of the window displays the Base Plan list, which is a
list of all the projects well plans (other than the active well plan).
An example of a Base Plan list is shown in the illustration below.
2. Select the name of the well plan to which you want to append your
well plan. (Click on the name of the well plan to highlight it.)
The active well plan is set to use the specified well plan as a basis.

you have made.

Creating a Platform Location and Platform Well Plans

Once you create a surface well or a platform well in a well planning
project, you use the Platform Location plan type for the plan that
identifies the well plans central location. You tie the platform well
plans in the project to the platform location. You can then move the
platform to an optimum location, and all the associated wells
automatically move to accommodate the change. Working with wells
as an associated group has another advantage: when you recalculate
the platforms location, the Platform Monitor information box
automatically appears and gives you information to help improve your
well plans.
Creating a Platform Location
Preparing to Establish a Platform Location
Note that the well plan designated as the platform location cannot have any targets
associated with it. Before you select Platform Location as the plan type, make sure
you remove all the targets from the Selected list (or make sure the targets are also
selected for other project plans). If any targets remain in the Selected list when you
specify the well plan as the platform location, Wellbore Planner displays a warning
message like the one below. If you choose to continue, Wellbore Planner removes
all the targets selected for the active well plan.
To specify a well plan as a platform location, you can follow the steps
outlined in this topic, or you can use a strategic approach (See Setting
Up a Platform Well Project on page 355.)
1. Activate the well plan you want to use as the platform location, by
clicking on the well plans name in the Plans list.
2. Click on the Type button, and select Platform Location from the
drop-down list of options.

Context-sensitive fields and options for the platform location

appear on the right side of the Wellbore Planner main window, like
the ones shown in the illustration below.
3. Specify the location coordinates of the platform location, in either

of these ways:
Specify the platform locations X Coordinate value, its

Y Coordinate value, and the value for its Elevation (in
TVDSS). Enter values from the keyboard or use the arrows to
adjust the values incrementally. (You can get the coordinate
information from Map View in StratWorks or SeisWorks, or
from a seismic line display.)
Click on the button under the Optimize based upon button,

and select an option from the drop-down list (as shown below).
The option you choose will be the basis Wellbore Planner uses
for optimizing the platform location.
execution button for

automatic optimization
options for the basis

of optimization

Each one of the optimization options sets Wellbore Planner to find a

platform location that minimizes a particular factor or group of
factors, as described in the following list:
Cumulative MD measured depth (or along hole depth) of
the well plans added together
Cumulative Directional directional drilling required to
complete all the well plans
Average DLS average rate of dogleg severity (DLS) for the
well plans
Average Reach average reach (straight-line distance from
the well platforms starting location to the bottom hole
location) of the well plans
Maximum Directional directional drilling required to
complete the well path that calls for the maximum amount of
directional drilling
Maximum DLS dogleg severity (DLS) for the well plan
with the highest DLS (figured as a percentage of the well
planning projects redline DLS value)
Maximum Build build rate for the well plan with the
highest build rate (figured as a percentage of the well planning
projects redline build rate)
Maximum Drop drop rate for the well plan with the highest
drop rate (figured as a percentage of the well planning projects
redline drop rate)
Maximum Turn turn rate for the well plan with the highest
turn rate (figured as a percentage of the well planning projects
redline turn rate)
Maximum Inclination inclination for the well plan with
the highest inclination rate (figured as a percentage of the well
planning projects redline inclination rate
Maximum Reach longest reach for any of the well plans
(also see Average Reach)
Weighted MD multiple weighted factors for the well plans,
incorporating redline parameter conformance, cumulative MD,
and cumulative directional drilling required to complete the
well plans
Landmark Graphics recommends that you use Weighted MD as the
optimization basis for a typical project. (For a description of how
factors are weighted, see page 364.)
4. Click on the Optimize based upon button.
Wellbore Planner optimizes the platform location on the specified
basis. (This option is available only for platform locations.)

Creating a Platform Well

You use the Platform Well option to create multiple platform wells
that are attached to a particular platform location. Platform wells kick
off at a specified amount of measured depth (kickoff depth) below the
parent platform location.
To create a platform well, take the following steps:
1. In the main window, click on the Type button, and select Platform
Well from the drop-down option list.
Context-sensitive platform well options appear on the right side of
the Wellbore Planner main window:
Platform list
Slot X Offset
Slot Y Offset
RKB
Kickoff Depth box
Calculate Kickoff Depth button
platform well options
2. In the Platform Well list, select the name of the platform location
you want to use as a basis for the active platform well plan.
3. Enter a Slot X Offset to specify any slot offset, in the X direction,
from the platform center.
4. Enter a Slot Y Offset to specify any slot offset, in the Y direction,
from the platform center.
5. Enter the RKB (Rig Kelly Bushing).
6. Specify a Kickoff depth in either of these ways:

Specify a value in the Kickoff Depth box by entering a

number from the keyboard or by using the arrows to adjust the
value incrementally. Use the depth measurement units
associated with the measurement system chosen for the current
OpenWorks session.
Click on the Calculate Kickoff Depth button. (This option is
available only for platform wells.)
you have made.
For information about working with platform wells in progress, see
Monitoring a Wells Progress on page 365.

Viewing Well Plans
As you develop well plans, you can view them in any of these
locations:
any integrated OpenWorks-family applications you run with
Wellbore Planner
Plan View window (page 83)
Section View window (page 91)
3D View window (page 96)
Redline View window (page 98)
Diagram Preview window (page 104) (You will probably want to
view your well plans in this window only in the latter stages of well
planning.)
You can set up the Wellbore Planner view windows with custom
display options, and resize and rearrange the view windows as
necessary.
Quick Overview of the Shortcut View Buttons

The left side of the Wellbore Planner window has a shortcut toolbox
with buttons that invoke frequently used commands. Most of these
toolbox buttons control view options to display view windows, set the
target range and well plan range restrictions, and automatically tile the
windows that are currently open.
You can also invoke most of these commands from the Wellbore
Planner Views menu items. (The Auto-Tile function is only available
through the shortcut button. The command to display the Diagram
Preview window is available only through the menu option.)

The relationship between the view shortcut buttons and View menu
items is shown in the illustration that follows.
display the Diagram

display the Preview window
Plan View window (accessible only through
display the the menu option)
Section View window
display the
3D View window
display the
Redline View window
toggles to show all project targets or
only the targets in the active well plan
toggles to show all project well plans
or only the active well plan
save the project file
tile the open view windows

(accessible only through the
shortcut button)
Displaying the View Windows

To display any of the basic view windows (the Plan View, Section
View, 3D View, or Redline View window), follow these steps:
1. Click on the well plan name you want to view in the Plans list of the
main Wellbore Planner window.
The well plan is highlighted in the Plans list, and the well plan is
displayed in any view windows that are already open. The Wellbore
Planner window shows target and location specifications related to
the active well plan.

2. Display the view window by using either of these methods:

Plan View
Click on the shortcut button for opening the window (in the
Section View upper left corner of the Wellbore Planner main window). The
four view window shortcut buttons are shown at left.
3D View Select one of these options from the Views menu in the
Wellbore Planner main window to display the view window of
Redline View
your choice:
Plan Plan View window
Section Section View window
3D 3D View window
Redline Redline View window
The selected view window appears.
To display the Diagram Preview window, follow these steps:
1. Click on the well plan name you want to view in the Plans list of the
main Wellbore Planner window.
2. Select Views Well Plan Diagram in the Wellbore Planner main
window.
The Diagram Preview window appears, with the active well plan
displayed.
Specifying General Viewing Options

You can specify a number of options that affect the content of the Plan
View, Section View, and 3D View windows. You can choose these
display options:
whether to display all targets and well plans in the Wellbore Planner
project (in the Plan View, Section View, and 3D View windows) or
whether to restrict the types of targets and well plans displayed
the coloring scheme to apply to well plans and wells in the Plan
View, Section View, and 3D View windows
whether or not to include uncertainty data for the well plans and
wells that appear in the Plan View and Section View windows
In addition to these general options, each viewing window has a set of

supplementary viewing and control options, described in the topic for
each window.

Defining the Range of Targets and Well Plans Displayed

You can specify whether to restrict the targets and well plans displayed
in the Plan View, Section View, and 3D View windows, in either of
these ways:
Use the shortcut buttons:
show all project
targets or only Click on the Non-plan targets shortcut button to toggle
the targets for
the active well between showing all the targets in the Wellbore Planner project
plan well plans, or only the targets in the active well plan. (This is
show all project the top button shown at left.)
well plans or
only the active Click on the Other Plans and Wells shortcut button to toggle
well plan
between showing all the well plans in the Wellbore Planner
project, or only the active (currently selected) well plan. (This
is the bottom button shown at left.)
or
Select Views Options in the Wellbore Planner main window,
and make selections from the drop-down menu. Click on one option
from each pair to select it.
Target Range Restrictions
Choose one of these target range restrictions:

All Targets Display all the targets saved in the current well
planning project.
Plan Targets Only Display only the targets in the active
well plan.
Well Plan Range Restrictions
Choose one of these well plan range restrictions:

All Plans Display all the well plans in the current well
planning project.
Current Plan Only Display only the active well plan.
The Plan View, Section View, and 3D View windows reflect the
choices you have made until you make new choices or you end the
well planning session. (These display options are session-specific.
You set target and well plan range restrictions at the beginning of
each Wellbore Planner session.)

Examples of Target Range and Well Plan Range Viewing Options

The examples that follow show the Section View window with
different combinations of viewing options applied for the target and
well plan range. (Note that in addition to the well project elements
that are selected for display, the view window also displays wells
(and well targets) that have been added to the well planning project
in Wellbore Planners OpenWorks Wells dialog box.)
Non-plan Targets is OFF. Non-plan Targets is ON.

(Only the active well plan targets appear.) (All project targets appear.)
Other Plans and Wells is OFF. Other Plans and Wells is OFF.
(Only the active well plan and the project wells appear.) (Only the active well plan and the project wells appear.)
Non-plan Targets is OFF. Non-plan Targets is ON.

(Only the active well plan targets appear. (All project targets appear.)
Other Plans and Wells is ON. Other Plans and Wells is ON.
(All project well plans and wells appear.) (All project well plans and wells appear.)

Selecting a Color Scheme for Displaying Well Plans and Wells

You can select the color scheme for displaying well plans and wells in
the Wellbore Planner Plan View, Section View, and 3D View window
by selecting Views Plan Colors in the Wellbore Planner main
window, then choosing one of the options shown in the illustration
below.
The pointing dispatcher sends the color scheme choices to any

integrated applications you are running so that all applications use
the same colors for Wellbore Planner targets and well plans.
The Plan Colors menu options are:
Solid (Default) The well plan (or well) that is currently
highlighted in the Plans list of the Wellbore Planner main
window is set to appear in yellow in the Plan View, Section
View, and 3D View windows. (This is the default Plan Colors
option.) If one of the other Plan Colors options is selected, the
default coloring is applied to any parts of the active well plan
or well that are not covered by the specified plan color option.
by Redline Parms Any well path sections that violate the
well planning projects redline parameters are displayed in red.
Other well path sections are displayed with default coloring.
by Section Unique colors distinguish each build and turn
section of the active well path.
by Casing Unique colors distinguish each casing section
that is set for wells that are included in the well planning
project (regardless of which well or well plan is active).
by Completion/Perforation Unique colors distinguish each
completion section that is set for wells that are included in the
well planning project (regardless of which well or well plan is
active).

Enabling View Windows to Display Uncertainty Ranges

You can enable Wellbore Planner to display well position uncertainty
ranges in the Plan View and Section View windows by selecting
Views Uncertainty Enable in the Wellbore Planner main
window.
Wellbore Planner displays uncertainty ranges as outlines (by default)
in the Plan View and Section View windows. (Depending on the scale
of objects displayed in the window, you may have to zoom in to see
the uncertainty ranges.)
Wellbore Planner calculates each uncertainty range based on the error
margins defined for the current default survey tool. (For information
about selecting a new default survey tool, see page 224. For more
information about well position uncertainty, see the chapter Working
with Well Position Uncertainty beginning on page 220.)
When you select the Enable option, the option names changes to
Enabled on the Views menu next to a highlighted box. (The
highlighted box shows that the option is active.) The Enabled option
remains active until you clear the selection (by clicking on Disable) or
you end the Wellbore Planner session. (Uncertainty display options are
session-specific. Each time you start a Wellbore Planner session in
which you want to view well position uncertainty ranges, you must
enable the uncertainty display.)
If you have set the Calculations button to Manual and make a change
in the well plan that requires recalculating the well path, you must
click on the Calculate button (shown at left) before Wellbore Planner
can display uncertainty projections.
Arranging Windows with the Auto-Tile Function

This option displays all open windows (for example, the various view
windows, the Wellbore Planner main window, and the Target Editor
window) side by side on the screen, resizing them to fit if necessary.
See the topics about using the Plan View (page 83), Section View
(page 91), 3D View (page 96), Redline View (page 98), and Diagram
Preview (page 104) windows for descriptions of the shortcut buttons
and menu options available in each window.

Using the Plan View Window

The Plan View window displays the well plan from above, with north
shown at the top, much like a map.
Click on the
shortcut button to:
move an existing target or

move the starting location
create a new target the line of

section used in
draw an area to zoom to the Section
View window
(dotted line)
revert to original display
zoom in active well plan
path (yellow
zoom out line)
define the line of section platform
that determines the location
Section View display
measure the distance
between points
turn on the reference grid
swap the background

and foreground color
The surface location is represented by a small square containing an x.

Targets defined as shapes appear as colored shapes, and targets
defined as points are represented by a small set of cross hairs.
Capturing the View Window Display as a Graphic File

For information about capturing the contents of the Plan View window as graphic
file, so that you can print it on a PostScript-compatible laser printer or on a plotter,
see page 213.

Move Target or Surface Location Put the cursor in move mode, so

you can use the mouse to drag the active well plans starting location
or move an existing target in any well plan that is displayed. To move
an existing well plan or target, click on this shortcut button and drag
the target or plan marker (not the label) with your cursor. Any changes
you make in this fashion are simultaneously displayed in other
Wellbore Planner displays and in any integrated applications you are
running.
Select a New Target Location Put the cursor in pick mode, so you
can use the mouse to create a new target.
Rectangular Zoom Put the cursor in a mode for drawing the

boundary of the section of the view window which you want to
display. Hold down Button 1 and drag the mouse to create a rubber
band border around the area of interest. When you release the mouse
button, the defined area fills the window.
Original Display Return from any modified view you have created
back to the home view.
Point Zoom Put the cursor in zoom in mode, so you can click
inside the window to zoom in (enlarge the appearance of objects by
reducing the area displayed). If you click off-center in the window,
you also shift the center of interest.
Point Unzoom Put the cursor in zoom out mode, so you can click
inside the window to zoom out (enlarge the area displayed). If you
click off-center in the window, you also shift the center of interest.

Define Section Views Line of Section Put the cursor in draw

mode for the line of section. With the cursor in draw mode, press down
on Button 1 and drag the mouse to define the line of section that
determines the display in the Section View window. (If you have
already defined a line of section, you can click on either set of cross
hairs, and drag it to a new location.) A dashed line appears (with cross
hairs at each end) to show where the currently defined line of section
is. If you have the Section View window open, you see the display
update dynamically.
Measure Distance Put the cursor in measure mode, so you can

position the cursor on a point in the display area, press Button 1, and
drag the mouse to another point. As you drag, the cursor draws a
measuring line, and a popup message displays the easting and northing
coordinates of the destination point, and the total distance between the
two points (expressed in feet or meters, according to the surface units
associated with the current measurement system chosen for the
OpenWorks session).
Turn reference grids On Toggle between displaying and hiding

background grids. The reference grid is relative to the well plans
starting location. (The starting location has an x, y value of 0, 0.) The
grid remains in scale when you zoom in, zoom out, or use the
Rectangular Zoom button. If you display the reference grid in the
Plan View window with ZGF backdrops displayed, the grid is
calibrated to absolute coordinates.
Swap Background Color Toggle between a normal and reversed

background color. Elements displayed in black in one mode appear in
white in the opposite mode, and white elements appear in black. Other
colors are unaffected by the switch.

Setting Target and Label Display Options for the Plan View Window
You can set target and label display options for the Plan View window
in the Plan View Controls dialog box.
To display the Plan View Controls dialog box, select View Controls
in the Plan View window. The Plan View Controls dialog box appears,
as shown in the following illustration.
You can set any of these options:

Target Style Display targets as outlines (Outline), as filled
shapes with no outlines (Fill), or as filled shapes with outlines
(Outline and Fill).
Text Size (Points) Set the text size for target and plan labels.
Use the arrows to adjust the point size incrementally to any of the
supported text sizes from 8 to 20 points. (You can also enter a value
from the keyboard. If you enter a point size that is not supported,
Wellbore Planner uses the closest supported size.)
Text Font Select a text font for the target and plan labels. Click
on the Text Font button and choose from the drop-down list:
Helvetica, Swiss, Courier, Times, Italic (Times Italic), or Bold
(Courier Bold).

Target Label Position Choose whether or not to display target

labels, and choose the label position. Click on the Target Label
Position and select an item from the drop-down list: Above,
Upper Right, Right, Lower Right, Below, Lower Left, Left,
Upper Left, or No Target Labels.
Target Label Offset (Scale Units) Specify the distance between

labels and their respective targets. Distances are expressed in feet or
meters, according to the surface measurement units for the current
OpenWorks session. Enter a value from the keyboard, or use the
arrows to adjust values incrementally (to a value between 10 and
1,000).
Plan Label Position Choose the position for displaying well

plan labels. Click on the Plan Label Position and select an item
from the drop-down list: Above, Upper Right, Right, Lower
Right, Below, Lower Left, Left, or Upper Left.
Plan Label Offset (Scale Units) Specify the distance between

labels and their respective well plans. Distances are expressed in
feet or meters, according to the surface measurement units for the
current OpenWorks session. Enter a value from the keyboard, or
use the arrows to adjust values incrementally (to a value between 10
and 1,000).

Displaying a ZGF Backdrop in the Plan View Window

You can add one or more pictures from a ZGF file to the Plan View
window as a background display. (You can display a single ZGF
picture backdrop or display ZGF pictures cumulatively.) You may want
to use this feature to see an existing well plan in an enhanced display,
or you may want to use it when you start a new well planning project,
as a tool for selecting targets without running any other integrated
applications.
To use the ZGF backdrop feature, your project team must have created
ZGF files (Z-MAP Graphic Files) for images related to your well plan
site, such as grid contours or base maps. (You can create these files in
the Z-MAP application or in other OpenWorks family applications such
as StratWorks.)
To display pictures from a ZGF file, follow these steps:
1. Select File Import ZGF in the Plan View window.

The ZGF File Selection dialog box appears, as shown in the
following illustration.
2. Use the ZGF File Selection dialog box to locate and select the ZGF
file that contains the pictures you want to display. End the path in
the Filter box with *.[Zz][Gg][Ff] to filter the files displayed so
that you see only files with the extension .ZGF (in any possible
capitalization style). (For more instructions about navigating in file

selection dialog boxes, see Using a File Selection Dialog Box on

page 28.)
3. When the correct file name and path appears in the Selection box at
the bottom of the dialog box, click on OK.
The ZGF Picture Selection dialog box appears, as shown in the
4. Use the ZGF Picture Selection dialog box to select the picture or
pictures you want to use from the ZGF file. Build your backdrop
display in this way:
a. Select a picture in the Available Pictures list, then click on
Apply (to display the picture in the Plan View window and
leave the dialog box open). The backdrop appears in the Plan
View window, as shown in the example that follows.
b. If you want to display more pictures in combination with the
first one, choose the next picture, and click on Apply again.
Continue to build as many backdrop pictures as you like.
If you want to clear all the ZGF backdrops you have added so
far, click on Clear ZGF Backdrop button.

5. When you have added all the backdrops you want to the Plan View
window, close the dialog box by clicking on OK (to exit and
display any selection you have made but have not yet applied),
or click on Cancel (to exit without displaying any backdrop that
you have selected but have not yet applied).
If you display the reference grid in the Plan View window while the
ZGF backdrop is displayed, the grid is calibrated to absolute
coordinates instead of the relative coordinates normally displayed.
If you clear the ZGF backdrop, the reference grid continues to
display absolute coordinates until you reset it, by toggling the Turn
reference grids On button off and on again.
Clearing ZGF Backdrops from the Plan View Window

To clear ZGF backdrops you have displayed in the Plan View window,
select File Clear ZGF Backdrop from the Plan View main menu.

Using the Section View Window

The Section View window shows the well plan in cross section. The
perspective displayed is determined by the most recently defined line
of section (specified in the Plan View window).
For information about capturing the contents of the Section View window as
graphic file, so that you can print it on a PostScript-compatible laser printer or on a
plotter, see page 213.
platform location
active well plan
target
Targets are represented by cross hairs in the Section View window.

The Section View window has many shortcut buttons in common with
the Plan View window. The shortcut buttons are described briefly
below. For more detail, check the descriptions in the topic about using
the Plan View window starting on page 83.

Click on each of the shortcut buttons to perform the action described

below:
Move Target or Surface Location Puts the cursor in move mode,
so you can drag the active well plans starting location or move an
existing target in any well plan that is displayed.
Select a New Target Location Puts the cursor in pick mode, so you
can use the mouse to create a new target.
Rectangular Zoom Put the cursor in a mode for drawing the

boundary of the section of the view window which you want to
display.
Original Display Immediately returns you from any modified view

you have created back to the home view.
Point Zoom Puts the cursor in zoom in mode, so you can click
inside the window to zoom in. If you click off-center in the window,
Point Unzoom Puts the cursor in zoom out mode, so you can click
inside the window to zoom out. If you click off-center in the window,
Vertical Exaggeration (This option is unique to the Section View

window.) Click on this shortcut button to toggle between a display
with an enlarged vertical dimension (relative to the horizontal
dimension) and a normal view. Vertical exaggeration is useful in the
following cases:
when you want to match your display to a vertically exaggerated
display in an integrated application, such as Stratamodel
when targets are too close together to see them clearly
Measure Distance Puts the cursor in measure mode, so you can

measure a distance between two points by dragging the mouse. As you
drag, a popup message displays the easting and northing coordinates of
the destination point, and the total distance between the two points.
Turn reference grids On Toggles background grids on and off.

The reference grid is relative to the well plans starting location. (The
starting location has an x, y value of 0, 0.)
Swap Background Color Toggles between normal and reversed

background color.

Setting Display Options in the Section View Controls Dialog Box

You can set target and label display options for the Section View
window, and set the corridor width for the line of section displayed.
You specify these options in the Section View Controls dialog box.
To display the Section View Controls dialog box, select View
Controls in the Section View window. The Section View Controls
dialog box appears, as shown in the following illustration.
Except for the Projection Distance option described below, the

Section View dialog box options are identical to the options in the Plan
View dialog box. (For a description of the Target Style, Text Size,
Text Font, Target Label Position, Target Label Offset, Plan Label
Position, and Plan Label Offset options, see page 86.)
Setting the Projection Distance to Control the Scope of the Display

Specify a value in the Projection Distance (Scale Units) box to
control the size of the projection distance (or view corridor) around the
line of section (LOS) defined in the Plan View window. You may want
to alter the projection distance if you have a complex group of well
plans, and you want to exclude objects that are not close to the active
well plan. You may also want to adjust the projection distance to
optimize the display when you use the Worms Eye View feature in the
Redline View window (as described on page 99).

The LOS runs down the center of the view corridor, like a stripe down
the middle of a two-lane road. Think of the projection distance as the
width of each one of the lanes. The example that follows illustrates how
the projection distance produces a view corridor around the LOS in the
Plan View window. This view corridor determines which objects can or
cannot be seen in the Section View window. The projection distance
typically is set to define a wide view corridor, so that all well plan
objects are shown.
view corridor
(determined by the
Projection Distance
setting) The Section View
window will display only
those objects that fall
within the view corridor. projection distance
(set in the Section View
Controls dialog box)
line of section (dotted

line) that determines the
orientation of objects in
the Section View window
The projection distance is expressed in feet or meters, according to the

surface measurement units associated with the measurement system
chosen for the current OpenWorks session. To change the projection
distance, you can enter a new value from the keyboard, or adjust the
value incrementally by clicking on the arrow buttons.
Displaying a Grid in the Section View Window

You can display one or more grids in the Section View window grids
that your project team has created in Z-MAP or in other OpenWorks
family applications. (To display ZMAP Plus grids in Wellbore Planner,
the grids must be created with TVDSS as the Depth Type.) In this way,
you can display well plan targets and related surfaces together. You can
use this feature to help locate target points in the Section View window,
just as you can display ZGF pictures in the Plan View window to help
you select targets.
To display grids in the Section View window, follow these steps:
1. Select View Grids in the Section View window.

The Display Grids dialog box appears, as shown in the following

illustration.
2. Select the grid or grids you want to add to the Section View window
display. To select a series of grids, click on each one individually.
3. When the needed grids are highlighted, click on Apply (to add the
grid or grids and leave the dialog box open) or click on OK (to add
the grid or grids and close the dialog box). Or click on Cancel to
exit without adding any grids.
The selected grid or grids appear in the Section View window, and
replace any grids you may have displayed previously. The example
below shows a grid that coincides with a set of targets.
well path
grid profile

If you change the line of section in the Plan View window, any grids
you have displayed will disappear. You must display them again, by
using the Display Grids dialog box.
Using the 3D View Window

The 3D View window presents your well plans in a three-dimensional
display cube. You can rotate the cube vertically and horizontally by
clicking on the shortcut buttons on the left side of the window. The
well plan starting location (such as the surface location or platform
location) is marked by a pyramid. Targets that are defined as points
appear as stars, and shaped targets appear as shapes. The 3D window
is for viewing purposes only: you cannot move the starting location or
targets inside the 3D View window.
For information about capturing the contents of the 3D View window as graphic
file, so that you can print it on a PostScript-compatible laser printer or on a plotter,
see page 213.
controls cube rotation
toggles reference
grids on and off

Rotate Clockwise Rotates the cube clockwise 15 degrees. (You

can continue to rotate the cube clockwise indefinitely.)
Rotate Counter-Clockwise Rotates the cube counter-clockwise 15

degrees. (You can continue to rotate the cube counter-clockwise
indefinitely.)
Rotate Up Rotates the cube face upward. (You can continue to

rotate the cube until the well plan is upside-down.)
Rotate Down Rotates the cube face downward. (You can continue
to rotate the cube until you are viewing the well plan from directly
above.)
Turn reference grids On Toggles between displaying and hiding

background grids. The reference grid is relative to the well plans
starting location. (The starting location has an x, y value of 0, 0.) When
the reference grids are on, and the only the active well plan is
displayed, shadows of the well path are projected as rust-colored lines
on three faces of the 3D cube (as shown in the illustration at the
beginning of this topic). As you rotate the display, the shadows move
from face to face of the cube.

Using the Redline View Window

The Redline View window shows how well the active well plan
conforms to the redline parameters specified for the well planning
project. The redline parameters are a set of six engineering parameters,
each of which has a maximum acceptable value. You use the Redline
View window to watch how closely your well plans conform to these
values in order to assess the well plans drilling feasibility.
maximum redline values

(currently set in the
Redline Parameter
Spreadsheet)
The first four redline

parameter values
change abruptly at
well path turnpoints,
causing them to
appear as horizontal
lines in the display
area.
For information about capturing the contents of the Redline View window as
graphic file, so that you can print it on a PostScript-compatible laser printer or on a
plotter, see page 213.

The Redline View window scales each parameter at different depths,

and shows its value as a plot line in relation to the maximum value
allowed. Color coding distinguishes the parameter readings from one
another. When a value reaches the maximum allowed, it reaches the
red line on the right side of the display area. Any parameter that
exceeds the maximum value passes the red line.
As you move your cursor vertically in the Redline View windows

display area, the fields on the right side of the window show dynamic
readouts of your cursors position in relation to six location attributes.
If you also have the Plan View and Section View windows open, you
see the cursors position moving along the well path (displayed as red
cross hairs). The location readout fields also respond if you click on
one of the fields in the Wellbore Planner main window spreadsheet, or
if you enter or adjust the value in the MD field directly (as described
below).
The location fields and controls are:
MD (Measured Depth) (also called along hole depth) the actual

distance along the wellbore, measured along its length from the
kelly bushing (or surface elevation) to the designated point along
the well path
You can edit the MD field, unlike the other location fields, which
are for display only. You can use this feature to compare the
measured depth with the true vertical depth and subsea readings,
and to specify a value for the Worms Eye View command
(described below). You can enter a value from the keyboard, or
click on the arrow buttons to adjust the MD value incrementally.
When you move your cursor into the display area again, however,
the dynamic readouts replace any MD entry you may have made.
Worms Eye View sets the Section View window to display a

vertically aligned portion of the well path, centered on a specified
depth point. (In effect, the Worms Eye View resets the line of
section perpendicular to the well path at the specified depth.) When
you use the Worms Eye View, you may want to adjust the
projection distance, as described on page 93.
TVD (True Vertical Depth) a vertical straight-line distance from
the surface elevation to the current position along the well path
Subsea (Elevation) the distance from sea level to the current
position, with positive values above sea level and negative values
below sea level

EW Offset the distance from the surface location to the current

position, measured from west to east
NS Offset the distance from the surface location to the current
position, measured from north to south
Closure the horizontal straight-line distance between the surface
location and the current position
The following example illustrates TVD and subsea elevation in

relation to the entire length of a wellbore.
KB Side View
0 or +50
50' Surface Elevation
Sea Level 0
TVD 5474 Subsea -5424
This example illustrates EW offset, NS offset, and closure.
Target Map View
Closure 5590 NS Offset 5000
Surface
Location
EW Offset 2500

Setting Redline Parameters for a Well Planning Project

The redline parameter values you specify for your well planning
project are typically provided by the drilling engineers on the project.
Once you obtain these redline parameter values, you can set them for
your Wellbore Planner project these will be the values that you do
not want to exceed in any of the well plans. The redline parameters
appear in the Redline View window, and are used to compile the data
in the Platform Monitor information box (as described in the topic
beginning on page 362). If you do not set redline parameters for your
project, Wellbore Planner uses the most recent parameters you
specified for a well plan in any Wellbore Planner project, or, if you
have never specified redline parameters, uses default values.
To examine or specify redline parameters for your well planning
project, select File Set Values in the Redline View window. The
Redline Parameter Spreadsheet dialog box appears, as shown in the
You can make values

discrete or interpolated. Click on Toggle to add or
remove the selected columns
Click on Insert to insert a row value from the Redline View
above the currently selected one. window.
To delete a value, highlight the
Click on Append to add a row at value, then click on Delete.
the bottom of the spreadsheet.

The Redline Parameter Spreadsheet dialog box can help you define
different drilling zones based upon a specified true vertical depth
(TVD). You can define the TVD zones you want to use, and specify
values for each zone. To change any of the fields in the dialog box,
highlight the field and enter a new value. To add or delete TVD zone
rows, click inside the table to activate a row, then use the Insert,
Append, and Delete buttons at the bottom of the dialog box.
Turning Off Redline Values in the Redline View Window. You can
use the Redline Parameter Spreadsheet dialog box to specify which
parameters appear in the Redline View window. To add or remove a
value from the Redline View window, click somewhere in the column
for the value, then click on the Toggle button at the bottom of the
dialog box. When a parameter is hidden from view, the background
color of the column is reversed. Columns whose values do appear in
the Redline View window have normal background and text color.
(You cannot toggle off the TVD column.)
Parameters That Are Turned Off by Default
The Inclination and Total Directional drilling parameters are turned off by default.
You must toggle them on to display these values in the Redline View window.
Understanding the Redline Parameters

The text that follows describes the engineering aspects of the well plan
that you use to set redline parameters. The numbers along the left side
of the spreadsheet identify the drilling zones.
TVD (true vertical depth) the vertical, straight line distance from
the surface elevation to the designated point. This parameter is used to
set the depth intervals to which the other parameters apply. Since
Redline parameters can vary by TVD, a different set of parameters can
be applied when the geological properties change from one zone to
another.
DLS (dogleg severity) an overall measure of how curved or twisted
the wellbore is. Your well path can be calculated based on the fixed
dog leg severity value that you specified in the main window, or your
well path can be calculated based on the redline DLS parameter. To
calculate your path based on the redline DLS parameter, enter a value
of 0.0 in the Dogleg Severity box in the main window.
DLS is calculated from a formula that takes into account the build,
turn, and drop rates and is measured in degrees per 100 feet or 30
meters. Drop sections are calculated with half the normal DLS. For

more information, see Specifying a Minimum Value for Dogleg

Severity on page 145.
Note: Dogleg severity affects characteristics (such as length, build
rate, etc.) of the turn points, but does not affect the number of turn
points.
Build Rate the rate of inclination increase of the well path
calculated as an average for the interval between turning points and
measured in degrees per 100 feet or 30 meters
Drop Rate the rate of inclination decrease of the wellbore
calculated as an average for the interval between turning points and
measured in degrees per 100 feet or 30 meters; basically a negative
build
Turn Rate the rate of turn of the wellbore calculated as an average
for the interval between turning points and measured in degrees per
100 feet or 30 meters
Inclination the angle from a designated point of the wellbore to the
vertical, measured in degrees (This parameter must be toggled on in
order for it to appear in the Redline View window.)
Total Directional at the designated depth, the cumulative number
of feet or meters of wellbore requiring directional control; can provide
an indication of the cost associated with drilling (This parameter must
be toggled on in order for it to appear in the Redline View window.)
Using the Spreadsheet Controls

The buttons at the bottom of the Redline spreadsheet provide aids for
manipulating the data. Controls include:
Insert adds a line above the line where you cursor is positioned
Append adds a row at the bottom of the spreadsheet
Toggle switches the selected column between an active and
inactive state, so that the corresponding parameter is or is not
displayed in the Redline View window. (The TVD column cannot
be toggled off.)
Delete deletes the highlighted value
Interpolate Values toggles between interpolated and discrete
When discrete is toggled on, the value at a line is applied to the
interval defined by the TVD of that line to the TVD of the line
below.
When interpolated is toggled on, the values at a line and the line
below are used as endpoints of a linear interpolation that is applied
over the interval defined by the TVD values of the two lines.

Using the Diagram Preview Window

The Diagram Preview window shows the well plan in a format
designed for the driller presented in an overhead plan view and in a
vertical cross section view. You can customize the window display,
then create a hardcopy graphics file in CGM format (for plotting) or in
PostScript format (for plotting or for printing on a laser printer), as
described on page 217.
You can customize the window display for either format in these
ways:
Include or hide these types of optional, descriptive elements:
annotations about turn points
a summary of target data
an overall summary of well target, turn point, and tie on point
data
a title block that contains the well plan name and your specified
data
Arrange the optional elements you have selected in a variety of
display configurations.
Set the projection angle for the vertical cross section view
For CGM-format output, you can also change the scale for the
overhead plan view and vertical cross section view. (Scaling options
are available only if the planned output is a CGM-format graphics file,
since PostScript files are not scalable. If you set scaling options in
Scaled(CGM) mode, then switch to PostScript mode, the scaling
options you had set have no effect on the output.)
Displaying the Diagram Preview Window

To display the Diagram Preview window for a particular well plan,
follow these steps;
1. Activate the well plan you want to see, by clicking on the well
plans name in the Plans list of the Wellbore Planner main window.

2. Select Views Well Plan Diagram.

The Diagram Preview window appears (as shown in the following
example) and displays data for the active well plan.

Specifying Diagram Preview Display Options
Specify the hardcopy type, and any display items you want to
customize as described below.
Hardcopy Type Sets the Diagram Previews save mode for

hardcopy files. If you select File Hardcopy in the Diagram Preview
window, this setting determines whether the file you save is in CGM
format (for plotting) or in PostScript format (for plotting or for printing
on a laser printer).
Click on the Hardcopy Type button and select Scaled (CGM) or
PostScript from the drop-down list. This choice affects the display
options that are enabled, in addition to determining the format of any
file you create from the windows contents. (For instructions on saving
the windows contents as a graphics file, see page 217).
Section Lateral Scale (available only for scaled CGM-format

output) Scale increments for the well plans vertical cross section view
(which appears in the lower left part of the window). Scale is in feet or
meters, according to the measurement system units for the current
OpenWorks session.
Plan Scale (available only for scaled CGM-format output) Scale

increments for the well plans map view (which appears in the upper
right part of the window). Scale is in feet or meters, according to the
measurement system units for the current OpenWorks session.
Projection Angle Angle of the vertical cross section view (in the
lower left part of the window). A projection angle of 180 corresponds
to the display in the Section View window, when the line of section
(LOS) is a horizontal line drawn in the Plan View window from left to
right. A projection angle of 90 corresponds to the Section View display
with a vertical LOS drawn from top to bottom.
Layout Arrangement of the set of layout elements you have selected

to include in the display (which may include the target list box, well
profile box, turn point annotation, and title block). If you display all the
elements, the layout options arrange the window in this manner:
Calculated Places each element in the optimum position relative
to the size of the two scaled well plan views.
Stacked Left Places the title block in the windows bottom left
corner with the target list box above it. Places the well profile box at
the windows top left corner.

Spread Out Places the well profile box in the windows upper
left corner, the target list box in the lower left corner, and the title
block in the lower right corner.
Stacked Right Places the title block at the windows bottom
right corner with the target list box above it. The well profile box is
in the windows top left corner.
Far Right Uses the same arrangement as Stacked Right, except
that the target list is below the title block.
Target List Box A box that lists location data for the surface
location and for each well plan target, and names any features that are
associated with targets.
Well Profile Box A box that contains location data for the tie-on
point and targets, and location and inclination data for the end of build,
drop, and turn points.
Turn Point Annotation Extra notations added to the well plans

cross section view concerning the end of build, drop and turn points.
Title Block A box that contains the name of the well plan, and the
data specified for Company, Line 1, and Line 2 arranged in a
simple presentation format.
Company The company name, presented in large type at the top of

the title block.
Line 1 (20 chars) Information that appears on the first line of the
title block, under the company name and to the right of the well plan
name (which is always included in the title block). This field is limited
to a maximum of 20 characters.
Line 2 (40 chrs.) Information that appears on the second line of the
title block. This field is limited to a maximum of 40 characters.
As you customize the display, click on Apply (to view your changes
without closing the dialog box). When the specifications are complete,
click on OK to apply your latest changes and close the dialog box. To
exit without saving changes, click on Cancel.

Working with Targets
A target is an area marked as an object through which the calculated

well path must pass. By default, the target is a point that restricts the
driller to hitting that specific space.
To allow for any difficulties the driller may encounter, you can specify
a size and shape (a circle, an ellipse, a rectangle, or an irregular
polygon) for your target instead of using a point. The larger the target
area, the less restricted the drillers are when they are drilling.
Conversely, the smaller the target, the more precise the driller must be.
However, the target shape is only for the driller or for visualization
purposes. The path will always be calculated to pass through the
penetration point.
If you select a shape other than a point, you can specify various
parameters related to that shape.
Normally you create (or pick) targets in an integrated application

running simultaneously with Wellbore Planner. For instructions on
creating a target in
EarthCube
see Creating Targets in EarthCube beginning on page 279.
OpenVision
seeCreating Targets in OpenVision beginning on page 298.
SeisWorks
see Creating Targets In SeisWorks beginning on page 310.
Stratamodel
see Picking Targets In Stratamodel beginning on page 324.
Creating Unassigned Targets
Targets are automatically assigned to the open well plan. To create unassigned
targets, close the active well plan before selecting any targets.

Importing Targets
Existing targets can be imported from an ASCII text file by selecting
File Import Targets in the Wellbore Planner main window.
The Import Targets dialog box controls the import of target

information.
The Import Targets dialog box specifies:
File The desired ASCII file. The file name (with fully
qualified path) can be typed or selected by clicking the List
button.
# Comment Lines Specifies the number of comment lines
at the start of the ASCII file. The default value (0) indicates no
comment lines.
X (Easting) Entry number within the first line of data (first
non-comment, non-blank line of the ASCII file) that contains
the X-coordinate of the target. The default (1) is for the first
entry within this line to be used for the X-coordinate. In the
ASCII file shown in the following figure, the value of 627881.1
is the first data entry and would be used for the X-coordinate of
the target if the default for X (Easting) is used.
200
first entry second entry third entry fourth entry fifth entry

Y (Northing) Entry within the first line of data that contains

the Y-coordinate of the target. The default (2) is for the second
entry within this line to be used for the Y-coordinate. In the
ASCII file shown in the preceding figure, the value of
5758537.4 is the second data entry and would be used for the
Y-coordinate of the target if the default for Y (Northing) is
used.
Z (Subsea Depth) Entry within the first line of data that
contains the Z-coordinate of the target. The default (3) is for
the third entry within this line to be used for the Z-coordinate.
In the ASCII file shown in the preceding figure, the value of
2000 is the third data entry and would be used for the Z-
coordinate of the target if the default for Z (Subsea Depth) is
used.
Entry within the first line of data that contains the Target
Name OR the prefix to use in the target name (Use Prefix). In
the ASCII file shown in the preceding figure, the value of
TARGETA1 is the fourth data entry and would be used for the
Name of the target if the default for Target Name is used.
Size or Use Size of the target determines the size of the target.
If the Size option is used, the user can enter the entry within the
first line of data that contains the Size of the target. The default
(5) is for the fifth entry within this line to be used for the Target
Size. In the ASCII file shown in the preceding figure, the value
of 200 is the fifth data entry and would be used for the Target
Size if this option were used with the default setting.
If the Use Size option is used, the user can enter the desired
size of the target. This user size will be used for either the
diameter of a circle-target or the size of a side of a square-
target (shape is specified by the Shape parameter).
Shape Shape of the target (Circle or Square).
Delimiter used to specify breaks between target information
(Space or Tab or User Defined character).
Multiple targets can be imported from a single ASCII file. Each new
target needs to be placed on a separate line in the ASCII file, and the
format for each target should be the same (and should match the
settings made in the Import Targets dialog box). If the target names are
located in the ASCII file, and are utilized by the settings in the Import
Targets dialog box, each target should be given a unique name.

Creating New Targets in Wellbore Planner

In addition to creating targets in the integrated applications that you
can use with Wellbore Planner, you also have these two options for
creating targets from within Wellbore Planner:
Click on the Select a New Target Location button in the Plan View
or Section View windows, then click inside the view window with
Button 1.
The new target is added to the well path, and to the bottom of the
Selected well list in the Wellbore Planner main window. The new
targets name is derived from the active well plan. (If the target is
not properly placed in the target list, rearrange the target list order
as described on page 116.)
or
Use the Target Editor window to create a new target by entering
numeric values for the x, y, and z coordinates.
To create targets that are unassigned (not currently included in the

calculations for any well plan), make sure no well plan is active when
you create the target. (If a well plan name in the Plans list is
highlighted, click on it. The highlighting is cleared, and the well plan is
no longer active.) Unassigned targets appear in the Available list. You
can assign (or select) the target for a well plan later, by clicking on the
target name. The target moves to the Selected list, and is assigned to
the active well plan. To change the targets status from selected to
unassigned, highlight its name in the Selected list, then click on the
Remove button.
Displaying the Target Editor Window

To display the Target Editor window, use one of these methods:
Select Tools Target Editor in the Wellbore Planner main
window.
or
Highlight a target name in the Wellbore Planner main windows
Selected list, then click on the Edit button.
The Target Editor window appears, as shown in the following
illustration.

Using the Target Editor Window to Create a New Target

To use the Target Editor window to add a new target to the active well
plan, follow these steps:
1. In the Target Editor window, select File New.

Wellbore Planner adds a new target to your well plan, with x, y, and
z coordinates that are set to 0. (New targets are added to the well
plan in the order in the order in which you create them.) The target
is named after the active well plan (the well plan whose name is
currently highlighted in Wellbore Planners Plans list. The target
appears in any of the view windows that are open. It also appears at
the bottom of the Selected list in the Wellbore Planner main
window, and in the Available Targets list of the Target Editor
window.

2. Set the values for the targets x, y, and z coordinates (page 118).
3. Set any other target parameters that are needed, such as the display
color (page 119), the target shape (page 120), the parameters that
define the target shape (page 123), and the feature name
(page 126).
4. If you created the target out of order, rearrange the target list order
as necessary (page 116).
5. If you like, you can rename the target (page 141).

6. To save the new target in the well plan, select File Save in the
Wellbore Planner main window.
To delete a new target that is still displayed in the Target Editor

window, select the Cancel button in the Target Editor window.
To delete some other target from the well plan, highlight the target
name in the Target Editor windows Available Targets list, then
select Delete from the Target Editor windows File drop-down
menu.
Setting Default Values for New Targets Created in the Target Editor
The target parameters in the Target Editor window (other than the x, y, and z
coordinates) are set to reflect the current defaults. You can set the default values that
will appear whenever you create new targets in the Target Editor window. Specify
the parameter values you want to use as defaults, then select File Set Defaults
in the Target Editor window.

Displaying a Target in the Target Editor Window

There are two ways to open an existing target:
Select Tools Targets.
In the Wellbore Planner main window, click on the target name in
the Selected list, then click on the Edit button.
1.
Highlight
the target
name.
2. Click on
the Edit
button.
The Target Editor window appears, and displays the selected target
and its parameters. (The selected target is highlighted in the Target
Editor windows Available Targets list.)

Selecting and Sorting Well Plan Targets

Whether targets are created in Wellbore Planner or in an integrated
application, all the targets that are available in a well planning project
appear in the Wellbore Planner main windows Available list or
Selected list (if you have a well plan open, and the well plan is not a
platform location).
Selecting Targets for the Well Plan

A target must appear in the Selected list to be included in the
calculation of a the well path. By default, targets are placed in the well
path in the same order in which they were created or selected. The first
target selected appears at the top of the Selected list; the last target
selected appears last in the list.
targets available to,

well plans in but not selected for targets selected for
the project the active well plan the active well plan
active well plan
target highlighted for

removes the highlighted target from the active
well plan and adds it to the Available list editing or removal
from well plan
Follow these steps to select targets for your well plan:
1. In the Available list, click on each target that you want to include in
the well plan. Select targets in the order that you want them to
appear in the well plan. The selected targets move to the Selected
list.
2. In the Selected list, click on any target that you do not want to
include in the well plan. Click on the Remove button. The selected
target moves back to the Available list.

Specifying the Order of Targets in the Well Plan

As previously mentioned, targets appear in the well path according to
how they are selected.
If your targets are displayed in the wrong order, use the following
procedure to correct their order:
Select each target, then click on the Remove button to move it back
to the Available list. When the disordered targets are all in the
Available list, select each target again in its correct order, by using
the target selection method described on page 115.
You can also use the Sort button to change target order, and sort the
targets according to their depth, proximity, or optimum path. Click
on the button and select an option from the drop-down menu:
Nonesorts by the order in which targets appear in the
Selected list of the Wellbore Planner main window
Depthsorts by depth from the surface
Distancesorts by distance from the starting location, in the
x, y direction
Optimalsorts by the shortest path through the targets
In the following example, the targets were selected according to their

order in the Available list, then they were sorted according to
Distance.
original selection order
sort options
sorted according
to distance.
In either case, if the Calculations button is set to Manual, the targets

are sorted as specified when you click on the Calculate button.
For information about how well plan type affects the sorting order, see
Step 2: Specify a Target Sorting Order on page 342.

Setting Target Parameters

This section describes to how to use the Target Editor window options
to set or modify display parameters for a target, including:
specifying how the parameters are saved

selecting a view for the target
setting the x, y, z coordinates
selecting a display color
selecting a shape for the target
setting shape parameters
Wellbore Planner saves changes automatically whenever you edit the

target. (The changes are saved temporarily in a buffer. The changes are
not permanently saved unless you save your well planning project.)
You can undo changes you have made in the Target Editor window by
selecting File Cancel.
Selecting the Target View

Click on the View button and decide how the target will appear in the
Target Editor window:
From Above: sets the display perpendicular to the Earths surface.
Perpendicular to Target: sets the display to face the target,
perpendicular to the target plane. (If you optimize the penetration
points of shaped targets, the View button must be set to
Perpendicular to Target, as described on page 138.)
Moving the Wellbore Location Within a Frozen Target Area
You can freeze a target shape/area, then move the penetration point around within
the target and view the results interactively from within the Redline View window.
Select the Perpendicular to Target view in the Target Editor window, then drag
the penetration point around the target area. If the Calculations button is set to
Automatic, Wellbore Planner recalculates as you drag, adjusting the redline
parameters on the fly.

Setting the Target Location Coordinates

In the X, Y, and Z (Subsea) boxes, set the position of the target in
real-world coordinates.
Coordinates
may be
entered
manually in
these fields or
may be sent
from the
integrated
application
used to create
the target.
When you pick targets from an application that is integrated with

Wellbore Planner, you can see the target coordinates displayed in the
Target Editor window. You can change target coordinates by entering
values directly into the location fields or by using the arrows to adjust
values.
Note the negative

(subsea) Z value.

Setting the Target Display Color

To select a display color for the target as it appears in Wellbore
Planner and in any other integrated applications, follow these steps:
1. Click on the Color button.
2. The Select Target Color dialog box appears. Click on the color you
want to assign to the current target.
3. Click on OK to apply your selection and close the dialog box.

Selecting the Shape of a Target

You can assign a variety of shapes to a target, which is particularly
useful when working with an integrated application. Keeping an eye
on the displays of both applications, you can design your target to fit
into a particular geological region.
If you want to restrict the driller to hitting the target at the exact point
of the x, y, z coordinates, do not change the default shape setting (a
point). However, if you want to allow the driller a margin of error,
click on the Shape button and select a shape from the menu.
If you select Point, Circle, Ellipse, or Rectangle for the Shape

button, the diagram changes automatically to reflect the selected
shape.
You can create an irregular shape in either of these ways:
Start with an existing shape, then edit it graphically.
Use the Shape button to select the initial shape (for example a
rectangle), specify the size and orientation as desired, then click on
the button again and select Irregular. Move your cursor into the
graphic window and press Button 1 on the object. As you drag the
mouse the object changes shape. Use the mouse button to create the
desired shape.
Started by selecting Clicked in middle of

Rectangle option. top line and dragged
mouse up, then
clicked on both bottom
corners and dragged
away from center.

Create the shape from scratch:
Click on the Shape button and select Irregular from the menu.
Place your cursor in the graphics window and click on any point.
The penetration point, marked by a set of cross hairs, appears to

jump as the target area is recalculated. Continue clicking in the
display to add new points and new lines until you have created the
desired shape.
In this example, three points have been added to create a triangle.
To create a new angle, press on a point within a line and drag. Here
an angle has been dragged from an ellipse and a triangle.
To change the position of an angle, press Button 1 on a point along

the angle, drag it wherever you want, and then release the mouse. In
the next two illustrations, the angles created in the previous
examples have been stretched out.

If you make a mistake, you can delete any angle by placing your
cursor on it and pressing Button 2. The examples in Step 4 have
been smoothed out by this method in the following examples.
Continue altering your shape as desired by creating new angles and

dragging existing ones. Be careful not to let the lines overlap. Other
applications may not recognize shapes with overlapped lines.
When using other

applications, do not allow
lines to overlap.

Setting Parameters for the Selected Target Shape

When you select a shape other than a point, additional options related
to that shape appear in the Target Editor window. Instructions follow
for setting these parameters.
Radius 1 (all shapes): enter a value to specify the radius of the

circle or the width for all other shapes. Note that when you change
Radius 1, the Area value updates automatically and reports the new
area of the target.
Area (circle only): enter a value to specify the area of the target in
acres (or square meters). Use the Area option as an alternative to
setting Radius 1. When you change the Area value, the Radius 1
value updates automatically and reports the new radius of the target.
Radius 2 (all shapes except the circle): enter a value to specify the
length of the target.
Specifying the Radii as the Permissible Margin of Error
For example, if you are working in feet and want to allow the driller a margin
of error of 100 feet, type 100.
Orientation (all shapes except the circle) enter a value to specify

which direction the shape is facing. Specify the number of degrees
clockwise between Radius 1 and North. (In the Target Editor
window, north is at the top center of the display area.) The angle
can range from 0 to 360.
North MapView
30 Orientation 30
Radius 1

X and Y Offsets (all shapes): if you want the well path to penetrate
the target off center, specify the distance west of center (a positive
number) or east of center (a negative number) as the x offset.
Specify the distance south (positive) or north (negative) of center as
the y offset. If you want the well path to penetrate the target dead
center, leave the x, y offsets at zero.
MapView
Example B Example A
X Offset: 50 (West) X Offset: 0
Y Offset: 0 Y Offset: 50 (South)
Dip (all shapes): for an inclined target, enter the number of degrees
the target inclines from the horizon, ranging from 0 to 180.
Side View
Horizon
20
Dip 20
Target
If you have the Target Editor windows View button set to From
Above, a line extends from the penetration point showing the angle
of the dip. Another way to change the dip and azimuth is to drag
this line.

Azimuth (all shapes): if you specify a dip value, you can specify
the azimuth, which is the direction of the point of the maximum
dip, in degrees clockwise from north. The angle can range between
0 to 360.
MapView
North
Azimuth 50
Target 50 . Point of Maximum Dip
Up Thickness (all shapes): if you want the target to include some

vertical thickness, specify the amount to include above the Z-
coordinate of the target.
Side View
Amount of Up
Thickness
Well Path
Target

Down Thickness (all shapes): if you want the target to include

some vertical thickness, specify the amount to include below the Z-
coordinate of the target.
Side View
Amount of Down
Thickness
Well Path
Target
Opt. Align Angle (all shapes): lock the targets entry angle to force
the well path perpendicular to the plane of the target when you use
the Optimum Align calculation method. Leaving it unlocked allows
the well path to pass through the targets penetration point at the
angle that results in the shortest path.
Side View
Forced Well Path
110 90
Locked
Unlocked Opt. Align Angle
Opt. Align Angle
Well Paths Calculated with Optimum Align
Associating a Target with a Feature Name

You can record the geologic feature name associated with targets
in your well plan. This can help you identify any geologic feature

that is related to a particular target, such as a surface the target is

designed to hit.
To associate a geologic feature with a target, follow these steps:

1. Activate the target that you want to associate with a feature name.
(You make the target active by highlight the targets name in the
Available Targets list of the Target Editor window.)
2. Specify the feature name in the Feature Name box, by entering a

value from the keyboard or by clicking on the List button. Use the
Feature Name Select dialog box that appears for selecting a feature,
and click on OK. (For more instructions about using file selection
dialog boxes, see Using a File Selection Dialog Box on page 28.)
The file selection dialog box closes, and the active target is
associated with the specified feature name. If you specify a name in
the Feature Name box, then you save the current settings as the
defaults for new targets (as described on page 113), the feature
name becomes one of the default values.
3. To save the new target information, select File Save in the

Wellbore Planner main window before you display any other well
plan or end your Wellbore Planner session.

Editing Targets Graphically

You can use the mouse to edit certain parameters of a target directly in
the following graphical displays:
the Plan View window
the Section View window
the Target Editor window
Editing Targets Graphically in the Target Editor Window

If a target is a circle, ellipse, or rectangle, you can manipulate it
graphically. How you do this depends partly on whether you have
selected From Above or Perpendicular to Target by using the Target
Editors View button.
Irregular Targets
You can alter the shape of an irregular target graphically, but not its size or
orientation.
Working in From Above View

In the From Above view, the display is perpendicular to the Earths
horizon.
Drag or rotate these points
to reduce, enlarge, or
change orientation
(Line) to change the

dip or azimuth
change orientation
From Above View

In this view, you can use the mouse to do the following:

resize the target(only when dip is zero) by dragging the point
where radius 1 or radius 2 would intersect with the targets
perimeter
change the targets orientation(only when dip is zero) by rotating
the point where radius 1 or radius 2 would intersect with the targets
perimeter
change the dipby pulling out or dragging a line from the
penetration point
change the azimuthby rotating the line, representing dip, that
extends from the penetration point
Working in Perpendicular to Target View

The Perpendicular to Target view displays the target face on; that is,
perpendicular to the target plane.
Drag or rotate these points
change orientation
to move penetration point
change orientation
Perpendicular to Target View

In this view, you can use the mouse to do the following:

resize the targetby dragging the point where radius 1 or radius 2
would intersect with the targets perimeter
change the targets orientationby rotating the point where Radius
1 or Radius 2 would intersect with the targets perimeter
move the penetration point within the target (without moving the
target)by dragging the cross that marks the penetration point
Editing Targets Graphically in the Plan View or Section View Window

You can move any target in the Plan View or Section View window by
dragging the + that marks the target (not its label) with your cursor.
Drag the cross hairs to

move the target.
You can also drag targets in the EarthCube, SeisWorks, OpenVision,

and StratWorks 3D applications. If the Calculations button is set to
Manual, click on the Calculate button to calculate the results of the
edit.

Updating the Well Plan with Changes Made in Other Applications

By default, the OpenWorksPointing Dispatcher (PD) is set to
Automatic, so all other applications are automatically updated as you
make changes. Sometimes you may not want to broadcast the data
automatically, for performance reasons. In such cases, you can set the
PD button to Manual. When you want to update other applications
with the new Wellbore Planner data, click on the PD shortcut button
(shown below).
Establishing Default Parameters for Targets

Once you have finished setting parameters for a target and are satisfied
with the results, you can use the current parameters as the default
settings for any other targets you create during the current well
planning session.
To set the defaults to match the current Target Editor window settings,
select Set Defaults from the Target Editors File menu. This selection
records all the parameters (except the x, y, and z coordinates) as the
defaults.
Using Reference Targets

Wellbore Planner uses the targets in your well plan to calculate the
well path. In this way, the targets act as well path steering guides. In
addition to the targets you include for steering, you may also have
identified geologic targets in your well plan. It is best to exclude these
types of targets as much as possible from the criteria for calculating
the well path. To do this, make the geological targets into reference
targets. When you make a target into a reference target, it is still
included in your well plan, but Wellbore Planner does not use it when
calculating the well path. (In previous releases of Wellbore Planner,
reference targets were referred to as soft targets.) You may find it
useful to convert some of your targets to reference targets in the
following situations:

A set of targets causes the well plan to have an unacceptably high

dogleg severity, or the engineering parameters for the projected
well path are so extreme that Wellbore Planner cannot perform the
well path calculations.
These problems are caused by the difficulty of hitting the targets
exact penetration points. It may be helpful to turn a problem target
into a reference target (defined as a shape) and see if the well plan
still passes through the target shape.
You use Look Ahead as the starting location of an existing well,
and daily drilling reports show that the next target is now
economically or technically impossible to reach, or the target has
already been passed.
Your well plan includes intermediate targets that represent geologic
penetration goals targets that are not needed for steering the
well.
Converting Regular Targets into Reference Targets

To make a regular target into a reference target, highlight the target
name in the Selected list of the Wellbore Planner main window, and
click on the Reference button (as shown in the illustration that
follows).
Angle brackets (< >) appear around the target name to show that it is a
reference target. The reference target is still part of the well plan, but
its location is not considered when Wellbore Planner runs well path
calculations.
Select the target, then

click on the Reference
button.
Angle brackets
indicate that the target
is a reference target.

Converting Reference Targets into Regular Targets

To return a reference target to the normal target state, highlight the
bracketed target in the Selected list and click on the Reference button
again.
The target name appears without angle brackets, and the target is again
included in any well path calculations performed.
Creating Reference Targets from Grids

As discussed in the last topic, it is a good idea to base the course of the
well path only on the targets that are needed for steering. If you
include precisely specified geologic targets in the criteria for well path
calculations, the well path may be unnecessarily complex.
You may want to build your well plan with steering targets, then use
the Interpolate Targets From Grids dialog box to add reference targets
at each point the well path intersects one or more defined surface
grids. You typically add the reference targets only after you have
finalized the course of the well path.
To create interpolated reference targets from grids, follow these steps:
1. Prepare to add the new targets by opening the well plan you want to
modify in Wellbore Planner. Make sure the well path calculations
are up-to-date. Make note of the names of the grids that your
project team has created (in other OpenWorks applications) that
represent the geologic surfaces of interest.
2. You may also want to launch OpenVision and run an integrated

session. This enables you to see the grids displayed three-
dimensionally, and see the reference targets being added (as
described in the section Integrating with OpenVision and
StratWorks 3D beginning on page 284.)
3. In the Wellbore Planner main window, select Tools

Create Targets From Grids.
The Interpolate Target From Grids dialog box appears, as shown in
the following example. (The example shows the dialog box in
single grid selection mode.)

4. Click on the Grid Selection Mode button and choose an option

from the drop-down list:
Single to add a reference target at each point the well path
intersects with a single grid. (In this case the targets are given
names that are based on your Target Name specification.)
Multiple to add a reference target at each point the well
path intersects with multiple grids. (In this case the targets are
given names that are based on the grid names.)
If you change the Grid Selection Mode, the dialog box changes to
reflect the new mode. (For Multiple mode, no Target Name box
appears, and multiple item selection is enabled in the Available
Grids list.)
5. In the Available Grids list, click on the grid name (in Single grid
selection mode) or grid names (in Multiple grid selection mode)
that you want to use as a basis for creating reference targets.
The Available Grids list contains all the grids saved in the
OpenWorks database for the current OpenWorks project. These are
grids that have been created in one of the OpenWorks family
applications, such as SeisWorks.

6. If you selected Single as the Grid Selection Mode, enter the target
name you want to use in the Target Name box. If you selected
Multiple as the Grid Selection Mode, Wellbore Planner will assign
target names that are derived from the grid names.
7. Click on Apply to add the specified reference targets to your well

plan (without closing the dialog box) or click on OK (to add the
reference targets and close the dialog box). To exit without adding
any more targets, click on Cancel.
Wellbore Planner performs back-interpolation calculations, and
adds a reference target to each point at which the well path
intersects with the specified grid surface or surfaces. Targets are
named with your specified target name, or are named after the grid.
If multiple targets are created from a single grid, numbers are
appended to the additional target names. (See the example that
follows, which shows the Selected list in the Wellbore Planner main
window after adding interpolated reference targets.)
reference targets added

from the GLSB30 grid
Making Changes to Reference Targets You Created from Grids

As mentioned in the topic introduction, you should use the Interpolate
Targets From Grids dialog box to add reference targets to your well
plan only after you finish making changes that affect the course of the
well path. If you must revise the well path after adding the reference
targets, the reference targets may no longer fall on the well path. In
this case, it is best to remove the new reference targets, then create the
reference targets again after the well plan is final. If you attempt to
correct the problem by snapping the targets to penetration points (as
described in the next topic), the targets may no longer lie on the
contour of the desired surface.

Using the Snap Targets Tool to Realign Target Positions

After calculating the well path of a plan with one or more reference
targets, you may want to snap the penetration points of those targets
to be sure the well path passes through them.
Snapping Target Penetration Points to the Well Path

To snap only the reference targets (defined as shapes), select Plans
Snap Targets Penetration Point.The target shape will remain in
the same location, but the penetration point will show the well path
location.
Restriction on Snapping Targets
You cannot snap targets that are defined as points. You must assign a shape to your
targets in order to snap to the targets penetration points.
If you use both snap options, the order in which you select them may
slightly affect the results.
reference target reference target

with missed after snapping
penetration point. penetration point
Snapping the Penetration Point of Reference Targets
Check your results in the Target Editor window, in any of the view
windows that are open, and in any integrated applications you are
running.

Snapping Targets to Right Angles Along the Well Path

Select Plans Snap Targets Angle to automatically modify the
angle of all targets in the current well plan so that they are
perpendicular to the well path, as shown in the following illustration.
(This is in effect the opposite of the Locked mode for Opt. Align
Angle in the Target Editor window, which snaps the well path
perpendicular to a target.)
side view
90
targets before targets after

snapping angle snapping angle

90
Check your results in the Target Editor window, in any of the basic
view windows, or in any other applications you are running.

Optimizing the Penetration Points of Shaped Targets

If you define targets in your well plan as shapes rather than as points,
you can use the Penetration Point Optimizer to relocate the targets
penetration points (within a specified portion of the target shape) so
that well path is optimized.
When you first assign a shape to the target, Wellbore Planner places
the penetration point is in the shapes center. The Penetration Point
Optimizer dialog box enables you to optimize the well path, using a
specified latitude for moving the target penetration point within the
target shape. Optimizations you perform from within the Penetration
Point Optimizer dialog box affect all of the shaped targets in your well
plan, but do not affect reference targets. The optimization minimizes
the well plans Weighted MD. (For information about the Weighted
MD optimization algorithm, see the topics beginning on page 362.)
To optimize the penetration points for your well planning projects

targets, follow these steps:
1. Make sure your well plan contains at least one shaped target. You
can assign shapes to targets in the Target Editor window
(page 117). You may want to display the view windows and the
Target Editor window while you perform the optimization steps, so
you can watch the effects of your changes.
2. In the Target Editor window, make sure the View button is set to the
Perpendicular to Target option for each shaped target.
3. Select Plans Optimize Penetration Points in the Wellbore

Planner main window.
The Penetration Point Optimizer dialog box appears, as shown in
the following illustration. (The dialog box looks slightly different
the first time you display it in a Wellbore Planner session.)

4. Specify the amount of freedom Wellbore Planner can take in

relocating the target penetration points. You can accept the value
displayed in the Freedom box, enter a value from the keyboard, or
use the arrow buttons to adjust the value incrementally.
The Freedom parameter value is expressed in relation to the radius
of the shaped targets. For example, if you enter a value of .50,
Wellbore Planner can move the target penetration points anywhere
within 50 percent of the center of the shaped target. (So the size you
set for the target shape also affects the amount of movement
allowed for each target.)
The minimum Freedom value is .00 (allowing no target penetration
point relocation), and the maximum is 1.00 (allowing the
penetration point to move all the way to the edge of the target
shape).
5. When the Freedom value is set correctly, click on Apply.

Wellbore Planner calculates the optimum position for each shaped
targets penetration, and displays the resulting well plan data in a
spreadsheet, as shown in the following illustration. (If your well
plan is complex, the calculations may be time-consuming.)

The spreadsheet contains values for a number of well plan

attributes. The left-hand column identifies the attribute (described
in the table that follows), and the Before and After columns show
the attributes value before and after the optimization.
Attribute Description
MD Total measured depth (or along hole depth) of the well plan
Directional Total amount of directional drilling required to complete the
well plan.
Max. DLS Maximum amount of dogleg severity (DLS) involved in the well
plan (figured not as raw data, but as the percentage of the well
planning projects redline DLS value).
Max. Build Maximum build rate for the well plan (figured as the percentage
of the well planning projects redline build rate).
Max. Drop Maximum drop rate for the well plan (figured as the percentage
of the well planning projects redline drop rate).
Max. Turn Maximum turn rate for the well plan (figured as the percentage
of the well planning projects redline turn rate).
6. To close the dialog box, click on Cancel (or click on the button in
the dialog boxs upper left corner, and select Close from the drop-
down menu).

Renaming Targets
If you wish to change the name of a target across all well plans and
applications without creating a second copy of the well plan, select
File Rename in the Target Editor window.
The Rename Target dialog box appears. Enter a name in the Name
box, then click on OK to close the box and put the name change
into effect.
Deleting Targets
If you have targets that are no longer useful, you can delete them from
the well planning project.
1. Display the Target Editor window by selecting Tools Targets in

the Wellbore Planner main window, or by clicking on a target in the
Selected list, then clicking on the Edit button.
The Target Editor window appears.
2. When the Target Editor window appears, check its Available

Targets list in the Target Editor window to make sure the correct
target is highlighted. (If the wrong target is selected, highlight the
one you want to delete.)

3. Select File Delete to remove the designated target from the

Wellbore Planner project.
Closing the Target Editor Window

To close the Target Editor window, select Close from the File menu of
the Target Editor window.

Calculating the Well Path
Wellbore Planner calculates the well path of your active well plan,
based on the starting location, kickoff point, selected targets, and
calculation parameters you specify. The results appear in Wellbore
Planners main window spreadsheet, and in any view windows that are
open. (The well path also appears in any graphic displays for
integrated applications that you are running.) Wellbore Planners well
path calculations are based on the Compass for Windows directional
well planning algorithms.
spreadsheet
parameters
turnpoints
calculation
options
Calculate button

Setting the Calculation Options

The calculation options shown below affect how Wellbore Planner
calculates the active well plan when you perform any of these actions:
click on the Calculate button shortcut button, select Calculate from
the Wellbore Planner Plans menu, or change any parameters or well
planning information while you are in Automatic calculation mode.
Calculation Dog Leg Severity, Wellbore Extension,

Methods, see see page 145 see page 146
page 145 Denotes U.S.
Sort Methods Calculation Mode, Oil Field Units,
PD, see
see page 146 see page 143 see page 34
page 131
Setting Surface and Depth Measurement Units

In the OpenWorks environment, Wellbore Planner uses the surface and
depth measurement units you chose for the OpenWorks session when
you launched Wellbore Planner. (See page 34.). If you change to
another OpenWorks project that uses a different measurement system,
you must exit and relaunch Wellbore Planner to register the change in
measurement system. When communicating with other applications,
units are passed in PD messages and automatically converted.
Determining the Type of Measurement Units Used

in the OpenWorks Project
If you are uncertain about the type of measurement units used in your OpenWorks
project, select ProjectProject Admin Modify from the OpenWorks
Command Menu and select the project in the current OpenWorks project list. The
projects units are reported in the Project Administration: Modify window.

Choosing a Calculation Method

Wellbore Planner gives you three ways to calculate the well path.
Click on the Method button and select one of the following:
Curve Onlygenerates a curve after the kickoff point, followed by

curves connecting each target with the next.
Curve and Holdgenerates a series of curve-straight line
sequences. The curves steer the well path toward the targets. The
straight lines intersect the targets.
Optimum Alignstarts with a curve from the kickoff point to the
first target. This curve is designed with a straight section between
two curve (build/drop/turn) sections with the objective being to line
up the path to be on a straight trajectory at the first target toward the
second target. This process is repeated until the second to last target
is reached. At that point, the well plan goes straight to the last
target.
The length of the straight section in each case is based upon several
factors: distance between targets, difference in trajectory and
desired dogleg severity. The higher the distance and dogleg
severity, the longer the straight section. Likewise, the bigger the
difference in trajectory, the shorter the straight section. If any
targets have a locked entry (for the Opt. Align Angle option in the
Target Editor window), the well path passes through them at 90.
(For information on locking and unlocking the Opt. Align Angle
option in the Target Editor window, see Setting Parameters for the
Selected Target Shape beginning on page 123.)
Specifying a Minimum Value for Dogleg Severity

Dogleg severity (DLS) is a measure of how curved or twisted the
wellbore is. DLS is measured in degrees per 100 feet or per 30 meters.
DLS is calculated from a formula that takes into account the build,
turn, and drop rates of the well path.
All calculations are based on the DLS except when Curve Only is the
selected calculation method. No DLS parameter is allowed with the
Curve Only method.
With the other calculation options, you may want to leave the DLS at
the default value of 3.000 until you have calculated the well path. You
can then try different values as necessary.

Wellbore Planner uses the DLS as a minimum value. In other words, it

attempts to reach this value but may have to exceed it slightly to
comply with the given values of the kickoff point and targets. In the
Redline View window, you can see where the DLS has been exceeded.
If the path is calculated with a DLS value greater than the value you
entered, you can raise the kickoff point so Wellbore Planner uses the
specified DLS value.
A high DLS value results in a lower cumulative distance for

directionally drilled wells and hence lower cost wells. However, the
greater the DLS, the more difficult it may be to complete the well.
Using the Redline Dogleg Severity Setting

You can set a fixed dogleg severity (DLS) value in the main Wellbore
Planner window, or you can calculate well paths by using the redline
DLS parameter. If you want to use the redline values, enter 0.0 in the
Dogleg Severity box in Wellbore Planners main window.
To change the default DLS value in the main window:
1. Double-click on the current Dogleg Severity value to highlight it.
2. Enter a new value from the keyboard or use the arrows to adjust the
value incrementally.
Sorting Targets
You can use the Sort option (as discussed on page 115) to specify the
order in which targets are to be connected when the well path is
calculated. Note that this is a calculation parameter and is in effect for
each calculation.
Extending the Depth of the Well Path

Enter a value in the Extend box (in the Wellbore Planner main
window) to increase the measured depth of the well path. You can use
this extended straight section as a rat hole for the wellbore beyond the
final target, or you can extend the well path to fully penetrate the target
formation. The path is extended by the distance you enter, as shown in
the following before-and-after example.

Extend
ex
extension
Before Extending Depth After Extending Depth
The Extend value is part of the well plan calculation and so is

reapplied each time you recalculate the well plan. In Automatic mode,
you can interactively change the length of your rathole. So, if your
extension is incorrect, you can enter 0.0 to remove the extension from
the display, or enter a new value.
Applying a Hold Point to the Well Plan

You can apply a hold point to your well plan, to accommodate drilling
conditions that require the well path to remain straight below a certain
elevation. For example, suppose the well path must pass through such
high temperature material below a certain depth that the steering tools
are inoperable. You set a hold point that matches the maximum depth
at which the driller can effectively steer the well. The well path is
straight from this point to the bottom hole location. The driller reaches
the hold point, and sets the controls to continue drilling at the same
angle from that point forward.
The Apply Hold Point feature is available only when you use the
optimum alignment method to calculate the well path. That is, the
Method button in the Wellbore Planner main window must be set to
the Optimum Align option when you calculate the well path. If you
have set the Method button to another option, the menu selection for
the Apply Hold function is unavailable and is grayed out.
To use the Apply Hold feature, follow these steps:
1. Select Plans Apply Hold Point (Opt. Align) in the Wellbore
Planner main window, as shown in the illustration below.

The Apply Hold Point (Opt. Align) dialog box appears, as shown in
the following illustration.
2. Specify the elevation for the hold point. Express the hold point in
feet or meters TVDSS, according to the depth measurement units
associated with the current measurement system chosen for the
OpenWorks session.
3. When the hold point is correct, click on OK to recalculate the well

path with the specified hold point (and close the dialog box) or click
on Apply (to recalculate without closing the dialog box). To exit
without saving changes, click on Cancel.
Wellbore Planner uses the specified hold point for this particular
well path calculation. The recalculated path is straight from the
hold point to the bottom hole location.

Communicating with Other Applications

If you set the PD button to Automatic, Wellbore Planner immediately
updates all integrated applications to reflect any changes you make to
targets that appear in the Section View and Plan View windows.
If you select the Manual option for the PD button, the pointing
dispatcher does not send updated information to other applications
until you release the mouse button.
Selecting a Calculation Mode

Click on the Calculations button and select one of the following two
modes for calculating the well path:
Automatic: calculates changes as soon as you make them.
Manual: does not calculate changes until you select
Plans Calculate, or you click on the Calculate button.

Reading the Well Plan Spreadsheet

After you calculate the well path, you can view the resulting data in
the spreadsheet that appears in the Wellbore Planner main window.
Each row represents a turnpoint, a point where the well either starts or
stops building, dropping, or turning. The data reports the measured
depth (MD) at which such a change takes place.
Cursor Tracking
You can track the cursor between the spreadsheet and the view
windows to relate the spreadsheet numbers to actual positions on the
path. Click on the value in the spreadsheet to view its location in other
applications. Your cursor becomes an + in the view windows.
Cursor tracking allows you to identify problem areas in the
spreadsheet and/or the view window displays.
The spreadsheet in the Wellbore Planner main window is for display

only. You cannot edit the spreadsheet data. Resize the window or use
the scroll bars to see data that falls outside of the window boundaries.

About the Data for Well Path Points in the Spreadsheet

The first row of the Wellbore Planner spreadsheet represents the well
paths starting location. When you use a surface starting location, the
first row is always 0, and the second row represents the kickoff point.
When using an Unknown starting location, the first row represents the
first target.
By convention, the build, turn, and DLS rates are given in the row
after that rate is completed, rather than the row where the rate begins.
In the following example, Row 2 is the kickoff point, and the path
begins to build at 30 degrees from that point.Therefore the build rate
of Row 2
is 0, and the build rate of Row 3, where the build rate of 30 degrees is
completed, is 30. The path stops building at Row 3, so the build rate of
Row 4 is 0.
Side View
Row 1 = 0
Surface
Location
Row 2 = 0
30
Kickoff
Row 3 = 30 Point
Targets
Row 4 = 0
Order of Build Rates in Spreadsheet Rows and Well Path

Understanding the Spreadsheet Columns

The spreadsheet contains the following columns, which display as
soon as your calculate the well path:
MD (Measured Depth)actual distance of the wellbore, measured

from the surface location (ground surface, kelly bushing, or derrick
floor) to this turnpoint
EW Offsetdistance from the surface location to this turnpoint,

measured from east to west
NS Offsetdistance from the surface location to this turnpoint,

measured from north to south
TVD (True Vertical Depth)vertical straight line distance from the

surface location to this turnpoint
Inclinationangle from the wellbore at this turnpoint to the

vertical, measured in degrees.
Azimuthclockwise angle of departure from a reference direction

(typically geographic north) to this turnpoint, measured in the
horizontal plane
Build Ratethe rate at which the inclination of the wellbore

increases between the last turnpoint and this one, measured in
degrees per 100 feet or per 30 meters
Turn Ratethe rate of turn of the wellbore between the last

turnpoint and this one, measured in degrees per 100 feet or per 30
meters
DLS (dogleg severity)a measure of how curved or twisted the

wellbore is between the last turnpoint and this one; calculated from
a formula that takes into account the build, turn, and drop rates;
measured in degrees per 100 feet or per 30 meters
Tool Facethe angle made by the plane of the bent sub (a part of
the course correction tool) with a reference direction, either
magnetic north or the direction of the high side of the hole
Targetthe target name, if there is one at this turnpoint.

Performing Advanced Well Planning Tasks

Wellbore Planner has a number of tools for working with well plans in
advanced stages of development. Here is an overview of other tasks
you can perform to take your well plans to the next stage:
Run Wellbore Planner in an integrated work session with other
OpenWorks family applications, such as:
Earthcube (as described in the section Integrating with
EarthCube beginning on page 272)
OpenVision (as described in the section Integrating with
OpenVision and StratWorks 3D beginning on page 284)
SeisWorks (as described in the section Integrating with
SeisWorks beginning on page 304)
Stratamodel (as described in the section Integrating with
Stratamodel beginning on page 322)
Import well plans you develop in Wellbore Planner into non-
integrated OpenWorks family applications, such as:
StratWorks (as described in the topic Using StratWorks with
Wellbore Planner beginning on page 332)
Compass for Windows (as described in the topic Using
COMPASS for Windows beginning on page 334)
Use the Time/Depth Server utility for making conversions between
time and depth values while you edit the well plan targets in
integrated applications (starting on page 155).
Calculate and view well position uncertainty data, and customize
the survey tools used for uncertainty projections (as described in
the section Working with Well Position Uncertainty beginning on
page 220).
Generate and view a variety of hardcopy data reports for your well
plan in table format (page 199).
Generate and view a Proximity report that shows how close the well
plan path is to an existing wellbore or to another well plan path
(page 208).
Generate graphic files for your well plan, which show the well plan
as displayed in the Plan View, Section View, 3D View, Redline
View, or Diagram Preview windows (page 213).

Converting, Importing,
and Exporting Data
Overview
This section contains key information about managing Wellbore

Planner data. The section describes how to:
understand the way time and depth values for well plans are stored
in the OpenWorks database (page 155)
use the Time/Depth Server utility (the Wellbore Planner tool for
making conversions between time and depth values) (page 157)
load a Time Only or Time and Depth project into Wellbore Planner
in time-based mode (page 162)
create a time/depth file for converting target data between domains
(page 166)
create a well from a well plan (with a plan-to-well link) (page 175)
perform these management tasks for a linked well:
update the wells position log data (page 179)
set and edit the wells casing data (page 182)
set and edit the wells completion data (page 186)
set and edit picks (page 188) and/or faults (page 192)
associated with the wells targets
disconnect (and possibly reconnect) the plan-to-well link
(page 194)
generate and view a variety of hardcopy data reports for your well
plan in table format to show the well path at intervals, or show
details about the well plans turn points or targets (page 199)
generate and view a data report that shows how close the well plan
is to an existing well or to another well plan (page 208)
generate graphic files for your well plan, which show the well plan
as displayed in the Plan View, Section View, 3D View, Redline
View, or Diagram Preview windows (page 213)
R2003.12 Converting, Importing, and Exporting Data 154

Converting Time and Depth Domain Values
Overview of How Time and Depth Values Are Stored

Depending on the application(s) you run, a project targets domain
values may be stored in the OpenWorks database as time, as depth, or
as both time and depth. If you create and view well plans exclusively
in a time-domain application such as SeisWorks or EarthCube, only
time values are stored in the database, and the project is marked as
Time Only. (Since Wellbore Planner is a depth-domain application,
you have to take special measures to display a Time Only project in
Wellbore Planner.)
Wellbore Planner calculates and records well plan data in the depth
domain: it expects the z values for targets to be expressed as True
Vertical Depth Subsea (TVDSS) values. If you create and work on a
well plan exclusively in Wellbore Planner without making any domain
conversions, only depth values are stored in the database. In this case,
the plan is marked Depth Only, and it capable of being readily
displayed only in a depth-domain application (such as Wellbore
Planner) or in a mixed-domain application (such as OpenVision).
If valid domain data is stored for both time and depth, the project is
marked as Time and Depth, and is easily accessible to both time- and
depth-domain applications.

When to Use the Time/Depth Server Utility

Run the Time/Depth Server utility when you want to make your
Wellbore Planner plans easily accessible to all OpenWorks
applications. You should always run the utility when you use Wellbore
Planner with other applications and work with time data. You start the
Time/Depth Server utility and configure it by selecting the velocity
model the utility uses to convert domain values. As long as the
Time/Depth Server utility is running, target changes you save are
stored in the OpenWorks database with both time and depth values.
For example, the Time/Depth Server utility makes the necessary
conversions when you use Wellbore Planner in these situations:
In combination with a time-domain application For example,
you display Wellbore Planner data in SeisWorks, converting the
data to time. You change target locations in SeisWorks, and save the
changes to Wellbore Planner. (If you do not configure and run the
Time/Depth Server utility, your Wellbore Planner targets do not
appear in the SeisWorks window.)
In combination with a mixed-domain application, while displaying
time-domain data For example, you display Wellbore Planner
data (converted to time) in OpenVision, along with SeisWorks
time-domain data stored the OpenWorks database. You change
target locations in OpenVision, and save the changes to Wellbore
Planner. (If you use the Time/Depth Server utility at the beginning
of the work session, then close the utility, the data in Wellbore
Planner and OpenVision is mismatched.)

Using the Time/Depth Server Utility

This topic describes how to display and configure the Time/Depth
Server window, and how to create a time/depth file to use for domain
conversions. Here are basic steps you take to run the Time/Depth
Server utility:
1. Display the Time/Depth Server window if it is not already open

(as described in the next topic).
If you work in an integrated session with SeisWorks or EarthCube,
and use data you created in Stratamodel, set the Time/Depth Server
to use depth as the source domain (page 164).
2. Configure the Time/Depth Server by selecting a velocity model to
use for domain conversions (page 159).
3. Keep the Time/Depth Server utility running throughout your
session, by leaving the Time/Depth Server window open
(page 162).
If you want to change velocity models in the middle of a session,
first make sure you understand the effects the change will have on
your particular situation. If necessary, take precautions to preserve
the consistency of your data (page 160).
If you want to stop making domain conversions and close the
Time/Depth Server utility, select File Exit.

Displaying the Time/Depth Server Window

If Wellbore Planner detects a situation in which the Time/Depth Server
utility is clearly needed, it automatically displays the Time/Depth
Server window. (For example, if you launch both Wellbore Planner
and a time-domain application, the Time/Depth Server window
appears.) In some situations, you need to display the Time/Depth
Server window on command.
To display the Time/Depth Server window on command:
Select Tools Time/Depth Server from the Wellbore Planner main

window.
If you are using dual monitors, when you are prompted, select a
monitor for displaying the Time/Depth Server window. The Time/
Depth Server window appears, as shown below:
The windows message prompts you to select a velocity model (that is,
the time-depth relationship model Wellbore Planner will use for
converting domain values from time to depth or from depth to time).
Choose one of the velocity models (as described in the following text).
If a velocity model is already in use for the current OpenWorks
session, it is selected for you.

Choosing a Velocity Model

list of velocity models To select a time-depth velocity model, click on File in the Time/Depth
window, and choose one of the first six options from the drop-down
menu (as shown at left). If your well planning project team has been
using a particular velocity model, you typically continue to use the
same one. Before you change the established velocity model for your
project or well plan, read the next topic, Effects of Changing the
Velocity Model beginning on page 160.
Open Time/Depth File opens the Open Time/Depth File dialog

box, which you use to locate and select a previously defined
time/depth file (an ASCII text file that contains a table of
time-depth conversion pairs). For more information about
time/depth files, see Creating and Using a Time/Depth File on
page 166.
Open Time/Depth Curve opens the OpenWorks TimeDepth

Curves dialog box. In the dialog boxs Items list, select an
appropriate time/depth curve. For each item, the list displays the
well name (in the format you selected when you launched Wellbore
Planner), followed by the curve descriptor.
Open TDQ Function Model opens the OpenWorks TDQ Function

Models dialog box. Select one of the function models (previously
created in the TDQ application) from the Items list. TDQ function
models are three-dimensional velocity models. This type of model
is generally more accurate than a time-depth table, since it can
incorporate complex variations in velocity that span an entire
seismic project.
Open TDQ Grid Model opens the OpenWorks TDQ Grid Models
dialog box. Select one of the three-dimensional grid velocity
models (previously created in the TDQ application) from the dialog
boxs Items list.
No Conversion sets Wellbore Planner to subtract the time from

each datum and send it out as subsea depth. Although this option
has been extensively tested and demonstrated, you typically should
use the No Conversion option only when you work with seismic
volumes that have already been converted to depth.
The Load Time Project option (described on page 160) is not one of
the velocity models. It is inactive (and grayed out) until you have
selected a velocity model option.

Effects of Changing the Velocity Model

You can switch between velocity models at any time, but before you
make the switch, you should be aware of these considerations:
Only one active velocity model Only one velocity model is active
at a time. If you select a new velocity model, that model is used for
any changes you make from that point forward in your work session.
Defining targets in time under different velocity models

If you are running an integrated work session and making changes in
SeisWorks or EarthCube, the new velocity model applies to all the
project well plans and targets. If you save the sessions work, all
Wellbore Planner project data is overwritten with the new values in
both time and depth.
If you run an integrated work session with OpenVision and work in
time, changing the velocity model may result in mismatched data.
Defining targets in depth under different velocity models

If you run only the Wellbore Planner application, changing the
velocity model can cause discrepancies between targets or between
well plans in your project. (Changing the velocity model can also
cause discrepancies to appear during an integrated OpenVision /
Wellbore Planner work session in which you work in depth.)
As an example, suppose you run a Wellbore Planner session and
define several targets. You change the velocity model, and pick new
targets. The depth values for the first group of targets are not the same
as if you had calculated them with the new velocity model.
If you intentionally use multiple velocity models in your project, you
may want to keep a record of which plans and targets were calculated
with each model. Wellbore Planner does not track this information for
you.

To avoid problems that may arise from using multiple velocity

models, you can use the following procedure to apply a single velocity
model to the project data:
1. Before you change the velocity model, select File Save As.
Use the dialog box that opens to create a new version of the project
under a different name.
The new Wellbore Planner project is added to the OpenWorks
database, and becomes the active project. No changes are made to
the original project.
2. Change the velocity model by selecting a new option from the File
menu in the Time/Depth Server window.
Wellbore Planner is set to use the specified velocity model for any
new well path calculations.
3. In the Time/Depth Server window, select File Load Time

Project.
A project selection dialog box appears, which you use to select and
reload your original project. Wellbore Planner reads in the time
values, and the Time/Depth Server utility converts them. Using a
single velocity model, you continue to modify the well plans and
save your work to the project file.

Keeping the Time/Depth Server Utility Running

It is very important to keep the Time/Depth Server utility running
throughout your Wellbore Planner session. For the utility to remain
open, the Time/Depth Server window must remain on the screen.
(You can minimize the window by clicking on the Minimize button in
the windows upper right corner. The utility continues to run while the
window is minimized.)
If you close the Time/Depth Server, these problems occur:
Working in time If you are working in an integrated session with

an application such as SeisWorks or OpenVision, targets you select
from time-domain data do not appear in Wellbore Planner.
Working in depth If you are working in an integrated session with

an application such as OpenVision and you select targets from depth-
domain data, time values in the OpenWorks database are not updated
when you save the project. The time and depth value pairs that are in
the database are invalidated, and as a result, the project becomes a
Depth Only project. (You cannot display a Depth Only project in a
time-domain application such as SeisWorks.)
Loading a Project into Wellbore Planner in Time-based Mode

You can use the Time/Depth Server utility to load a well planning
project in time-based mode. Loading the project in time-based mode
sets Wellbore Planner to read in the projects time values, instead of
starting by reading in any depth values that may be saved for the
project in the OpenWorks database. You typically use this option in
these circumstances:
You want to display a Time Only well planning project (a project
stored in the OpenWorks database with time values, but without a
full set of depth values). For example, if you want to import a
project that was developed in a time-domain application, you can
load the project into Wellbore Planner in time-based mode.
You want to display a Time and Depth well planning project, but set
Wellbore Planner to read in the projects time values. (A Time and
Depth project is one stored in the OpenWorks database with a full
set of time-depth value pairs.) For example, use this method to
reload your project in a situation like the one described on
page 160, in which you change velocity models while defining
targets in depth.

To load a project in time-based mode:
1. In the Time/Depth Server window, select Load Time Project from

the File drop-down menu, as shown below. (This option is enabled
only if you have already selected a velocity model.)
The OpenWorks Time Well Planning Projects dialog box appears,

as shown in the example below.
2. Select the project you want to load in time-based mode from the
Items list. The list contains all the well planning projects with time
values saved in the OpenWorks database.

3. Click on OK to load the project into Wellbore Planner and close the
dialog box, or click on Apply to load the project and leave the
dialog box open. (Or click on Cancel to close the dialog box
without loading the project.)
The selected project loads into Wellbore Planner, reading in the
time values.
4. If you are about to start working with depth data, and want to
specify a new velocity model to use for the rest of your session,
make the change now.
The Time/Depth Server utility converts the time values to depth
based on the currently selected velocity model. If you save the
project, the new time-depth value pairs are saved to the OpenWorks
database.
Changing the Domain Used as the Calculation Basis

When the Time/Depth Server utility converts data, it uses data from a
default domain as the basis for the calculations (the source domain).
The default source domain varies according to the set of OpenWorks
family applications you use together. In almost every case, the
Time/Depth Server utility chooses the appropriate source domain for
you. For example, change the source domain if you work in an
integrated session with SeisWorks or EarthCube, and you display a
depth-domain well plan created in the Stratamodel application.
The Time/Depth Server utility converts depth values to time if you use
Wellbore Planner by itself or use OpenVision and Wellbore Planner
together. Under these circumstances, the utility always makes
depth-to-time conversions regardless of whether or not you specify a
source domain.
By default, the Time/Depth Server utility converts time values to depth

if you work in an integrated Wellbore Planner session, and you make
changes to the well plan in SeisWorks or EarthCube. Under these
circumstances, the utility always makes time-to-depth conversions
unless you change the default setting for the source domain.

To change the source domain to depth:

1. Display the Time/Depth Server window, if it is not already open.
Select Tools Time/Depth Server in the Wellbore Planner main
window. (For more instructions on this step, see page 158.)
2. Before you select a velocity model, select Preferences

On Velocity Model changes Convert Depth to Time.
Make this selection for the source domain only if you work with
Wellbore Planner in an integrated session with SeisWorks or
EarthCube, and you display a depth-domain well plan created in the
Stratamodel application.
The data displays in SeisWorks or EarthCube. The Time/Depth
Server utility converts the data to time values. If you save the well
plan, the resulting depth-time value pairs are saved in the
OpenWorks database.
3. Configure the Time/Depth Server by selecting a velocity model to

use for domain conversions (as described on page 159).
4. Keep the Time/Depth Server utility running throughout your
session (as described on page 162). Do not close the Time/Depth
Server window.

Creating and Using a Time/Depth File

When you run the Time/Depth Server utility, you have several options
for the type of velocity model you can use for converting domain
values. Most velocity models are curves or models you develop in
other applications. You have the additional option of creating and
specifying an ASCII file that identifies a set of time-depth value pairs.
This topic describes the format you must use for creating a time/depth
file.
To create a time/depth file, follow these steps:
1. Open a text editor and create a new file.
2. At the top of the file, enter any comment lines you want to include.
Begin each comment line with an exclamation mark (!) to signal
the Time/Depth Server utility to ignore the line.
3. On the first line below the comments, enter the number of samples
and the datum.
4. In the remainder of the file, create a table of depth and time data
pairs. Enter the data in two columns, with depths in column 1, and
times in column 2. Express time values as two-way time.
The illustration below shows an example of the data in a time/depth
file.
comment line
number of samples datum
depth and time values

for the samples
depth column time column

(two-way time)
5. Save the time/depth file, and make note of the files name and
location.
To specify a time/depth file as the Time/Depth Servers velocity
model, select the Open Time/Depth File option from the Time/Depth
Server windows File menu. In the dialog box that appears, locate and
select the file name, then click on OK.

Importing COMPASS Well Planning Files
You can import ASCII well planning files that you created in the
COMPASS application and saved in the WBP format. The imported
file may contain one or more well plans. Once you import the well
plans in the COMPASS file into your project, the well plans have the
same capabilities as a native Wellbore Planner plans, except that you
cannot recalculate the plans well paths. You can, however, make a
copy of an imported COMPASS well plan. The new well plan you
create in this way has full Wellbore Planner capabilities.
What happens to my directional survey when I import a COMPASS

ASCII file?
When Wellbore Planner imports a COMPASS ASCII file containing a

directional survey and a well plan which references the directional survey, a
WBP plan is created for the COMPASS well plan but not the directional survey.
The plan is created in Wellbore Planner as a sidetrack, and the spreadsheet
information for the well plan is complete with the first point of the directional
survey added to the top of the plan.
To retain and use directional survey information, you can
use the ASCII file as a data store and keep the survey as a Compass Well
use the live link to create an OpenWorks well
in COMPASS, export the directional survey in DirSur format and import it
using OpenWorks Curve Data Loader
in COMPASS, export the survey in User Defined format and import it to the
database through Wellbore Planner; note that this will cause the TurnPoint
generation, loss of survey precision, and other problems.
To import a COMPASS WBP-format well planning file, follow these

steps:
1. Open the appropriate well planning project (the project to which
you want to add the COMPASS well plan or well plans). Select
File Open in the Wellbore Planner main window, and use the
dialog box that appears to select the project you want to open. (For
more information about opening a project file, see page 51.)

2. Select File Import Compass (ASCII) File in the Wellbore

The Import Compass (ASCII) File dialog box appears, as shown in
the illustration below.
3. Use the Import Compass (ASCII) File dialog box to locate and
select the file you want to import. To display all the files that have
the .wbp extension (in every possible capitalization style), make
sure the path in the Filter box ends with /*.[Ww][Bb][Pp].
(For more instructions about navigating in and using file selection
dialog boxes, see Using a File Selection Dialog Box on page 28.)
The first time you display the dialog box, the path in the Filter box
is set to your home directory by default. If you set a new path in this
box, the next time you display the dialog box it displays your most
recently specified Filter path.
4. When the appropriate full path and file name appear in the
Selection box, click on OK.
Wellbore Planner adds the selected well plan file to the current well
planning project. The Import Compass (ASCII) File dialog box
closes, and you return to the Wellbore Planner main window with
the newly imported well plan open.
You can perform tasks with the new well plan as if it were a native
Wellbore Planner plan, except that you cannot recalculate the well
path. If you like, you can make a copy of the well plan, which will be

in native Wellbore Planner format. You can perform all tasks with the
well plan copy, including recalculating the well path.
To make a copy of the imported well plan, make sure the plan is open,
then select Plans Copy As in the Wellbore Planner main window.
The Save Plan As dialog box appears. Enter a name in the Plan Name
box, and click on OK. The new well plan is added to the current well
planning project, and becomes the active well plan.

Exporting Well Plans and Projects
You have a variety of options for exporting Wellbore Planner well

plans or well plan data. You can export a well plan or data from a well
plan as a file in the following formats.
an ASCII file formatted in WBP-format, which the COMPASS for

Windows application can import (as described in the next topic)
a number of formats that other OpenWorks applications can import
(as described Using the Export Dialog Box on page 172)
SGM (SM1 format)
SGM Cross Section (GXY format)
VIP (GTF format)
ZMAP (DWEL - plans)
ZMAP (VERT - Targets)
ZMAP (TEXT - Targets)
StratWorks - MapView
StratWorks - Xsec
Sperry (UT - plans)
generic text files that list the well plan targets core location
coordinates in one of two column formats (as described Using the
Export Dialog Box on page 172)
Using the Export COMPASS (ASCII) File Dialog Box

You can save your well planning project as an ASCII file in a
COMPASS-compatible format (a format that can be imported into
the COMPASS for Windows application).
To export a well planning project file as a file in a COMPASS-
compatible format, follow these steps:
1. Open the well planning project you want to save. (For information
about opening a project file, see page 51.)
2. Select File Export Compass (ASCII) File.

The Export Compass (ASCII) File dialog box appears, as shown in
the following illustration.

3. Locate the destination directory for saving your file. When the
appropriate path appears in the Selection box, specify a file name at
the end of the path. If you are overwriting an existing file, you can
enter the file name by selecting it in the Files list. (For instructions
about navigating in and using this type of file selection dialog box,
see Using a File Selection Dialog Box on page 28.)
The first time you display the dialog box, the path in the Filter box
is set to your home directory by default. If you set a new path in this
box, the next time you display the dialog box it displays your most
recently specified path.
4. When the appropriate path and file name appears in the Selection
box, click on OK.
Wellbore Planner saves the well plans in your project as an ASCII
file. The resulting file can be imported by other applications,
including COMPASS for Windows.

Using the Export Dialog Box

You can use the Export dialog box to export Wellbore Planner plans or
well plan data as files in formats that other OpenWorks applications
can import. You can also export well plans as generic text files that list
the well plan targets core location coordinates (MD, azimuth, and
inclination) in a column format. To export Wellbore Planner data in
one of the supported file formats (described in the table on page 173),
follow these steps:
1. Select File Export in the Wellbore Planner main window.

The Export dialog box appears, as shown below.
2. Click on the Export Type button and select a file format from the
drop-down list. The export type options are described in the
following table.

Destination Application and

Export Type
Use for the Exported File
SGM (SM1 format) Stratamodel, for use as wells
SGM Cross Section

Stratamodel, for use as a line of section
(GXY format)
VIP (GTF format) VIP Simulator, for use as well plans
ZMAP (DWEL - plans) Z-MAP Plus, for use as wells
ZMAP (VERT - Targets) Z-MAP Plus, for use as outlines of targets
ZMAP (TEXT - Targets) Z-MAP Plus, for use as target labels
StratWorks MapView, for use as free-form

StratWorks - MapView
annotation
StratWorks cross-section, for use as free-form

StratWorks - Xsec
annotationa
Sperry (UT - plans) any Sperry-Sun applications, for use as well plans
any text reader, as a table of well plan targets

Md/Azi/Incl location coordinates, listed in MD, azimuth, and
inclination columns
any text reader, as a table of well plan targets

Md/Incl/Azi location coordinates, listed in MD, inclination, and
azimuth columns
a. Note that a well planning cross-section is a two-dimensional representa-

tion that follows the well path exactly, even when it doubles back on
itself. In effect, the geologic data is bent into a linear representation of
the strata that are intersected by the well path. This representation may
be completely different from a three-dimensional geologic cross-section.
3. Check the full path to the export file you want to create, as it is
currently displayed in the File box. If necessary, enter a new path
directly from the keyboard or click on the List button. A file
selection dialog box appears, which you use to locate a destination
directory and select a file name. (For more complete instructions,
see Using a File Selection Dialog Box on page 28.)

4. For many export formats, you can choose whether or not to restrict
the well plans that will be included in your file. Click on the Plan
Type button, and choose from the drop-down option list (if more
than one option on the list is enabled). Choose Current to include
only the currently selected well plan, or choose All (if available) to
include all well plans in the current Wellbore Planner project.
The All option is disabled (and is grayed out) for these formats:
Stratworks-Xsec, Sperry (UT-plans), Md/Azi/Incl, and Md/Incl/Azi.
If you use any of these export file formats, you can include only the
current well plan.
5. If you export data that includes sidetrack well plans, choose

whether or not to include data for the well or wells on which the
plans are based. Click on the Sidetrack button, and choose an
option from the drop-down list. Choose Well to Surface to include
data for the well plan(s) and the original well(s) that serve as the
takeoff point(s) for the sidetrack, look ahead, or complex extension
well plan(s). Choose Sidetrack Only to include only the well
plan(s), and not the original well(s).
6. When all the specifications in the Export dialog box are complete,
click on Apply (to create the exported file without closing the
dialog box), or OK (to create the exported file and close the dialog
box). To close the dialog box without creating an export file, click
on Cancel.
If you clicked on Apply or OK, data for the specified well plan or
Wellbore Planner project is saved to the specified file in the selected
format.
Saving a Line of Section to the OpenWorks Database

You can save a line of section (LOS) to the OpenWorks database, by
selecting Plans Write LOS to OpenWorks in Wellbore Planners
main window. This action saves an LOS along the well path of the
selected well plan for use as a cross section in StratWorks MapView
and Cross Section applications.
For more information about this task, see page 333.

Creating and Managing Linked Wells
You can save a well plan as a preliminary well in the OpenWorks

database, one that is linked to the originating well plan. Working with
the plan as a well has several advantages. For example, you can make
enhancements to the new well that you cannot make to a well plan,
such as adding casing data, adding completion data, and specifying
target penetration points as faults or picks. These additions help to
flesh out the well, and make it possible to prepare a more complete
presentation for times when you cannot use your computer to display
the well plan.
Another advantage to working with a preliminary well is that it is more

universally accessible than the original well plan. You can gain access
to a well from within any OpenWorks application, and use the
available engineering tools in that application to make further well
enhancements. If the well plan is approved and drilling begins, you
can update the preliminary well with real-time information as ongoing
surveys are completed.
The well you create is automatically linked to the originating well

plan. You can continue to change the well plan, and update the well to
reflect your well plan changes whenever you like. You can use
Wellbore Planners central plan-to-well management tool to keep track
of status for all your linked wells, and gain access to dialog boxes for
displaying, creating, or modifying the wells casing, completion, fault,
and pick data. You can also disconnect and restore the link between a
well plan and well at any time.
Saving a Well Plan as an OpenWorks Well

To save a well plan as an OpenWorks well, follow these steps:
1. Make sure the well plan you want to save is active (that is,
highlighted in the Plans list of the Wellbore Planner main window).
Make sure the well plans calculations are valid. If the Calculations
button is set to Manual, and you are unsure about whether the
calculations are up-to-date, click on the Calculate button (shown at
left).

2. In the Wellbore Planner main window, select Plans

Manage As OpenWorks Well Create OpenWorks Well,
The Write to OpenWorks dialog box appears, as shown in the

example below.
3. Set the UWI Number (the unique well ID number, which is

described in the following list). This is the only required field for
creating the well.
4. Also specify any of the additional, optional identifiers (also

described in the following list) that you want to use for the well.

Effects of Leaving the Optional Identifier Fields Blank
If you save a well plan in the Write to OpenWorks dialog box, and leave the
Common Well Name, Well Name, or Well Number fields blank, you can
encounter identification problems when you display well lists. For example,
suppose you choose a display format for OpenWorks wells that includes the
omitted identifier (the common well name, well name, or well number). If you
then display all wells in the OpenWorks Well Data Manager window, the entry
for the new preliminary well appears with blank fields or as a blank line.
If you leave the Operator field blank, Wellbore Planner uses UNKNOWN as the
operator value.
Common Well Name Optional: Enter a string in the format

typical for wells in your project. By default, the active well
plan name appears in this box.
Well Name Optional: Enter a string in the format typical
for wells in your project. For example, the well name could be
a combination of the lease name and well number (or lease
number). By default the active well plan name appears in this
box.
Well Number Optional: Use a number appropriate for the
numbering system for your project wells. The Well Number
box is empty the first time you display the dialog box. Once
you enter a value and reopen the Write to OpenWorks dialog
box, your most recent entry appears by default.
Operator Optional: Enter the well operators name from
the keyboard or click on the List button and use the Available
Operators dialog box that appears to select an entry. The
Operator box is empty the first time you display the Write to
OpenWorks dialog box. Once you select or enter an operator
value and reopen the dialog box, your most recent specification
appears by default.
UWI Number By default, the name of the originating well
plan appears in this field. If you have the official, assigned
UWI number for the well, enter it here; or use the placeholder
of your choice. This is a required field: you cannot create the
preliminary well without a value entered in the UWI Number
box.
If you use an existing UWI Number to create the new well, and
the original well was linked to a different well plan, make sure
you have disconnected the original plan-to-well link before
you proceed. (For information about disconnecting a plan-to-
well link, see page 194.)

4. When the information in the dialog box is complete, click on OK.

If you have specified a UWI number that is already assigned to a
well in the OpenWorks database, an overwrite warning appears. To
overwrite the well already saved in the OpenWorks database under
the specified UWI number, click on OK.
Wellbore Planner saves the preliminary well to the OpenWorks
database, but does not add it to any well list. The wells ID becomes
part of the well planning project file. You can now display the
preliminary well in Wellbore Planners OpenWorks Wells dialog
box, and in OpenWorks Well Data Manager window (if you
display all wells). (If you create a new well planning project, and
add the preliminary well to the project, you can use the well as the
basis for new well plans.)
Wellbore Planner establishes a one-way link between the active
well plan and the preliminary well. The link enables you to track
the wells status in Wellbore Planners OpenWorks Well Manager
dialog box, and enables you to update the wells saved position log
data on command.
Overwriting an Existing Well
If you save a well under a UWI number that already exits in the OpenWorks
database, you overwrite the original wells data, except when you attempt to
overwrite an existing string with a blank entry. That is, if you leave optional
fields for well names or numbers blank when you overwrite existing well data,
OpenWorks retains any values that already exist for those fields in the database.
Preliminary Well Data That Is Written to the OpenWorks Database
The well plan you selected is written to the OpenWorks database as follows:
The common well name, well name, well number, operator, and UWI number
you specified are stored in the OpenWorks databases Well Header table.
If you have specified an operator who is not already in the database, the new
operator is automatically added to the list of valid operators.
The current velocity model (if any) is written to the database as the Time/Depth
table associated with the well. An entry is generated in the OpenWorks
database Time/Depth table for each point along the well path.
Directional survey data and the position log are also added.

Managing Linked Wells

You can perform these types of well management tasks for the
preliminary well:
Update the well to match changes in the well plan (as explained in
the Position Status description on page 181).
Add or edit any of these types of data for the well casing
(page 182), completion (page 186), picks (page 188), and faults
(page 192).
Disconnect (and reconnect) the link between the well plan and the
well (page 194).
In addition to these management tasks, you many find it useful to add
the preliminary well to an OpenWorks well list, as described on
page 198.
Displaying the OpenWorks Well Manager Dialog Box

To display the OpenWorks Well Manager dialog box, select Plans
Manage As OpenWorks Well Plan to OW Well Relationship in
the Wellbore Planner main window.
The OpenWorks Well Manager dialog box appears, as shown in
the example below. (The example shows the dialog box resized to
display all of the dialog boxs columns at once. You may have to
use the scroll bar to see the columns on the far right.)

The OpenWorks Well Manager dialog box shows identification and

status information for all the wells that are:
saved to the OpenWorks database from the Write to OpenWorks
dialog box
currently linked to well plans in the active Wellbore Planner project
Each row in the table represents a linked well, which is listed
alphabetically by plan name. The dialog box displays information
about the linked wells, as described in the following text. Each column
contains a button that indicates the current status for the corresponding
well characteristic:
Not Set No specifications of the indicated type are currently set
for this well. (For pick status and fault status, the Not Set button
can also mean that specifications were once set for the well, but the
plan-to-well link was interrupted since the picks and faults were
last saved.)
In all columns except the Position Status column, click on a Not Set
button to display a dialog box that enables you to add the
appropriate well characteristic. (If you click on any button that
appears in the Position Status column, Wellbore Planner updates
the wells position log data. This is a background operation that
does not involve a dialog box.)
Set Viable log position data or other types of specifications have

been saved for the well in the OpenWorks database.
Click on the Set button in the Casing Status, Completion Status,
Pick Status, or Fault Status column to display a dialog box that
enables you to review and modify specifications that have been
saved to the OpenWorks database. (If the Set button appears in one
of these columns, it indicates that data was once saved from the
associated dialog box. It is possible that the data has since been
deleted from the dialog box. If you need to review the currently
saved data, click on the Set button.)
Clicking on the Position Status Set button resaves the well position
log data to the OpenWorks database. Since the button only reads
Set when the position log data is up-to-date, you do not need to
perform this action.
Out of Date The Out of Date button replaces the Set button if
the plan-to-well link has been disconnected and reconnected or if
the well plan path has been changed and recalculated since the well
data was set. You can reset outdated Position Status data by clicking
on the Out of Date button. You can reset other types of outdated

data by clicking on the Out of Date button, and saving the data in
the dialog box that appears.
Plan Name The Plan Name column shows the name of the well
plan currently linked to the preliminary well.
Well Name The Well Name column shows the name of the
preliminary, linked well, displayed in the well name format chosen for
the current OpenWorks session. For long well names or multiple-
identifier well name formats, you may not be able to see the complete
well name.
Position Status The Position Status column shows whether or not

the wells position log data matches that of its linked well plan. A
mismatch occurs if you have changed and recalculated the well plan
path since you last updated the well position log data, or if you have
disconnected and reconnected the plan-to-well link. In either of these
circumstances, an Out of Date button appears. Click on the Out of
Date button to update the log position data for the OpenWorks well.
The Set button appears, which indicates that the wells position log
data matches that of the linked well plan.
Casing Status The Casing Status column shows whether or not

casing has been specified for the well, or whether the linked well plan
has been changed and recalculated since the casing data was set. Click
on the Casing Status column button to display the Casing Editor dialog
box. Use the dialog box to add, modify, or resave the casing
specifications for the corresponding well, as described in the topic
Adding and Editing Casing Information for a Linked Well on
page 182.
Completion Status The Completion Status column shows whether
or not completion sections have been added to the well, or whether the
linked well plan has been changed and recalculated since the
completion data was set. Click the Completion Status column button to
display the Completion/Perforation Editor dialog box. Use the dialog
box to add, modify, or resave the corresponding wells completion
data, as described in the topic Adding and Editing Completion
Information for a Linked Well on page 186.
Pick Status The Pick Status column shows whether or not any of
the wells target penetration points have been identified with picks in
the OpenWorks database, or whether the linked well plan has been
changed and recalculated since the pick data was set. Click on the Pick
Status column button to display the Create Picks From Targets dialog
box. Use the dialog box to identify one or more pick-to-target

associations, as described in the topic Adding and Editing Well

Target Picks for a Linked Well on page 188.
Fault Status The Fault Status column shows whether or not any of
the wells target penetration points have been identified with faults in
the OpenWorks database, or whether the linked well plan has been
changed and recalculated since the fault data was set. Click on the
Fault Status column button to display the Create Faults From Targets
dialog box. Use the dialog box to identify one or more fault-to-target
associations, as described in the topic Adding and Editing Well
Target Faults for a Linked Well on page 192.
Closing Wellbore Planners OpenWorks Well Manager Dialog Box
Do not attempt to use the Disconnect button to close Wellbore Planners

OpenWorks Well Manager dialog box. Use the Close button for this purpose.
Clicking on the Disconnect button commands Wellbore Planner to break the
plan-to-well link for the currently selected well. (For more information about
disconnecting and reconnecting a link, see page 194.)
Adding and Editing Casing Information for a Linked Well

To add or edit casing information for a linked well, follow these steps.
1. Display the Casing Editor dialog box, in either of these ways:
In Wellbore Planners OpenWorks Well Manager dialog box,
locate the appropriate well row, and click on the corresponding
button that appears in the Casing Status column. (For
information about displaying the OpenWorks Well Manager
dialog box, see page 179.)
or
Click on the appropriate linked well plan in the Plans list of
Wellbore Planners main window. (Choose the well plan that is
linked to the preliminary well you want to modify.) Then select
Plans Manage As OpenWorks Well Edit Casing in the

The Casing Editor dialog box appears, as shown in the example

below.
name of the well

plan linked to the
preliminary well
specified sections
of casing
button that displays
the dialog box for
selecting a casing
diameter
controls for adding

and deleting rows
The name of the well plan that is linked to the preliminary well
appears at the top of the Casing Editor dialog box. Each row in the
table represents a casing section that has been specified for the
linked well.
2. Check the well plan name that is displayed. If you opened the
dialog box from the menu (by clicking on Plans Manage As
OpenWorks Well Edit Casing), the dialog box is set to edit
data for a well that Wellbore Planner assumes is linked to the well
plan that was active when you made the menu selection. If there is
no well linked to the active well plan, you cannot save any
specifications you make in the dialog box. If you opened the dialog
box by clicking on a button in the OpenWorks Well Manager dialog
box, you may have clicked on the wrong button.

3. Create as many casing rows as you need, by clicking on the Insert

and Append buttons. Use the Append button to add a row at the
bottom of the table. Use the Insert button to add a row above the
currently active row (the row that has a highlighted field). You can
create a number of rows, then enter field values in any order. (If you
need to delete a row, activate the row and click on Delete.)
4. Specify the length and location of the casing section by entering a

value in either of these columns:
Base MD the measured depth (along hole depth) at the base
of the casing section
Base TVDSS the true vertical depth subsea at the base of
the casing section
These two values are paired. Once you have entered either the base
MD or the base TVDSS value, press Enter or click on another field
in the dialog box. Wellbore Planner calculates the value for the
unspecified base TVDSS or base MD to match the specification you
supplied.
5. Specify the Diameter (inches) column entry and the identifier for
the Size/Name box, in either of these ways:
From the keyboard, enter a value for the casing diameter and
identifier. (Typically you use the diameter in both fields, but
you can also add other identification information, such as the
type of casing material.)
or
Click on the List button. Use the Size/Name Select dialog box
that appears for selecting the entries for both the Diameter
(inches) and the Size/Name fields (as shown in the following
illustration).

Click on OK when the correct size and name selection is

highlighted. The dialog box closes, and you return to the
Casing Editor dialog box, which displays your selection in
both the Diameter (inches) and Size/Name fields.
6. When the casing data is complete, click on OK to save the new
well information to the OpenWorks database (and close the dialog
box) or click on Apply (to save the data without closing the dialog
box). To exit without saving changes, click on Cancel.
The Casing Editor dialog box closes. If you displayed the Casing
Editor dialog box by clicking a button in the OpenWorks Well
Manager dialog box, you return to that dialog box. If you saved
casing information, the OpenWorks Well Manager dialog box
displays a Set button for your well under the Casing Status column,
in your wells row.
Assigning Colors to Well Casing
You can set work session color options in Wellbore Planner so that each casing
section appears in a distinct color in the Plan View, Section View, and 3D View
windows. To use casing sections as the basis for your color scheme, select Views
Plan Colors Casing in the Wellbore Planner main window. Each well that
has casing set appears with unique colors applied to distinguish the casing
sections, even when the well is not active. Non-casing sections of the active well
or well plan appear in yellow, the default active display color.

Adding and Editing Completion Information for a Linked Well

To add or edit completion and perforation information for a linked
well, follow these steps.
1. Display the Completion/Perforation Editor dialog box, in either of
these ways:
locate the appropriate well row, and click on the button that
appears in the Completion Status column. (For information
about displaying the OpenWorks Well Manager dialog box, see
page 179.)
or
linked to the preliminary well you want to modify.) Then
select Plans Manage As OpenWorks Well Edit
Completions/Perforations in the Wellbore Planner main
window.
The Completion/Perforation Editor dialog box appears, as shown in
the example below.
name of the well plan

linked to the
preliminary well
specified
completion section
controls for
adding and
deleting
table rows
appears at the top of the Completion/Perforation Editor dialog box.
Each row in the table represents a completion section that has been
specified.
OpenWorks Well Edit Completions/Perforations), the dialog

box is set to edit data for a well that Wellbore Planner assumes is
linked to the well plan that was active when you made the menu
selection. If there is no well linked to the active well plan, you
cannot save any specifications you make in the dialog box. If you
opened the dialog box by clicking on a button in the OpenWorks
Well Manager dialog box, you may have clicked on the wrong
button.
3. Create as many completion rows as you need, by clicking on the

Insert and Append buttons. Use the Append button to add a row at
the bottom of the table. Use the Insert button to add a row above
the currently active row (the row that has a highlighted field). You
can create a number of rows, then enter field values in any order.
(If you need to delete a row, activate the row and click on Delete.)
4. Specify where the completion section begins by entering a value in

either of these columns:
Top MD the measured depth (along hole depth) that
represents the top of the completion section
Top Tvdss the true vertical depth subsea that represents the
top of the completion section
These two values are paired. When you have entered either the top
MD or the top TVDSS value, press Enter or click on another field
in the dialog box. Wellbore Planner calculates a value for the
unspecified field to match the value you supplied.
5. Specify where the completion section ends by entering a value in

either of these columns:
Base MD the measured depth (along hole depth) that
represents the base of the completion section
Base Tvdss the true vertical depth subsea that represents the
base of the completion section
These two values are paired. When you have entered either the base
MD or the base TVDSS value, press Enter or click on another field
in the dialog box. Wellbore Planner calculates a value for the
unspecified field to match the value you supplied.
6. Enter the Perforation Date (yyyy-mm-dd) value from the

keyboard (or accept the default entry the current date). The
perforation date is the date the completion section was or will be
perforated. You must use the yyyy-mm-dd format for entering the
date. (For example, enter 2000-01-01 to represent the date

January 1, 2000.) If you use an incorrect format you will receive an

error message if you try to save the data or exit from the dialog box.
7. When the completion data is complete, click on OK to save the

new well information (and close the dialog box) or click on Apply
(to save the data without closing the dialog box). To exit without
saving changes, click on Cancel.
Any data you save in the Completion/Perforation Editor dialog box
is recorded in the Well Perforation table in the OpenWorks
database. The dialog box closes. If you displayed the Completion/
Perforation Editor dialog box from the OpenWorks Well Manager
dialog box, you return to the OpenWorks Well Manager dialog box.
If you saved any completion information, the OpenWorks Well
Manager dialog box displays a Set button under the Completion
Status column, in the row for your well.
Assigning Colors to Well Completion Sections
You can set work session color options in Wellbore Planner so that each well
completion section appears in red in the Plan View, Section View, and 3D View
windows. To use completion sections as the basis for your coloring scheme,
select Views Plan Colors Completion/Perforation in the Wellbore
Planner main window. Non-completion sections of the active well or well plan
appear in yellow, the default active display color.
Adding and Editing Well Target Picks for a Linked Well

You can add picks to a linked well at the target MDs that is, you
choose a surface from the OpenWorks database that intersects with the
target, and create a target pick on that surface. (The pick you create
appears as the Feature Name in the Target Editor window.) You may,
for example, want to identify well targets with surface picks in order to
define surface locations.
To add or edit pick information for a linked well, follow these steps.
1. Display the Create Picks From Targets dialog box, in either of these
ways:
locate the appropriate well row, and click on the button that
appears in the Pick Status column. (For information about
displaying the OpenWorks Well Manager dialog box, see
page 179.)
or


linked to the preliminary well you want to modify.) Then select
Plans Manage As OpenWorks Well Create Picks from
Targets in the Wellbore Planner main window.
The Create Picks From Targets dialog box appears, as shown in the
example below. (The example shows the dialog boxs contents after
new pick data has been added for the Delta well.)
name of the well plan linked

to the preliminary well
list of well targets
(with identification for any
associated pick, MD data,
and an Add box you can
select in order to include the
data in the save operation
button that displays the
dialog box for selecting a pick
The name of the well plan linked to the preliminary well appears at
the top of the Create Picks From Targets dialog box. Each row in
the table identifies one of the wells targets and shows any target
pick name. You use the Add button to choose whether or not to
include the pick specification in the save operation that occurs when
you click on Apply or OK.
OpenWorks Well Create Picks From Targets), the dialog box
is set to edit data for a well that Wellbore Planner assumes is linked
to the well plan that was active when you made the menu selection.
If there is no well linked to the active well plan, you cannot save
any specifications you make in the dialog box. If you opened the
dialog box by clicking on a button in the OpenWorks Well Manager
dialog box, you may have clicked on the wrong button.
3. Before you can save a pick association for a target, the pick name
must appear in the Pick Name field next to the target name. (In
addition, the Add button must be highlighted.) If the Pick Name
field is blank or contains an incorrect value, click on the List button
next to the Pick Name field.

A selection dialog box appears, like the one shown in the following
example.
The Pick Name Select dialog box lists all the picks saved in the
OpenWorks database for the current OpenWorks project. If the pick
name you need is not currently in the database, you can create it in
one of the appropriate OpenWorks family applications (such as
StratWorks).
4. Click on the pick name that corresponds to the target, then click on
OK.
The selection dialog box closes, and you return to the Create Picks
From Targets dialog box, which now displays your selected pick
name. The Add column automatically contains a highlighted
button, indicating that the new pick information is set to be saved
when you click on the Apply or OK button. (Once you save the
pick information, then close and reopen the dialog box, the Add
button is no longer highlighted.)
Resetting an Invalidated Pick
If you display the Create Picks From Targets dialog box to set pick data, and the
appropriate pick name is already specified for a target in the Pick Name field, you
can reset the pick by clicking on the corresponding Add button, then clicking on
Apply or OK. (This situation may occur if your pick data is invalidated by a
change in the linked well plan path, or by an interruption of the plan-to-well
link.)
5. When the wells target pick information is complete, click on OK

in the Create Picks From Targets dialog box to save the new well
information to the OpenWorks database (and close the dialog box).
Click on Apply to save the data without closing the dialog box. To
exit without saving changes, click on Cancel.

If you modify pick data for a well that has already had pick data
saved, when you click on OK or Apply, an overwrite warning
appears.
Replace Click on Replace to delete any previous pick
information that may be in the OpenWorks database for the
specified well, and enter the new pick information in its place.
Merge Click on Merge to add the new pick information to
any existing information that exists in the OpenWorks
database. If you click on Merge, any additional pick names
that already exist for the well remain undisturbed in the
database. However, only the currently specified pick data
appears when you display the preliminary well in Wellbore
Planner view windows or in OpenVision. For example,
suppose you save pick information for a well that another
interpreter has already saved. Both pick specifications are
saved in the database, distinguished only by the interpreters
name. If you then display the well and its pick data, you do not
see any duplicate picks. For each target, you see only your
most recently specified pick.
Cancel Click on Cancel to exit without saving changes.
If you proceed to save the new data, another overwrite verification
box appears. Click on OK to save the data.
The Create Picks From Targets dialog box closes. If you displayed
the dialog box from the OpenWorks Well Manager dialog box, you
return to that dialog box. If you have saved pick data for the well, it
is saved in the OpenWorks database as the targets Feature Name.
The OpenWorks Well Manager dialog box displays a Set button for
your well in the Pick Status column. This button will continue to
read Set unless you change and recalculate the linked well plan
path, or you disconnect and reconnect the plan-to-well link.
Examining Pick and Fault Data
You can use OpenWorks Well Data Manager window to examine data for the
well picks and faults you create.

Adding and Editing Well Target Faults for a Linked Well

You can associate the linked wells targets with faults that have been
created in other OpenWorks applications and saved to the OpenWorks
database. Since faults can affect the way a well is drilled, you may
want to identify any well targets that are faults.
1. To add or edit fault information for a linked well, first display the
Create Faults From Targets dialog box, in either of these ways:
locate the wells row, and click on the button that appears in the
Fault Status column. (For information about displaying the
OpenWorks Well Manager dialog box, see page 179.)
or
Click on the linked well plan in the Plans list of Wellbore
Planners main window. (Choose the well plan that is linked to
the preliminary well you want to modify.) Then select Plans
Manage As OpenWorks Well Create Faults from Targets
in the Wellbore Planner main window.
The Create Faults From Targets dialog box appears, as shown in the
example below.
name of the well plan linked

to the preliminary well
list of well targets

(with identification for any
associated fault, MD data,
and an Add box you can
select in order to include the
data in the save operation
button that displays
the dialog box for
selecting a fault
appears at the top of the Create Faults From Targets dialog box.
Each row in the table identifies one of the wells targets and shows
the identity of any fault associated with the target. You use the Add
button to choose whether or not to include the fault specification in
the save operation that occurs when you click on Apply or OK.

2. Check the well name that is displayed. If you opened the dialog box
from the menu (by clicking on Plans Manage As OpenWorks
Well Create Faults From Targets), the dialog box is set to edit
data for a well that Wellbore Planner assumes is linked to the well
plan that was active when you made the menu selection. If there is
no well linked to the active well plan, you cannot save any
specifications you make in the dialog box. If you opened the dialog
box by clicking on a button in the OpenWorks Well Manager dialog
box, you may have clicked on the wrong button.
3. Add a fault association to one or more targets by clicking on the

appropriate List button, selecting a fault name and saving the
information to the OpenWorks database. You proceed in much the
same way as when you associate a pick with a well target. For step-
by-step instructions this step, see the comparable step in the pick
association process: step 3 on page 189.
If you click on a List button and display the Fault Name Select
dialog box, you see a list of all the faults that are saved in the
OpenWorks database for the current OpenWorks project. If the fault
you need is not currently in the OpenWorks database, you can
create it in one of the appropriate OpenWorks family applications
(such as StratWorks, SeisWorks, or EarthCube).
Resetting an Invalidated Fault
If you display the Create Faults From Targets dialog box to set fault data, and
the appropriate fault name is already specified for a target in the Fault Name
field, you can reset the fault by clicking on the corresponding Add button,
then clicking on Apply or OK. (This situation may occur if your fault data is
invalidated by a change in the linked well plan path, or by an interruption of
the plan-to-well link.)

Disconnecting and Reconnecting a Plan-to-well Link

You can disconnect the plan-to-well link, so that the well is completely
independent of its original corresponding well plan. For example,
suppose you convert a well plan to a well, and later make several
versions of the well plan. Your team decides to pursue one of the
spin-off versions of the well plan. You break the original plan-to-well
link, and link the well to the new version of the well plan.
You can disconnect the plan-to-well link at any time you think the
relationship is no longer needed. If you later change your mind, you
can re-establish the link, or link the well to another well plan.
To disconnect a plan-to-well link, follow these steps:
1. Display the OpenWorks Well Manager dialog box by selecting

Plans Manage As OpenWorks Well Plan to OW Well
Relationship in the Wellbore Planner main window.
The OpenWorks Well Manager dialog box appears, as shown in the
illustration below.
The OpenWorks Well Manager dialog box displays all the

preliminary wells that have been saved to the OpenWorks database
from the Write to OpenWorks dialog box, and that are linked to
well plans in the current Wellbore Planner project.
The links may have been created when you saved the wells from
plans in your well planning project, or they may be links you
disconnected and reconnected. The dialog box shows linked wells
you created either during the current Wellbore Planner work session
or during a previous, saved well planning project work session.

2. Click on a field in the row for the well you want to disconnect, then
click on the Disconnect button in the dialog boxs lower left corner.
The plan-to-well link is disconnected, and the corresponding well
no longer appears in the OpenWorks Well Manager dialog box.
Reconnecting a Plan-to-well Link

To establish a new plan-to-well link, follow these steps:
1. In the Plans list of the Wellbore Planner main window, highlight the
well plan you want to link to a well.
2. Select Plans Manage As OpenWorks Well
Reconnect Current Plan in the Wellbore Planner main window.
The Reconnect Current Plan dialog box appears, as shown in the
illustration below.
The Reconnect Current Plan dialog box is a selection and display

dialog box: it enables you to select an OpenWorks well and view
the OpenWorks database entries for your selection. The dialog box
fields are for display only you cannot directly edit the data.
The first time you display the Reconnect Current Plan dialog box,
the fields are blank. If you use the dialog box to save a reconnected
link, the next time you display the dialog box the previously
specified data is displayed.

3. Click on the List button at the top right corner.

The Available OpenWorks Wells dialog box appears, as shown in
OpenWorks wells
currently available
for linking
selection box
4. Click on the well name that you want to link to the active well plan.
The selected well name appears in the selection box at the bottom
of the dialog box.
5. Click on OK. (Or click on Cancel to exit without creating a link.)

The Available OpenWorks Wells dialog box closes, and you return
to the Reconnect Current Plan dialog box, which now displays the
data saved in the OpenWorks database for the well you selected.
The illustration below shows an example of the dialog box after a
user selected a preliminary well to reconnect.

6. Set Wellbore Planner to create the link between the specified well
and the active Wellbore Planner well plan by clicking on OK. (Or
click on Cancel to exit without saving changes.)
Wellbore Planner creates the specified plan-to-well link. You can
add or edit data for the newly linked well in Wellbore Planners
OpenWorks Well Manager dialog box.
Updating Status Information for a Relinked Well

As a newly linked well, the status for the wells position log data,
casing, completion, picks, and faults is either outdated or is not set.
Update and reset the data as follows:
Position Status The Position Status button reads Out of Date.

Make sure the calculations are up-to-date for the linked well plan, then
click on the Out of Date button. Wellbore Planner updates the data for
the well in the OpenWorks database, and replaces the Out of Date
button with a Set button.
Casing Status and Completion Status The Casing Status and

Completion Status buttons read Out of Date if the wells casing and
completion data was previously saved. If the original plan-to-well link
is restored, the original casing data appears when you re-open the
Casing Editor dialog box. You can reset the data by clicking on Apply
or OK in the Casing Editor dialog box (as described on page 182).
(If you establish a plan-to-well link that is different from the original
one, you must respecify all types of data.)
If this casing and completion information has never been saved, the
Casing Status and Completion Status buttons read Not Set (both
before and after the link interruption). Click on the Not Set button, and
use the dialog box that opens for setting casing data or completion
data.
Pick Status and Fault Status The Pick Status and Fault Status
buttons read Not Set, regardless of whether or not this information has
ever been saved. If pick or fault data was once saved and the original
plan-to-well link is restored, the Create Picks From Targets and the
Create Faults From Targets dialog boxes retain the pick or fault names,
and you can easily save the data again. Click on the Not Set button to
open the dialog box. Set and save pick data (as described on page 188)
or fault data (as described on page 192).

Adding a Well to an OpenWorks Well List

You can add a well (for example, a well you have just created from a
well plan) to an OpenWorks well list, so the well is more easily
accessible. To add a well to an OpenWorks well list, follow these
steps:
1. In the OpenWorks Command Menu palette, select Data

Management List Management Well List Manager.
The Well List Manager dialog box appears.
2. Select List Select in the Well List Manager dialog box.

The Select List dialog box appears.
3. In the Select List dialog box, highlight the destination well list, and
click on OK.
The Select List dialog box closes, and you return to the Well List
Manager dialog box. The top of the Well List Manager dialog box
now displays the wells contained in the currently selected
destination well list.
4. Select List Add Wells in the Well List Manager dialog box.
The Add to List dialog box appears.
5. In the Add to List dialog box, select the well you want to add to the
well list, then click on OK (to add the well and close the dialog
box) or on Apply (to add the well and leave the dialog box open).
The Add to List dialog box closes, and you return to the Well List
Manager dialog box, which now shows the newly added well name
at the top of the well list.
6. Select List Save in the Well List Manager dialog box.

OpenWorks saves the new version of the well list. The added well is
accessible whenever you display the well list.

Creating Hardcopy Reports and Graphics

You can create several types of files to give to drillers, drilling
engineers, or others involved in the well planning project. You can
create a variety of text-based well plan data reports, and you can
capture well plan images from five Wellbore Planner windows.
As described in the topic below, you can create data reports in table
form that describe the well plan as a series of survey points, or
describe the well plans turn points, target penetration points, or target
shapes. You can also create proximity data reports that show how
close well plan paths are to existing wells or to other well plan paths
(as described on page 208).
You can capture the well plan data you display in any of Wellbore
Planners five view windows, and save the image as a graphic file for
printing on a PostScript laser printer or for printing on a compatible
plotter. Instructions for setting up and capturing data in the Plan View,
Section View, 3D View, and Redline View windows are on page 213.
Instructions for setting up and capturing data in the Diagram Preview
window are on page 217.
Creating Data Reports for Well Plans

You use the Reports dialog box to create a hardcopy data report of
your active well plan as if it were a finished well. This report is an
ASCII file, formatted as a table. You can view and print the report, and
use it in third-party applications (for example, in your companys own
proprietary drilling software). You can create a report that includes
location data and appropriate engineering data for these types of well
path elements:
well path (or survey) points
well path turn points
target penetration points
target shapes
error ellipses
The report also identifies the report type, well name (well plan name),
surface location, and estimated kelly bushing elevation. You can save
the report as a file, or append the data to an another report file.

To create an ASCII file of well plan data, follow these steps:

1. Activate the well plan to be used for the report, by clicking on the
well plan name in the Plans list of the Wellbore Planner main
window.
The well plan is highlighted, and becomes the active well plan.
2. Display the Reports dialog box, by selecting File Reports in the

The Reports dialog box appears, as shown in the following
illustration.
3. Check the complete path to the report file you want to create, as it is
currently displayed in the Name box. If necessary, enter a new path
selection dialog box appears, which you use to locate a destination
directory and select a file name. (For more instructions about using
file selection dialog boxes, see Using a File Selection Dialog Box
on page 28.)
The first time you display the Reports dialog box, the Name box
contains the path to your home directory, and displays the default
file name report.doc. If you create a report under a new name and
location, then display the dialog box again, the Name box displays
your most recently specified path and file name.
4. Click on the Headers button, and select whether or not to include
header titles for the columns in your report. (Turn the report header
titles On or Off.)
5. Click on the Positions button, and select an item from the
drop-down list to specify how positions are defined in the report:
Absolute Record absolute positions, that is, record the x and
y grid coordinates, and the z value relative to any datum that is
set (or relative to sea level if no datum is set).

Relative to Surface Record the x and y positions relative to

the surface starting location. Record the z value as a TVD,
measured from the surface location elevation.
Both Record x, y, and z values as both absolute positions
and in their positions relative to the surface starting location.
(To compare the effect of choosing Absolute or Relative to
Surface, see the two reports illustrated on page 205.)
6. Click on the Turn Points button, and choose a report type option
from the drop-down list:
Turn Points List location data for target points and turn points
(points at which the well path starts or stops building, turning, or
dropping). For each point also include dogleg severity, build, turn,
and tool face orientation data (as illustrated on page 203).
Well Path Points List location data for points spaced at regular
intervals along the well path. For each point also include build and
turn rates (as illustrated on page 203).
Penetration Points List x, y, and z coordinates for the well plan

targets penetration points, and include a geometric description of
target shapes (as illustrated on page 205).
Target Shapes List x, y, and z coordinates for the points that

define the well plan targets shapes (as illustrated on page 206). (A
single penetration point identifies a target that is defined as a point.
A series of points identify a target that is defined as a shape.)
Error Ellipses List position uncertainty, bias, and location data

at error ellipses and at regular intervals along the well path. (The
main window Views Uncertainty option must be enabled and
the Plan View window View Control Uncertainty Ellipses must
be toggled on before you can use this option.)
7. If you choose the Well Path Points option as the report type, the
dialog box expands to display specification fields for the points you
want to include in the report, as shown below.

Set the range (Minimum Depth and Maximum Depth) and

increment (Reporting Increment) for the survey points you want
to include in the report. You can enter values from the keyboard or
use the arrow buttons to adjust values incrementally. Depth values
are expressed in feet or meters, according to the depth measurement
unit associated with the current measurement system chosen for the
OpenWorks session. The Reporting Increment is used to generate
additional reporting depths. It is applied only to curved sections of
the well path. Straight line sections are represented by the endpoints
of the line. All Turn Points are also reported.
8. Click on OK.
If you create a file with a unique name or location, Wellbore
Planner creates the report file with the specifications you have
chosen, and closes the Reports dialog box.
If you choose a file name that already exists in the specified path,
an overwrite warning dialog box appears.
Click on OK to overwrite the existing file, or click on Append to
add the new file data to the end of the existing file. Wellbore
Planner overwrites or appends the original file with the new data.

Viewing Well Plan Reports

To view an ASCII well plan report file, display the file in a text editor,
desktop publishing application, or in an xterm window. To view an
ASCII file in an xterm window, switch to the directory that contains
the file, then enter:
more <filename>
Turn Point Report

A Turn Point report is a table of location data for target points and turn
points (points at which the well path starts or stops building, turning,
or dropping). A Turn Point report also includes dogleg severity, build,
turn, and tool face orientation data for each reported point, as shown in
the illustration below. Like all of the ASCII reports, a Turn Point
report includes general information at the top: report type, well name,
and the x, y, and z coordinates for the wells surface location (easting,
northing, and estimated kelly bushing elevation).
well name (well plan name) surface location coordinates: easting (x),
northing (y), and kelly bushing elevation (z)
turn point and target location

parameters: measured depth (MD), engineering parameters: dogleg
easting (x), northing (y), subsea (z), severity (DLS), build rate, turn
azimuth, and inclination rate, and tool face orientation
target name
Survey Point (Well Path) Report

If you select the Well Path Points button in the Reports dialog box,
you set Wellbore Planner to create a Survey Point report for the active
well plan. A Survey Point report is a data table that describes the
following types of points along the well path.

a series of regularly spaced interval points along curved sections of

the well path (within the range and at the increment value you
specify)
the endpoints of straight-line sections of the well path
turnpoints (points at which the well path starts or stops building,
turning, or dropping)
The report contains location data (including azimuth and inclination
values), build, and turn data for each reported point. A Survey Point
report also includes the standard report information at the top: report
type, well name, as well as the x, y, and z coordinates for the wells
surface location (easting, northing, and estimated kelly bushing
elevation).
surface location coordinates: easting
well name (well plan name)
(x), northing (y), and kelly bushing
survey point location parameters: build rate and turn rate

measured depth (MD), easting (x),
northing (y), subsea (z), azimuth,
and inclination

Penetration Point Report

A Penetration Point report is a table of location coordinates for the
well plan targets penetration points, as shown in the two illustrations
that follow. A Penetration Point report also includes standard report
information at the top of the file: report type, well name (that is, well
plan name), as well as the location coordinates for the surface location
(easting, northing, and estimated kelly bushing elevation). The report
also includes a geometric description of each target.
The first illustration shows a Penetration Point report with the absolute
positions for the well plan Mirabelle. This well plan has one circular
target and one irregularly shaped target (defined in the Target Editor
window).
well name (well plan name) surface location coordinates: easting (x),
target name target location parameters: geometric description

easting (x), northing (y), of the target
subsea (z)
The second illustration shows a Penetration Point report with the

relative positions for the well Mirabelle.
parameters for target location
relative to the starting location

Target Shape Report

A Target Shape report is a table of x, y, and z coordinates for the points
that define the well plan targets shapes. The table lists a single
penetration point for a target that is defined as a point, and lists a series
of points to identify a target that is defined as a shape. A Target Shape
report also includes standard report information at the top of the file:
report type, well name (that is, well plan name), as well as the x, y, and
z coordinates for the surface location (easting, northing, and estimated
kelly bushing elevation). The illustration that follows shows an
example of a Target Shape report.
surface location coordinates: easting (x),

target name
target point (+) or point location parameters: easting (x),

defining a target shape (A, a) northing (y), and subsea (z)

Error Ellipses Report

An Error Ellipses report is a table of location data and uncertainty data
for error ellipsis locations by depth. An Error Ellipses report also
includes standard report information at the top of the file: report type,
well name (that is, well plan name), as well as the x, y, and z
coordinates for the surface location (easting, northing, and estimated
kelly bushing elevation). The illustration that follows shows an
example of an Error Ellipses report.
surface location coordinates: easting (x),

survey point location parameters: error ellipses parameters: highside, lateral,

measured depth (MD), inclination, vertical uncertainty and bias; magnitude of bias;
azimuth, and TVD (z) semi major uncertainty; semi minor uncertainty
and azimuth; tool used

Creating a Proximity Report

You can create a Proximity report that compares the projected path of
a well plan to other well plans, to existing wells in the OpenWorks
database, or to wells that are being drilled from your well plan. A
Proximity report can help you to:
show how close a well plan is to one or more existing wells
check how closely a well that is currently being drilled follows the
well plan
compare the relative positions of multiple Wellbore Planner project
well plans
To create a Proximity report that compares a well plan to one or more

existing wells, or compares the well plan to other well plans in the
same Wellbore Planner project, follow these steps:
1. Select the well plan you want to evaluate, if it is not already the
active plan. (To make a well plan the active plan, click on the well
plans name in the Plans list of the Wellbore Planner main window.)
The well plan name is highlighted, and information about the plan
appears in the Wellbore Planner window.
2. If you want to compare your well plan to an existing well, follow

these steps. (If you are comparing two well plans, skip to step 3.)
a. Display the OpenWorks Wells dialog box, by selecting File
OpenWorks Wells in the Wellbore Planner main window.
The OpenWorks Wells dialog box appears, as shown in the
illustration that follows. The dialog boxs Available list
comprises all the wells that are in both the current OpenWorks
project and in currently selected OpenWorks well list.

b. Select the OpenWorks well or wells you want to include in the

report, by clicking on the well name(s) in the Available list.
(Click on All to select all the wells. Click on None to clear the
current selections.)
The well or wells you selected appear in the Selected list.
c. When the Selected well list in the OpenWorks Wells dialog box
is correct, click on the Close button
Wellbore Planner is now set to display the specified well
choices in the Proximity Report dialog box. In addition, the
well or wells are added to the well planning project and can be
displayed in the Plan View and Section View windows. The
well planning project wells are also available as the basis for
planning sidetrack, complex extension, or platform wells.
3. Select Plans Proximity in the Wellbore Planner main window.

The Proximity Report dialog box appears, as shown in the
illustration below.
4. In the Name box, specify the file name and the path to the
destination directory. You can enter a new path directly from the
keyboard or click on the List button. A file selection dialog box
appears, which you use to locate a destination directory and select a
file name. (For more instructions about using file selection dialog
boxes, see Using a File Selection Dialog Box on page 28.)

The first time you open the Proximity Report dialog box, the Name
box contains the path to your home directory, and displays the
default file name proximity.rpt. If you create a report under a new
name and location, then reopen the dialog box, the Name box
displays the most recently specified path and file name.
5. In the Range boxes, set the minimum and maximum proximity

distances you want to include in the report. Range values are
expressed in feet or meters (the surface measurement units
associated with the measurement system currently specified for
your OpenWorks project). Proximity distances that fall outside the
specified range are not included in the report. You can specify range
parameters by selecting the boxes contents and entering values
from the keyboard, or by clicking on the arrow buttons to adjust
values incrementally.
When you plan a well that is close to an existing well or to another
well plan, you should carefully watch the proximity between the
two. By restricting the maximum range to a specified distance (for
example, 200 feet), you can display data for all the points on the
proposed well path that come within this distance of the
comparison well or well plan.
6. In the main list area, select the well(s) or well plan(s) that you want
to compare with the currently active well plan. To make multiple
selections, hold down the Control key as you click on names in the
list, or hold down Button 1 and drag the cursor across the names
you want to select.
The selection list contains the names of any wells you selected in
the OpenWorks Wells dialog box, and the names of the inactive
well plans in your Wellbore Planner project (the well plans you
have in addition to the one currently selected in the Wellbore
Planner main window).
7. Click on Apply (to generate the Proximity report and leave the
dialog box open) or OK (to generate the report and close the dialog
box). Click on Cancel to close the dialog box without generating
the report.
Wellbore Planner creates the Proximity report file as specified, as
shown in the example in the following topic.
After you create and examine the report, you may want to adjust your
well plan to increase the distance between the plan and a well or
between two well plans. If the Proximity report reveals a problem with
a well in progress, you may be able to make course corrections by
using a look ahead or sidetrack well plan.

Viewing a Proximity Report

To view an ASCII report file, display the file in a text editor, desktop
publishing application, or in an xterm window. To view an ASCII file
in an xterm window, switch to the directory that contains the file, then
enter:
more <filename>
The example below shows a Proximity report that measures the
proximity between a well plan and an existing well.
names of the well plan

and the existing well
compared in the report
sample points
along the planned
well path, in MD distance between sample
sample points along the points (east-to-west, north-
wellbore, in MD to-south, vertical, and total)

The report includes data on sample points set at regular intervals along
the path of the active well plan. For each sample point, Wellbore
Planner computes values for the closest matching point on the
comparison well or comparison well plan.
The report lists the following data for each sample point pair:
East Distance the east-to-west distance between sample points
(x coordinates)
North Distance the north-to-south distance between sample
points (y coordinates)
Vertical Distance the vertical distance between sample points
(z coordinates), expressed in feet or meters (according to the depth
measurement units associated with the current measurement system
for the OpenWorks session)
Total Distance the minimum (straight line) distance between
sample points
If you periodically enter survey results into the OpenWorks database
while a well is being drilled, you can create a Proximity report that
compares the actual wellbore to the planned well path.

Capturing View Window Contents as Graphic Files

You can capture images of your well plans as they appear in each of
the five Wellbore Planner view windows: the Plan View, Section
View, 3D View, Redline View, and Diagram Preview windows. You
can create a file that reflects the contents of any of these windows
either as a scalable graphic in CGM format or as a PostScript file.
You can print PostScript files you create on compatible PostScript

laser printers, or on compatible PostScript plotters. You can print
CGM-format files you create on CGM-compatible plotters. You can
use OpenWorks Hardcopy Routing utility to send CGM files to a
CGM-compatible plotter if you have set up the environment variable
for the Hardcopy Routing utility.) If you use the OpenWorks Screen
Capture utility to make screen captures of your Wellbore Planner
displays in CGM or XWD format, you can also use the Hardcopy
Routing utility to send these screen captures to your CGM-compatible
plotter.
The next topic describes how to create graphic files of the Plan View,
Section View, 3D View, and Redline View windows contents. For
instructions about creating graphic files that record the Diagram
Preview windows contents, see page 217.
Creating Graphic Files from the Contents of the Basic View Windows
You can create graphic files that capture the current contents of the
Plan View, Section View, 3D View, or Redline View windows. You
can save the graphic files in CGM format, or in PostScript format. The
tasks involved fall into two phases: setting up the window for capture,
then making specifications and saving the file.

Setting Up the View Window Display

Before you create a graphic file from the contents of the Plan View,
Section View or 3D View windows, set up the windows display
options, as described in the following steps:
1. Select the well plan you want to make active, by clicking on the
well plans name in the Plans list of the main Wellbore Planner
window.
The well plan is highlighted in the Plans list, and the well plan is
Plan View displayed in any open view windows.
Section View 2. Display the view window (if it is not already open) by clicking on
its shortcut button or selecting the corresponding menu option, as
3D View described on page 77.
Redline View 3. If you are preparing to capture the Plan View, Section View, and
3D View windows contents, you may want to make these display
specifications:
show all project Choose whether or not to restrict the targets and well plans
targets or only
the targets for displayed in the view window. Click on the appropriate
the active well shortcut button or select the appropriate menu option, as
plan
described on page 78.
show all project
well plans or Add any wells to the Wellbore Planner project that you want to
only the active
well plan
display in the window, as described on page 63.
Choose the coloring scheme for the display, as described on
page 81.
Display well position uncertainty ranges in the Plan View and
Section View windows (as described in the topic starting on
page 237).

Saving the Contents of a View Window as a Graphic File

To save the contents of a view window as a graphic file, follow these
steps:
1. Select File Hardcopy in the view window.
A hardcopy dialog box appears, similar to the example shown
below. (Each view window has a hardcopy dialog box that contains
the options and specification fields shown in the example.)
2. Select options to specify the format of the hardcopy output, the

name and destination directory of the graphic file, and the scale (in
feet or meters per inch).
Click on the Hardcopy Type button, and select an option to set
the format of the output file:
Scaled (CGM) creates a scalable graphic in Computer
Graphics Metafile format.
PostScript creates a file that you can print on most laser
printers that support PostScript output and on most PostScript-
compatible plotters.
In the Name box, specify a report name and the complete path
to the files destination directory. You can enter a new path
selection dialog box appears, which you use to locate a
destination directory and select a file name. (For more
instructions about using file selection dialog boxes, see Using
a File Selection Dialog Box on page 28.)

The first time you open the dialog box, the Name box contains
the path to your home directory, and displays a default file
name and the extension for the currently selected file format.
If you create a report under a new name and location, then
reopen the dialog box, the Name box displays your most
recently specified path and file name.
Check the scale specified in the Scale 1 = field, and change

the scale if necessary. The default value is 1000.0, which scales
the hardcopy output to 1,000 feet or meters per inch
(depending on the type of surface units associated with the
measurement system you selected for your OpenWorks
session). To change the scale, enter a value from the keyboard,
or use the arrow buttons to adjust the value incrementally.
3. Click on OK. (Or click on Close to close the dialog box without
creating the file.)
If you click on OK, Wellbore Planner creates the file according to
your specifications. (If you have set up the window display so that
the background color is reversed, Wellbore Planner automatically
changes the background back to white before saving the file.)
If you have chosen a file name that already exists in the specified
path, a verification message box appears and asks you if you want
to overwrite the original file.
To print a PostScript file on a local PostScript printer:

In an xterm window, switch to the directory you specified for the file,
then enter:
lp <filename>
The print command is sent to your default printer.

Capturing the Diagram Preview Windows Contents as a Graphic File

The Diagram Preview window displays a drillers plot of the active
well plan. You can specify options to determine the format and types
of information included in the window, and in any graphic file you
make to save the windows contents. You can also specify whether to
save an graphic file as a scaled graphic (CGM format) file, or as a
PostScript file.
Setting up the Diagram Preview Window Display

To set up the Diagram Preview window for capture as a graphic file,
follow these steps:
1. Display the Diagram Preview window (if it is not already open) by

selecting Views Well Plan Diagram in the Wellbore Planner
main window.
The Diagram Preview window appears.
2. Select View Controls in the Diagram Preview window.

The Well Plan Diagram dialog box appears, as shown in the
example below. (The example shows the drop-down menu extended
for layout format options.)

3. Select the options you want to apply to the Diagram Preview

window and any graphic file you are going to create. (The option
for hardcopy output type is described here. For information on the
other display options, see About Well Planning Projects on
page 48.)
Click on the button next to Hardcopy Type, and select the format
of the output file:
Scaled (CGM) creates a scalable graphic in Computer
Graphics Metafile format.
PostScript creates a file in PostScript format.
For information about how you can use files in these formats, see
page 213.
4. Click on Apply (to see the effect of your layout changes without
closing the Well Plan Diagram dialog box), or click on OK (to
implement your changes and close the dialog box). Click on Close
to close the dialog box without saving any changes.
Wellbore Planner implements your specifications, and uses your
Hardcopy Type specification to set the format for any graphic files
you create in the Well Plan Diagram Hardcopy dialog box.
Saving the Diagram Preview Windows Contents as a Graphic File

To save the contents of the Diagram Preview window as a graphic file,
follow these steps:
1. Select File Hardcopy in the Diagram Preview window. (For
instructions about how to display the Diagram Preview window, see
page 217.)

The Well Plan Diagram Hardcopy dialog box appears, as shown in

2. In the Selection box, specify the complete path to the destination

directory for the file you want to create. You can enter a new path
directly from the keyboard or navigate to the file and select it.
(For more instructions about using the navigation features in this
dialog box, see Using a File Selection Dialog Box on page 28.)
The first time you open the Well Plan Diagram Hardcopy dialog
box, the Selection box contains the path to your home directory,
and displays the default file name filename, with the extension that
corresponds to the hardcopy format you specified in the Well Plan
Diagram dialog box. If you create a report under a new name or in a
new location, then reopen the dialog box, the Selection box
displays your most recently specified path and file name.
3. When the full path and file name are correct in the Selection box,
click on OK. (To exit without saving changes, click Cancel.)
Wellbore Planner saves the file as specified.
Specifying the File Format for Well Plan Diagram Files
If you use the Well Plan Diagram Hardcopy dialog box to save files in CGM or
PostScript format, Wellbore Planner always uses the format you chose as the
Hardcopy Type specification in the Well Plan Diagram Hardcopy dialog box
(as described on page 218). You cannot change the file format by changing the
files extension.

Working with
Well Position Uncertainty
Overview
Directional surveys can reconstruct the position of existing wells, but

never with complete accuracy. The accuracy of survey results depends
on many factors, such as field location and conditions, the type and
quality of survey tool or series of tools1 used, the care employed in
monitoring the survey, and the expertise applied to interpreting survey
results.
All of these factors contribute to a margin of error, which can be used

to define an envelope of uncertainty around the reported position of
the wellbore. This range of well position uncertainty is the area in
which the wellbore is likely to be found. In an inclined well, there is an
increasing amount of well position uncertainty as the well gets further
from the surface (as illustrated at left).
Well position uncertainty is a familiar concept to drilling engineers,

who work routinely with anticollision calculations. You can use
Wellbore Planners Uncertainty utility to include these same
considerations in your well plans. You can calculate uncertainty data
for existing wells in your OpenWorks project, and view uncertainty
ranges as three-dimensional graphics in OpenVision, displayed with
uncertainty projections for your well plans. You can also view
uncertainty ranges and drillers targets for your well plans in Wellbore
Planners Plan View and Section View windows.
Reasons for Considering the Effects of Well Position Uncertainty

Plotting well position uncertainty helps you form a more complete
view of the well plan. You are better able to determine the risk that
one well path will collide with another, and the risk that drillers will
1. For background information about directional drilling and directional survey tool
types, see the Appendix: Appendix: Directional Drilling beginning on page 369.
R2003.12 Working with Well Position Uncertainty 220

miss targets. You gain greater insight into events that may occur
during drilling. For example, suppose drillers do not hit the target at
the location specified in your well plan. Since you have not taken well
position uncertainty into account, your first reaction is that you
misread the geological conditions. This assumption leads the team to
consider abandoning the well, when only a slight readjustment is
needed to reach the target.
Quick Overview of Uncertainty Tasks

The topics in this section describe how to generate and view
uncertainty data, and how to customize the survey tools used for
uncertainty projections. The topics explain how to perform these tasks:
Select a default survey tool Select the survey tool Wellbore
Planner uses for calculating uncertainty ranges for well plans and
for wells with unspecified survey tools (page 224).
Calculate uncertainty data for single wells View and
customize the survey histories of individual wells that have already
been drilled, and calculate uncertainty data based on the wells
custom survey histories (page 226).
Calculate uncertainty data for multiple wells Run quick
uncertainty calculations for groups of existing wells (page 234).
These quick calculations expedite display of the wells uncertainty
ranges. This function also enables you to update all the wells
uncertainty data after you redefine survey tool parameters.
View uncertainty projections for well plans in
Wellbore Planner Set up Wellbore Planner to display
uncertainty information in the Plan View and Section View
windows (page 237).
View uncertainty projections for wells and well plans in
OpenVision Display uncertainty ranges as three-dimensional
graphics in OpenVision (page 241).
Examine survey tool definitions Learn about survey tools and
the factors that affect their reliability (page 252).
Save custom survey tool set files Save the current custom
survey tool set as a data file (if you are in charge of customizing the
project tool set), so you can restore it at a future time or use it in
other projects (page 266).
Switch between survey tool sets Retrieve the standard tool set
after making unwanted customizations (if you are authorized to
perform tool set management tasks); also, switch to a previously
saved custom tool set (page 268).

Uncertainty Workflow
This workflow is an example of steps you might take after you have
developed a well plan, and are ready to consider how well position
uncertainty affects the well plan. This workflow is only a guide to
show how uncertainty tasks can interrelate: your workflow may not
include all the steps or follow this exact order.
Select a default survey tool the tool Wellbore Planner will use as
a basis for calculating uncertainty ranges for your well plans and for
existing wells that have no identified survey tool (page 224).
Enable uncertainty display, and in the Plan View and Section View
windows, look at the uncertainty projections and drillers targets for
your well plans (page 237).
To expedite a full uncertainty visualization session, run calculations

for existing project wells in the Multiple Wells dialog box
(page 234).
Set up an integrated work session with OpenVision (page 287). Use

the uncertainty visualization function to view uncertainty ranges for
well plans and for wells with calculated uncertainty data
(page 241).
To make your uncertainty data more accurate, use the Single Well
dialog box to customize wells survey histories and update
uncertainty calculations (page 226). View the results in
OpenVision.
If you are the designated survey tool set developer for your project
team, customize the survey tool set (page 258). Save the custom
tool set as a data file (page 266). View the changed uncertainty
displays in the Wellbore Planner Plan View and Section View
windows (page 237).
continued

Update well uncertainty calculations to reflect the new tool error margins,
from within the Multiple Wells dialog box (page 235). View the changed
uncertainty displays in OpenVision.
Adjust the targets in your well plan (if necessary) to avoid problems you
discovered while working with uncertainty. Save the changes.
Calculating Well Position Uncertainty
To view uncertainty ranges for your project wells, you must first run
uncertainty calculations. Wellbore Planner bases uncertainty
calculations on the available well survey data.
When you launch Wellbore Planner in an OpenWorks environment,

Wellbore Planner has access to the directional well survey data in the
OpenWorks database. This data includes measured depth, inclination,
and azimuth readings for the survey points, as well as survey names.
The database contains no information about the tools used to conduct
surveys, until you specify this information and save it to the database.
Assigning Survey Tools

When calculating uncertainty for an existing well, Wellbore Planner
uses error margins that come from the survey tool used for the wells
survey (or surveys). Each survey tool has its own error tolerances, so
different survey tool choices result in different uncertainty ranges.
You can specify the tool used for well surveys in two ways:
For single wells Display the wells survey history in the Single
Well dialog box, and choose a tool for each survey. This hard-codes
the tool information in the OpenWorks database, so it can be
overridden only by making new selections in the Single Well dialog
box. This type of tool choice is described on page 226.
For groups of wells Run first-time uncertainty calculations on
one or more wells in the Multiple Wells dialog box. In this case
Wellbore Planner uses the current default tool (as specified in the
Tools dialog box) for all the selected wells (that is, the selected
wells that have no hard-coded survey tool specification). For
information on this task, see Working with Uncertainty
Calculations for Multiple Wells on page 234.

Selecting a Default Survey Tool

Wellbore Planner uses the default survey tool for calculating
uncertainty data for wells whose surveys have no identified survey
tool. The default survey tool also determines the uncertainty ranges
displayed for well plans in OpenVision and in the Wellbore Planner
Plan View and Section View windows.
When you first begin using uncertainty calculations in your Wellbore

Planner project, the default survey tool is Good Gyro (a good
gyroscopic tool with a relatively low margin of error). You can select a
new survey tool as the default tool at any time. If you run first-time
uncertainty calculations in the Multiple Wells dialog box, you may
want to change the default tool before each batch of calculations (so
that the appropriate uncertainty range is calculated for each group of
wells).
To select a new default survey tool:

1. Display the Uncertainty utility Tools dialog box by selecting Tools
from the Uncertainty Utilitys File menu. (For more information on
this step, see page 253.)
The Tools dialog box opens, and displays a list of survey tools. The
current default tool is marked with an asterisk (*).
2. Click on a tool name in the list to select it.

The dialog box displays information about the selected tool. (For
more information about the information in the Tools dialog box, see
the topics beginning on page 254.)
3. Click on the Default button to select it. The button is highlighted.

4. Click on the Add/Update button (to save the information without

closing the Tools dialog box) or the OK button (to save the
information and close the Tools dialog box).
The new default survey tool is marked with an asterisk (*) in the
Tools list. Wellbore Planner uses this survey tool for these
purposes:
as the default tool assigned when you first display a wells
surveys in the Single Well dialog box
as the basis for uncertainty calculations you run in the Multiple
Well dialog box
as the basis for plotting the well plan uncertainty ranges you
can display in OpenVision or in Wellbore Planners Plan View
and Section View windows
Keeping Records on Default Survey Tool Changes
You may change which survey tool is selected as the default tool several times in
the life cycle of your well planning project. It may be helpful for you to keep track
of the changes you make. Wellbore Planner does not keep a record of which survey
tool was used for all tasks, such as calculating uncertainty data for wells in the
Multiple Wells dialog box or for calculating uncertainty data for well paths (for
display in OpenVision or in Wellbore Planners Plan View and Section View
windows). If you assign and save survey tool information in the Single Well dialog
box, however, you can review which survey tool Wellbore Planner used for each
well survey.

Working with Survey Histories and

Uncertainty Calculations for Single Wells
You can use the Single Well dialog box to customize the survey
history for any available well in the current OpenWorks project. You
can calculate uncertainty data based on your changes, and save the
changes in the OpenWorks database. Changes that you save from the
Single Well dialog box override any selections you may make later in
the Multiple Wells dialog box.
Displaying a Single Wells Survey History and Uncertainty Data

To display a single wells survey history and calculate uncertainty data
based on that survey history, begin by displaying the Single Well
dialog box.
Displaying the Single Well Dialog Box

To display the Single Well dialog box, follow these steps:
1. Display the Uncertainty utility, if it is not already open, by selecting

Tools Uncertainty from the main Wellbore Planner window.
2. If you use dual monitors, a message prompts you to choose a

monitor for displaying the Uncertainty window. Click in one of
your monitor screens to select it.
The Uncertainty Utility window opens.
3. Select File Calculations Single Well (as shown above).

The Single Well dialog box opens and displays a well selection list,
Displaying a Wells Survey History

Click on one of the well names in the Single Well dialog box to select
it. (The list contains names of all the wells in the currently selected
OpenWorks project well list that have directional surveys recorded in
the OpenWorks database. You may need to use the scroll bar to find a
particular well.)
The dialog box extends and displays the survey history for the selected
well, as shown below.
Each row in the Survey History table represents a well survey. The
OpenVision database may originally contain only a single survey log,
but this log often combines the findings of several surveys. For

example, drillers may use one survey tool to chart the wellbore
location for the straight hole portion of the well, then surveyors may
use a series of more sophisticated survey tools for the inclined portions
of the well. If you have information about the component surveys
encompassed by the original survey log, you may want to add surveys
to the wells history, and recreate the original survey set.
The Survey History table displays the following types of information
for each survey:
Start Depth The measured depth (MD) at which the survey
starts. Measured depth is depth along the wellbore, measured either
from the kelly bushing or from a user-defined elevation.
Survey The survey name. By default this field displays the
survey name stored in the OpenWorks database.
Tool The type of survey tool used, which is the basis for
calculating uncertainty ranges. The directional survey log in the
OpenWorks database does not contain survey tool information until
you specify a tool and save the information. The first time you run
uncertainty calculations for a well, the tool field displays the default
survey tool.
You can edit surveys in the Survey History table or add new surveys.
(For more information, see page 231.)
Calculating and Displaying Uncertainty Data for the Well

To calculate the selected wells uncertainty data, click on the
Calculate button in the Single Well dialog box. The Definitive Survey
spreadsheet appears in the dialog box, as shown in the example that
follows. The definitive survey contains information from the entire
survey history: it displays the original location readings for each
survey point and the calculated uncertainty data.

Each survey point is assigned a number at the left of the spreadsheet.

The first three columns contain the original survey readings:
Depth the measured depth (drilled depth) of the wellbore
Inclination the angle between a vertical plane and the well axis
Azimuth the angle between the vertical plane tangent to the well
axis and the vertical plane that passes through grid north
From this input data, Wellbore Planner calculates the survey points
location, and displays location coordinates in columns 4 through 6:
TrueVertDepth true vertical depth of the survey point
XOffset the x offset relative to the wells starting position
YOffset the y offset relative to the wells starting position

The last eight columns display uncertainty projections for the survey
point. These data defines the area of uncertainty (the area in which the
survey point is likely to be located) in terms of an orthogonal ellipse
(and ellipsoid) and a horizontal ellipse (and ellipsoid). In both cases,
the ellipse is a two-dimensional representation of the error surface,
defined by the ellipses major and minor axes, along with a minor axis
rotation factor. The ellipsoid is a three-dimensional model of the error
surface, defined by adding a depth factor to the ellipse. The illustration
below shows an orthogonal ellipse (on the left) and orthogonal
ellipsoid (on the right).
high side of
the well
reported position along hole
of the wellbore depth error
minor axis
minor axis
major axis
major axis
The orthogonal ellipse (and ellipsoid) is very nearly perpendicular to

the wellbore. The defining values of the orthogonal ellipse and
ellipsoid are:
OrthMajor major axis of the orthogonal ellipse (the diameter of
the ellipse across its widest dimension)
OrthMinor minor axis of the orthogonal ellipse (the diameter of
the ellipse diameter across its narrowest dimension)
OrthRotate angle of rotation between the minor axis of the
orthogonal ellipse and the wells high side
AlongHole Along Hole Depth (AHD) error (added to the
orthogonal ellipse, completes the definition of the orthogonal
ellipsoid.)
The horizontal ellipse (and ellipsoid) is parallel with sea level. The
component values are:
HorzMajor major axis of the horizontal ellipse
HorzMinor minor axis of the horizontal ellipse
HorzRotate angle of rotation between the minor axis of the
horizontal ellipse and grid north
DepthErr vertical depth error (added to the horizontal ellipse,
completes the definition of the horizontal ellipsoid)

Customizing a Single Wells Survey History
You can customize a wells survey history in several ways:

Identify the tool used for a survey, to replace the default tool
assigned.
Adjust a surveys starting depth.
Choose a new survey name from a list of available names.
Add or remove surveys from the survey history.
Changing Survey Specifications

You can make changes in any of the Survey History table fields:
Start Depth You can edit this field by clicking on it with Button
1, then entering new values for the MD. Single-click to select the
entire field, or double-click to position your cursor within the field.
Survey By default this field displays the survey name stored in

the OpenWorks database. You can change the survey name by
clicking on this field with Button 3, then selecting a name from the
drop-down list. The list shows all of the wells survey names
currently stored in the database, and one additional identifier
DEFINITIVE. You typically use the DEFINITIVE identifier only
for surveys you add in Wellbore Planner.
Tool The tool used for making the survey, which serves as the
basis for uncertainty calculations. The first time you run uncertainty
calculations for a well, the tool field displays the current default
survey tool, as specified in the Tools dialog box (page 224). If the
default survey tool changes, the tool name that appears in this field
changes, until you save tool information to the OpenWorks
database. (You can save a wells tool specification by making
selections in the Single Well dialog box or by calculating
uncertainty data in the Multiple Wells dialog box.) For more
information about survey tools that you can define and select, see
the tool topics beginning on page 251.
Using Tools Based on Different Error Model Types
If you assign different survey tools to the surveys of an individual well, use tools of
a similar error model type. For any particular well, use tools based either on the
systematic error model or on the cone (or inclination cone) of error models. Using
tools of mixed error model types causes the range of uncertainty to fluctuate and
give an unrealistic view of the uncertainty range at some points along the wellbore.

Adding and Deleting Surveys

You can change a wells survey history by adding or deleting surveys,
and by assigning different survey tools to the surveys listed in the
survey history.
Adding New Survey Lines to the Survey History

To add lines to the survey history, use one of these methods:
Insert Click on one of the survey history fields (to activate the
row), then click on Insert. A new survey appears above the active
survey, with default name and tool and starting depth values.
Append Click on Append to add a new survey below all the
current entries. A new survey appears at the bottom of the Survey
History table, with default name and tool and starting depth values.
You can edit each of the survey fields (as described on page 231).
Deleting Surveys
To delete a survey, click on (or tab to) one of the survey fields in the
survey row you want to remove, then click on Delete.
The survey is removed from the survey history. If you want to add a
new survey, click on Append.

Recalculating Survey Data

You can recalculate the data in the definitive survey at any time by
clicking on the Calculate button. In addition, Wellbore Planner
recalculates the definitive survey data whenever you display a wells
survey history in the Single Well dialog box, then click on Apply or
OK. You may want to recalculate in these circumstances:
You changed the survey tool tolerances in the Tools dialog box
since you last calculated the uncertainty data for the well. The
definitive survey still shows uncertainty data that pertains to the old
tool definition. (You can also update uncertainty data in the
Multiple Wells dialog box, as described on page 226.)
You changed the wells survey history, and want to see the effect on
the definitive survey before saving your changes to the database.
You can click on the Calculate button, view the results, and decide
whether to save the changes, make more changes, or revert to the
original survey data.
Saving Changes
If you want to preserve changes you make in the Single Well dialog
box, save the changes to the OpenWorks database by clicking on one
of these buttons:
Apply calculates data for the current definitive survey and saves
the new information to the OpenWorks database (without closing
the Single Well dialog box)
OK calculates data for the current definitive survey, saves the
new information to the database, and closes the Single Well dialog
box
Discarding Changes
If you want to discard changes you have made in the Single Well
dialog box, use one of these methods:
Cancel closes the Single Well dialog box without saving
changes
Select another well to display displays the newly selected well
data, without saving any changes to the OpenWorks database

Working with Uncertainty Calculations for Multiple Wells

You can calculate uncertainty data for any number of specified wells
simultaneously in the Multiple Wells dialog box. You may want to use
the Multiple Wells dialog box to run uncertainty calculations during
preliminary stages of planning if you have no information about the
project wells survey tools or if you have no time to work on the well
surveys individually. These quick calculations enable you to go
straight to a graphical display of uncertainty data. When you get better
information about individual well surveys, you may want to customize
survey histories in the Single Well dialog box (as described on
page 226).
The Multiple Wells dialog box is also a quick way to update

previously calculated uncertainty data after you edit survey tool
parameters. If you have customized a wells survey history in the
Single Well dialog box, this type of update will not override your
saved customized data.
How Survey Tools Are Chosen for Uncertainty Calculations

When calculating uncertainty for an existing well, Wellbore Planner
uses error margins that come from the survey tool used for the wells
survey (or surveys). As discussed on page 223, the OpenWorks
database does not include any survey tool identification data until you
specify a survey tool by running uncertainty calculations.
When you calculate uncertainty data in the Multiple Wells dialog box,
Wellbore Planner uses the current default survey tool as the survey
tool for the wells you select. (The default survey tool is the one
currently selected in the Tools dialog box. To find out how to check on
or change the default survey tool, see page 224.)
In effect, whenever you calculate uncertainty data, you identify a

survey tool as the one used for conducting the wells surveys, and add
or possibly update the tool identification data stored in the OpenWorks
database. If you calculate uncertainty data in the Multiple Wells dialog
box, the resulting tool selection goes into the database as soft data. The
soft tool data applies to each of the selected wells until you overwrite
for each well, in either of the following ways:

Overwrite the soft tool data with new soft tool data by selecting a
new default tool in the Tools dialog box, then selecting the well
again in the Multiple Wells dialog box.
Overwrite the tool data with hard-coded tool data you specify in the
Single Well dialog box. Once you save hard-coded tool data, the
only way you can overwrite the data for that well is to make and
save new tool specifications in the Single Well dialog box.
Making Multiple Well Uncertainty Calculations

To make uncertainty data calculations for multiple wells
simultaneously, follow these steps:
1. Start the Uncertainty utility, if it is not already running, by selecting

Tools Uncertainty from the main Wellbore Planner window. If
you use dual monitors, choose one of the monitors when prompted.
The Uncertainty Utility window appears and the utility starts
running. (The utility continues to run as long as the Uncertainty
Utility window is open.)
2. Change the survey tool selected as the default tool, if necessary.

(For more information about this step, see page 224.)
3. Display the Multiple Wells dialog box:
In the Uncertainty Utility window, select File Calculations
Multiple Wells. The Multiple Wells dialog box opens and displays
a well selection list, like the one shown in the following illustration.

The list of available wells comprises all the wells in the currently
selected OpenWorks project well list that have directional surveys
recorded in the OpenWorks database. (The well name format is the
one you chose at the startup of the current Wellbore Planner
session.)
4. Select the wells for which you want to calculate uncertainty data.
Select wells by clicking
an individual well name Highlighting shows that the well is
selected.
the All button All the wells in the list are selected.
Clear selections by clicking
an individual highlighted well name The selection is
cleared.
the None button All the current selections are cleared.
The first time you open the Multiple Wells dialog box in a Wellbore
Planner session, no wells are selected. If you make selections, then
reopen the Multiple Wells dialog box, your most recent selections
are still highlighted.
5. Click Apply (to run calculations without closing the dialog box) or
OK (to run calculations and close the dialog box).
Wellbore Planner makes the uncertainty calculations. The
calculations for surveys that have no tool information recorded in
the database are based on the current default tool (as specified in the
Tools dialog box). The resulting uncertainty calculations are saved
in the OpenWorks database, and are available to display graphically
in OpenVision.

Visualizing Well Position Uncertainty
You have a variety of options for visualizing the uncertainty ranges for
wells and well plans. Your viewing options fall into two basic
categories:
2D Views Display well plan uncertainty ranges and drillers

targets in Wellbore Planners Plan View and Section View
windows, as described in the next topic.
3D Views Display uncertainty ranges for both well plans and
existing wells in OpenVision or StratWorks 3D, as described on
page 241.
Capturing Images and Creating Reports That Include

Uncertainty Ranges
For information about creating image and print files of your Wellbore Planner Plan
View and Section View window displays, see page 203. For information about
capturing images in OpenVision, see the OpenVision User Manual. For information
about creating a report that describes the proximity of a well plan to an existing well
or to another well plan, see page 208.
Viewing Uncertainty Ranges in Wellbore Planner Views

You can view two-dimensional projections of uncertainty ranges and
drillers targets as you develop well plans in Wellbore Planner. You
can set Wellbore Planner to display well plan uncertainty projections
in the Plan View and Section View windows.

Enabling Wellbore Planner to Display Uncertainty Projections

To view uncertainty projections in Wellbore Planner, you must first
enable Wellbore Planner uncertainty display. (When you start a
Wellbore Planner session, uncertainty is not enabled.) You then make
changes (if you like) to the display options in the Plan View and
Section View windows.
To set Wellbore Planner uncertainty status to Enabled:

1. Select Views Uncertainty Enable in the Wellbore Planner
main window.
Wellbore Planner enables the Plan View and Section View windows
to display well plan uncertainty projections. The Enabled option
appears on the Views menu next to a highlighted box. (The
highlighted box shows that the option is active.) The Enabled
option remains active until you clear the selection (by clicking on
Disable) or until you end the current Wellbore Planner session.
2. To see the uncertainty ranges for currently displayed well plans,
open the Plan View window, the Section View window, or both:
In the Wellbore Planner main window, select Views Plan and
Views Section. The Plan View and Section View windows open,
and display outlines for uncertainty ranges for all the well plans
displayed. (You may have to zoom in to see the uncertainty ranges.)

Wellbore Planner calculates the uncertainty range based on the

error margins defined for the current default survey tool. (For
information about selecting a new default survey tool, see
page 224.)
Note that Wellbore Planner displays uncertainty ranges only for
well plans with up-to-date calculations. For example, if you change
a target in your well plan, and the Calculations button is set to
Manual, click on the Calculate button (shown at left) to
recalculate the well path. Once the well path calculations are up-to-
date, Wellbore Planner can display the well paths uncertainty
projections.
3. You may want to specify which types of well plans and targets
appear in the Plan View and Section View windows. The viewing
options are set by default to display all targets in the OpenWorks
project, and all well plans in the well planning project. For
information about setting restrictions on the targets and well plans
displayed, see page 79.
4. You may want to adjust the uncertainty view options, as described

in the following topic.
Selecting View Window Options for Uncertainty Display

When you enable uncertainty for Wellbore Planner, special options are
added to the dialog boxes for controlling view options in the Plan
View and Section View windows. (To display these dialog boxes,
select Controls from the View menu of either the Plan View or the
Section View window. The Plan View Controls or Section View
Controls dialog box appears.) The additional viewing options for
uncertainty display are shown at left.
Uncertainty Ellipses Displays the uncertainty ranges at interval
points along the well path as ellipse perimeters. In the Plan View
window, the ellipses shown are horizontal (parallel with sea level). In
the Section View window, the ellipses are normal (approximately
perpendicular to the well path).
Uncertainty Outlines Displays the uncertainty range all along the
well path as an outline. This option is selected by default.
Drillers Targets Enables display of drillers targets for the active
well plan. A drillers target is the area the driller has to hit in order to
stay within the well plans range of uncertainty. (Drillers targets are
easier to see in the Plan View window.)
The illustration that follows shows an example of all three types of
uncertainty display. Notice how the drillers targets diminish in size in

proportion to the increase of well position uncertainty. The size of the

drillers target corresponds to the size of the geological target, less the
uncertainty range calculated for that target. If you display drillers
targets and move targets in your well plan, you see how the target
location affects the difficulty of hitting the drillers target.
The illustration below shows part of a well plan named sidetrack in a
close-up view of the Plan View window display area. The Plan View
window viewing options are set to display all three uncertainty
viewing options ellipses, outlines, and drillers targets.
geological target T-2

(outer circle)
drillers target
(inner area)
Drillers targets are visible for targets under these conditions:

The targets are part of the active well plan (that is, the well plan
name is highlighted in the Plans list of the Wellbore Planner
window).
The geological target is displayed as a shape (not as a point).
(For information about selecting the targets shape, see page 120.)
Uncertainty is enabled in Wellbore Planner (as described on
page 238), and the Drillers Targets option is selected in the Plan
View Controls dialog box (as described on page 239).
The uncertainty range is not so large in proportion to the geological
target that it completely eliminates the drillers target. (Wellbore
Planner calculates the size of the drillers target by subtracting the
area of uncertainty from the area of the geological target. If the
uncertainty area is equal to or greater than the geological target
area, the drillers target is effectively eliminated.)

Viewing Uncertainty Ranges for Wells and Well Plans in OpenVision or

StratWorks 3D
You can use OpenVision or StratWorks 3D in an integrated session
with Wellbore Planner to view three-dimensional graphic displays of
your well plan uncertainty ranges. You can also add existing wells
uncertainty ranges to your OpenVision or StratWorks 3D three-
dimensional display.
To set up an OpenVision or StratWorks 3D/ Wellbore Planner
uncertainty visualization session, you perform these basic tasks.
1. Run uncertainty computations for the wells whose uncertainty
ranges you want to view. (You can see well plan uncertainty
projections without running computations.) For information about
running quick calculations for multiple wells, see page 234. For
information about running calculations for individual wells, see
page 226.
2. Set up an OpenVision or StratWorks 3D/ Wellbore Planner

session:
a. Launch the two applications, in either order. To launch
OpenVision, select Applications OpenVision from the
OpenWorks Command Menu. Be sure to select the appropriate
domain for your session in the OpenVision Launcher dialog
box. (See the instructions for launching OpenVision beginning
on page 288.). To launch StratWorks 3D, select Applications
StratWorks and from the StratWorks menu select
Interpret StratWorks 3D and select the appropriate
domain.
b. If you selected the Time or Mixed domain in the OpenVision
or StratWorks 3D Launcher dialog box, make sure the Time/
Depth Server utility is running to handle data conversions
between Wellbore Planner and time-domain elements
displayed in OpenVision or StratWorks 3D. To open the Time/
Depth Server window, select Tools Time/Depth Server in
the Wellbore Planner main window. Specify a conversion
model and leave the Time/Depth Server running throughout
your session. For more information and full instructions, see
page 156. (If you selected the Depth domain, skip this task.)
c. Establish an interface between Wellbore Planner and
OpenVision or StratWorks 3D by selecting Tools Add
Wellbore Planner Interface to OpenVision in the Wellbore
Planner main window. Set the domain, datum, and well plan

display options in the Well Planning Options dialog box. (See

the instructions beginning on page 291.)
4. Open the Uncertainty Utility and the Visualization dialog box.

Select the wells to display, and set uncertainty visualization
options, as described in the following topic.
For tips on viewing uncertainty on OpenVision or StratWorks 3D, see

page 302.
How the PD Setting and the Calculations Setting

in Wellbore Planner Affect Your OpenVision or StratWorks 3D
Visualization Session
PD setting As long as the Uncertainty utility is open, the utility sends any
changes you make in Wellbore Planner data to the OpenVision or StratWorks 3D
Viewer window. The Uncertainty utility sends updates regardless of whether the
Pointing Dispatcher (PD button) in Wellbore Planner is set to Automatic or
Manual. If you want to prevent this automatic update, close the Uncertainty utility
(by selecting File Exit in the Uncertainty utility window).
Calculations setting For the most part, calculation settings work in the usual
way in an OpenVision or StratWorks 3D visualization session. (That is, well plan
changes are either automatically or manually recalculated and sent to OpenVision
or StratWorks 3D, depending on the setting for the Calculations button.) The only
exception to this rule is that changes to a platform location appear automatically in
OpenVision or StratWorks 3D, even when the Calculations button is set to
Manual.
Displaying the Visualization Dialog Box

To display the Visualization dialog box:
1. Display the Uncertainty Utility window, if it is not already open, by
selecting Tools Uncertainty Utility in the Wellbore Planner
main window. If you use dual monitors, choose one of the monitors
when prompted.
The Uncertainty Utility window appears, as shown in the
illustration below.

2. Select File Visualization.

The Visualization dialog box appears, as shown in the example
below. (The dialog box options are described in the next topic.)
list of available wells
list of well elements to display

(Select only one
of these options.)
element display formats

(Select any number
of these options.)
element specification fields
(The fields displayed
are specific to the
selected well element.)
general display specifications

(including any datum to be
incorporated)

Choosing Wells and Options for OpenVision and StratWorks 3D Uncertainty

Display
You use the Visualization dialog box to choose display options for the
Wellbore Planner uncertainty ranges that appear in the OpenVision or
StratWorks 3D Viewer windows. You can build the OpenVision or
StratWorks 3D display by applying new specifications, or you can
clear the existing display to see only the effects of the current
specifications.
Wells Choose one or more wells from the list (or choose to
display no wells).
Well Elements Choose one type of element to display. The type
of element you choose determines the possible formats displayed at
the right.
Element Display Formats Choose as many display formats as
you like. The well element appears in all the chosen formats. You
must choose at least one format, or you will not see any results in
the OpenVision or StratWorks 3D Viewer windows.
Element Specifications Make any needed specifications for the
selected well element (such as which picks to display, or the range
and frequency of interval points). The dialog box displays the
specification fields or lists that correspond to the selected well
element.
General Display Specifications Near the bottom of the dialog
box are specifications that apply to the display as a whole. For
information about each option, see page 249.
Choosing Wells to Display in OpenVision or StratWorks 3D

To display uncertainty ranges for existing wells, select one or more
well names from the list at the top of the Visualization dialog box. The
list contains names of all the wells in the currently selected
OpenWorks project well list that have directional surveys recorded in
the OpenWorks database. (Click on All to select all the wells. Click on
None to clear all selections. To clear an individual selection, click on
it.)
When you click on Apply or OK, the 3D Viewer window will display
the selected wells uncertainty ranges. (To add well positions to the
display, select the Draw Position Log option.) If you are running the
Uncertainty utility (and have started the interface between Wellbore
Planner and OpenVision or StratWorks 3D), you will also see your
well plans and their uncertainty ranges displayed.

To display uncertainty ranges for your well plans only, make sure
no wells are selected in the well list, and make sure the Uncertainty
utility is running in interfaced mode. (For more information about
running the Uncertainty utility in interfaced mode, see page 291.)
When you click on Apply or OK, the 3D Viewer window will display
only your well plans.
Choosing and Specifying Well Elements

You can choose only one type of element to display. A list of display
formats appears to the right of the element list, which corresponds to
the formats applicable to the current selection. If any specifications are
needed for the type of element, specification fields or lists appear
below the element list. Descriptions follow for the elements types and
their corresponding specifications. For descriptions of the display
formats, see page 248.
Display Interval Points Option

This option displays uncertainty at interval points along the well or
well plan. If you select the Display Interval Points option, the
Visualization dialog box displays the set of options shown below.
Make any needed changes to the default specifications for the

Minimum Depth, Maximum Depth, and Depth Increment for the
section of well to be displayed in uncertainty ranges. To change the
value in a field, select the contents of the field and enter new values
from the keyboard, or use the arrow buttons to adjust the values
incrementally.

Display Picks Option

This option displays uncertainty at specified pick locations along
existing wells. If you select the Display Picks option, the
Visualization dialog box displays a set of options like the ones shown
below.
Choose the picks or fault picks you want to display from the list. If no
names appear in the list, make sure you have selected at least one well.
If there are still no names in the list, no one in your project team has
defined any picks for the current OpenWorks project.
You can select names individually or choose all of them with the All
button. Clear all the current choices by clicking on None. Clear
individual choices by clicking on the selected name in the list.
The 3D Viewer window displays the specified picks or fault picks that
fall along your selected wells. Picks appear in the colors originally
assigned when they were defined in the Stratworks application.
Display Fault Picks Option

This option displays uncertainty at specified fault pick locations along
existing wells. The Display Fault Picks option operates in an almost
identical manner to the Display Picks option, except that the Pick
Capsule format for displaying uncertainty ranges is not available. For
more information, see the topic before this one, Display Picks
Option.

Display Arbitrary Depth Option

This option displays uncertainty at a specified depth along the
wellbore or planned well path. If you select the Display Arbitrary
Depth option, the Visualization dialog box displays the set of options
shown below.
Depth Specify the depth for the point along the wellbore or planned
well path to be displayed as an uncertainty projection. To change the
depth value, select the contents of the field and enter a new number
from the keyboard, or use the arrow buttons to adjust the value
incrementally.
Display Bottom Hole Location Option

This option displays the uncertainty projection at the bottom of the
well hole. If you select the Display Bottom Hole Location option, the
Visualization dialog box displays the set of options shown below.
You do not make any additional specifications for the bottom hole
location. The bottom hole uncertainty range appears in the formats you
select. If your OpenVision or StratWorks 3D display includes a large
area, you may have to zoom in to see the bottom hole uncertainty area.
To help locate the center of interest, select the Draw Position Log
option. This causes OpenVision or StratWorks 3D to display a yellow
line that marks the wells position as reported by the survey log.

Choosing Element Display Formats

The list of display formats reflects the formats available for the
currently selected well element. You can choose as many display
formats as you like, but if you do not choose at least one, no
uncertainty display will result. Each display format you select affects
how the survey points are rendered. The available shapes are described
below:
Normal Ellipse a disc-shaped area of uncertainty, defined by
plotting inclination and azimuth error along a plane that is very
nearly perpendicular to the wellbore (an orthogonal ellipse)
for more information about the data used to construct ellipses and
ellipsoids, see page 230.
Normal Ellipsoid an area of uncertainty that is approximately
spherical, defined by adding along-hole depth error to a normal
ellipse
Horizontal Ellipse a disc-shaped area of uncertainty, defined by
plotting inclination and azimuth error along a horizontal plane
Horizontal Ellipsoid an area of uncertainty that is
approximately spherical, defined by adding true vertical depth error
to a horizontal ellipse (typically occupies about the same area as a
normal ellipsoid)
Normal Cone an area of uncertainty for a series of survey
points, rendered as a cone by connecting the outside perimeters of
the survey points normal ellipses depending on the survey tool
used for calculating the uncertainty, a wells uncertainty cone may
flare as it descends, or it resemble a tube that varies in width
according to inclination. (For a well plan, the cone is a tube of
uniform width.)
Horizontal Cone an area of uncertainty for a series of survey
points, rendered as a cone by connecting the outside perimeters of
the survey points horizontal ellipses (also see Normal Cone)
Pick Capsule an area of uncertainty shaped like a medicine
capsule, created by combining the area of well position uncertainty
with the area of pick uncertainty the area of pick uncertainty is
tube-like, and reflects the measured depth error specified by the
picks original interpreter. An orthogonal ellipsoid (defined by well
position uncertainty) extrudes from each end of the tube.

Choosing General Display Specifications

Near the bottom of the Visualization dialog box are specifications like
the ones in the illustration below. These options apply to the display as
a whole.
Transparency Move the slider bar to adjust the transparency of

the newly specified display elements. At minimum transparency,
the new elements are opaque. At maximum transparency, the new
elements are invisible.
Clear Display This option controls whether to start a new

display or add to the present one. If you clear the Clear Display
option, the wells that are already displayed will remain on the
screen, and newly specified wells will be added. (New
specifications replace any earlier specifications for the same wells.)
Click to toggle between selecting and clearing the option. The box
next to the option is highlighted when the option is selected.
Draw Position Log Select this option to add the wellbore

position (shown as a yellow line) to the display of the selected
wells. (The position log shows the position of the wellbore as
reported by the survey logs.) Clear the option to display only
uncertainty data for the selected wells. This option does not affect
well plans. Well plans always display a planned well path as long
as the OpenVision or StratWorks 3D/ Wellbore Planner interface is
running.
Click to toggle between selecting and clearing the option. The box
next to the option is highlighted when the option is selected.

Depth and Time The domain for z coordinates. Choose the

domain you want to use to display your well plan data in
OpenVision.
Choose Depth if you are displaying only depth-domain data in
OpenVision for example, if you are only viewing
uncertainty ranges, or you are editing targets by using geologic
data, but not seismic data.
Choose Time if you want to match your well plans to time-
domain data originated in an application such as SeisWorks. If
you choose the time domain, the Time/Depth Server dialog box
appears. Select a conversion model, and leave the Time/Depth
Server running throughout your session. The Time/Depth
Server converts well plan changes from your session back to the
depth domain (page 157).
Datum If you choose an existing well that uses a datum for the
survey coordinates, make sure the datum is correct. (This field is
grayed out if you choose Depth option for displaying z coordinate
values.)
Applying Visualization Changes

When your specifications in the Visualization dialog box are complete,
apply them by clicking on Apply or OK. (If you click on Apply the
dialog box does not close, if you click on OK, it closes.)
To close the dialog box without applying the current changes, click on
Cancel.
For more information about setting up the OpenVision or StratWorks
3D display, see these topics:
Adding the Wellbore Planner Interface to OpenVision on
page 291
Adding Project Data from Other Applications on page 295
Tips for Working in the OpenVision 3D Window on page 302.
Ending the Visualization Session

To end the OpenVision or StratWorks 3D uncertainty visualization
session, close the Uncertainty utility: Select File Exit in the
Uncertainty utility window.

Working with Survey Tools

Survey tool definitions affect the amount of uncertainty projected
for well plans and existing wells. When your project team first
begins to work with well position uncertainty, Wellbore Planner
displays a standard tool set either the default survey tool set or a
company-defined tool set that your administrator has installed.
Wellbore Planners default tool set contains four basic tool types.
These standard tools use the systematic error model and mathematical
formulas developed by Wolff and de Wardt.2 Your project team may
want to use this tool set as a starting point, and create new tools for
your project or customize the error tolerances for the standard tools.
Your survey crew may be working with new directional survey
instruments that have error coefficient values that vary from the
standard definitions.
The tool set has a project-wide scope. That is, any changes you make
to the tool set affect everyone working on the OpenWorks project.
Before anyone on the team customizes the tool set, you should make
some group decisions. Designate the person who will research survey
tool parameters and make any needed customizations to the tool set,
and designate the person who will be responsible for tool set
administration tasks.
It is possible to create new survey tool set files and switch between
tool sets at will. (You can retrieve the standard tool set by reimporting
its data file.) If you do not handle data file creation tasks carefully,
however, you can accidentally overwrite the standard tool set file so it
cannot be retrieved. When you work with multiple tool set files, you
can also cause confusion in your team about which tool set is currently
in use and which file was used before a switch.
If you customize the tool set, keep in mind that the changes you make
are not automatically preserved in any data file. You must take special
measures to export the custom tool set as a file if you want to reload
that tool set in the future.
2. The default tool values are based on research by C.J.M. Wolff and J.P.
de Wardt, the originators of the systematic error approach. This research
is described in the SPE paper 9223, first published in the Journal of
Petroleum Technology in December 1981.

Overview of Tools Dialog Box Functions

The Uncertainty utilitys Tools dialog box enables you to perform
these main tasks:
Examine the error tolerances set for the standard survey tool set (as
described in the next topic).
Assign the default survey tool the tool Wellbore Planner uses to
calculate uncertainty data on the fly for well plans and for selected
wells that have no identified survey tool. (For instructions about
setting the default survey tool, see page 224.)
Customize survey tool error models, and create new survey tools
based on tool manufacturer or surveyor-specific error data. (For
information about customizing the survey tool set, see page 258.)
You can also use the Tools dialog box to perform survey tool
management tasks:
Export the current survey tool set as a data file, so that custom
survey tool sets can be reloaded at any time and used in other
projects (as described on page 266).
Import the standard survey tool data file, to restore the tool set after
unwanted customizations (as described on page 268).
Overwrite the standard survey tool data file, in order to permanently
replace it. (It is best to start by making a backup file in another
location. Develop the custom tool set, export it as a data file, then
import the new data file.)

Displaying the Tools Dialog Box

To display the Uncertainty utilitys Tools dialog box, follow these
steps:
1. Display the Uncertainty utility, if it is not already open. (For more
information about this step, see page 226.)
2. Select File Tools from the Uncertainty Utility window.
The Tools dialog box appears, as shown in the illustration below.
list of available survey tools
error model
for the
selected tool
error
tolerances
At the top of the dialog box is a list of available survey tools. Click on
a name in the list to display information about the tool:
Name Name of the currently selected tool. This is an editable

field. To create a new tool, enter a unique name here.
Description Short description of the currently selected tool.
This is an editable field. If you create a new tool, use the
Description field to record any important information that helps
identify the tool.

Default Indicates whether the selected tool is the current

default tool. (The default tool is also identified in the tool list by
an asterisk *.) To set the current selection as the default tool,
click on the Default box, then click on Apply. The Default box
is highlighted, and the new default tool has an asterisk next to it
in the tool list.
Error Model and Tolerance Area

The area below the Description field lists the models for error
computation (on the left) and tolerance information (on the right).
Each type of tool uses a specific error model (system for computing
uncertainty data). The error model for the currently selected tool is
highlighted, and error tolerance information is displayed in a format
appropriate for the model type.
Error Cone Produces a cone of error around the wellbore
that expands at a constant rate (as described in the next topic).
Systematic Error Produces an error range that is the
cumulative result of several factors that affect the tool (as
Inclination Cone of Error Produces a cone of error that
expands at an inclination-dependent rate (as described on
page 256).
Understanding the Error Models

An error model is a statistical model for computing uncertainty data.
Error models use tool-specific error coefficients in mathematical
formulas to produce the uncertainty range at each survey point. Each
survey tool has an error model and one or more coefficient values that
are expected to yield the most accurate results for the tool.
Error Cone Model

The error cone model builds a cone of error around the wellbore. The
shape of the cone is based on one coefficient the rate at which the
cone expands per 1,000 feet of measured depth. The error cone model
is empirical: it is based on field observations or tests.

Systematic Error Model

The systematic error model is based on specific, quantified internal
and external factors that influence survey tool error. This error model
is described as systematic because the factors are predictable, and
repeat in a consistent manner throughout the survey. This approach is
fundamentally different from older conventional error models based on
random error. Random error tends to cancel itself out over a series of
readings, which can lead to serious error underestimation.
The systematic error model defines error margins for six factors (or
error coefficients) that systematically affect survey tools. Systematic
error is cumulative: error values are computed from each coefficient
and are added together to produce the overall error margin.
Wellbore Planners default values for the systematic error model and
the mathematical formulas it uses are based on error tolerance research
and mathematical formulas developed by Wolff and de Wardt. The
mathematical formulas are industry standard, but some new directional
survey instruments may have error coefficient values that vary from
the default standards.
The error coefficients are:
Relative Depth Error Error in the measurement of along hole

depth, expressed as a quantity of feet or meters per 1,000 (feet or
meters) of measured depth. Relative depth error affects both
vertical and horizontal position of survey points along an inclined
well. In pipe-run tools, relative depth error results from drillstring
stretch and from using approximate measurements to tally pipe and
casing joints. In cable-run tools, relative depth error results from
wireline measurement errors, such as wheel slippage, friction of the
tool in the hole, or the effects of tide and heave (in an offshore
well).
Misalignment Error Error of inclination and azimuth reading
that results from instrument tolerances, from a survey tool with a
misaligned axis (which can result from wireline pull), or from a tool
that is not centered in the borehole (which can result from gravity
unequally compressing the centralizers).

True Inclination Error Error of inclination reading that acts

purely in the vertical plane. This type of error can occur in highly
inclined borehole sections as a result of weight -induced effects on
the pipe running gear.
Compass Reference Error Error in referencing north. In a
magnetic survey, compass reference error is the magnetic
declination (the discrepancy between true north and magnetic
north). The margin used for magnetic declination is an average of
values that fluctuate relative to the time and geographical position
of the reading. In a gyroscopic survey in which the reference point
is fixed by topographical means, orientation is more accurate, and
the error margin is smaller.
Drillstring Magnetization Compass error (error of the
magnetic azimuth reading) caused by drillstring magnetization.
This type of error is restricted to magnetic surveys, and is affected
by borehole direction increasing at higher inclinations and with
east-to-west azimuth orientation.
Gyrocompass Azimuth Error in gimballed gyroscopic azimuth
readings caused by gyro drift. Gyro drift is the angle over which the
gyroscope changes its orientation over the course of a survey.
Corrections are made for the expected amount of drift (known as
calculated drift). Gyrocompass azimuth error corresponds to the
amount of observed drift that exceeds the calculated drift. This type
of error increases exponentially at higher inclinations.
Inclination Cone of Error Model

The inclination cone of error model builds a tubular cone of error
around the wellbore that varies in width according to the inclination at
each survey point. The error factor for each survey point comes from a
table that specifies an error rate to use at each of several inclination
ranges. The higher the inclination at the survey point, the higher the
uncertainty range.

Choosing Between Good and Poor Tools

The Wellbore Planner default tool set consists of the Wolff and de
Wardt good and poor versions of both magnetic and gyroscopic tools.
The good tools reflect the smallest possible error values the error
values encountered when the best equipment and procedures are used.
Poor tool values correspond to worst-case conditions.
Good Gyro tool figures are based not only on the most accurate
equipment, but also on closely supervised instrument operation and
survey-data interpretation. Good Mag tool figures apply when the
survey is conducted with a properly selected length of nonmagnetic
drill collar and with optimum spacing of a well-calibrated compass. If
a high quality tool is used, but supervision is lax, poor tools will give a
more accurate picture of error values. If low quality tools are used with
careful procedures, error values may be much improved.
Selecting a Default Survey Tool

Wellbore Planner uses the default survey tool for these purposes:
as the default tool assigned when you first display a wells
surveys in the Single Well dialog box
as the basis for uncertainty calculations you run in the Multiple
Well dialog box
as the basis for plotting the well plan uncertainty ranges you
can display in OpenVision or in Wellbore Planners Plan View
and Section View windows
To select a new default survey tool, follow these steps:

1. Display the Uncertainty utility Tools dialog box, by selecting Tools
from the Uncertainty Utilitys File menu.
The Tools dialog box opens, and displays a list of survey tools. The
current default tool is marked with an asterisk (*).
2. In the Tools dialog box, click on a tool name in the list to select it.
3. Click on the Default button to select it. The button is highlighted.
4. Click on the Add/Update button (to save the information without
closing the Tools dialog box) or the OK button (to save the
information and close the Tools dialog box).
The new default survey tool is marked with an asterisk (*) in the
Tools list.

Customizing the Survey Tool Set

Survey tools in Wellbore Planner represent survey tools as they are
used in the field, so your team may decide to adjust tool error
tolerances or add custom tools that correspond to
the different survey tools your survey contractors use

field conditions (for example, when error factors are affected by
field location)
elements in the survey process the surveyors precautions,
procedures, monitoring, and interpretation techniques
conservative error tolerances that you want to use for planning
purposes for example, if you have older wells in your well
planning project that were surveyed with unknown tools and
techniques
Each survey tool has an error model type and a set of coefficient
values that define the tools error model. Appropriate tool error models
are usually determined by survey contractors, who have the most
complete knowledge of field conditions, survey procedures, as well as
feedback about actual and reported well positions.
If you cannot get information directly from the survey contractor, you
can use the survey tool information available on the Internet. Sperry
Sun, SDC, and Halliburton in particular make this type of information
available. In some cases, well operators may decide what error model
to use for a tool. In this case, operators typically base their
recommendations on some form of testing or specialized statistics.
Understanding the Scope of the Survey Tool Set
Survey tool sets have a project-wide scope. This means that changes you make to
the tool set affect everyone working on the OpenWorks project. For more
information, read the introduction to working with tools on page 251. Before you
undertake any tool set management tasks, check with your team leader and read the
topics on tool management starting on page 266.

Using Survey Tools That Are Based on Different Error Model Types
If you create survey tools to be assigned to the surveys of an individual well, make
sure the tools are based on a similar error model type. (For any particular well, you
should use tools based either on the systematic error model or on the cone (or
inclination cone) of error models. These two approaches to error measurement track
different types of error. Switching between the error model types along a single
wellbore causes the range of uncertainty to fluctuate and give an unrealistic view of
the uncertainty range at some points along the wellbore.
Creating Survey Tools

To create a survey tool in the Tools dialog box, follow these steps:
1. Choose an error model type. The Tools dialog box displays

appropriate fields for one or more error coefficients used in the
selected model type.
2. Specify error coefficient values. (The types of error coefficients for

each error model type are described in the next topic.)
3. Give the tool a unique name. (Names are case-sensitive.) If you

save changes under a tool name that already exists, you edit the data
for the original tool.
4. Optionally, enter a description for the tool. (Include any

information that will help identify the tool, such as the tool
manufacturers model name, distinguishing error values, the
surveyor using the tool, or the well field.)
5. Optionally, specify the new tool as the default tool, by clicking the
Default button. (Wellbore Planner uses the default tool when
computing uncertainty for well plans and for wells with unspecified
surveys.)
6. Save the new tool to the OpenWorks database by clicking on the

Add/Update button. To cancel the changes you have made to the
currently selected tool, click on Close or display another tool in the
list without first clicking on Add/Update.

Specifying Error Coefficient Values

Choose an error model type by clicking on its name or button. The
Tools dialog box displays appropriate error coefficient fields for the
selected model type. The error model type and coefficient values
define the tools error model.
Error Cone
A single field appears, which specifies uncertainty error relative to
along hole depth. Enter the rate at which you want the cone to expand
per 1,000 feet of measured depth. You can click on the arrow buttons
to decrease or increase the rate incrementally, or click inside the field
and enter a value from the keyboard.
Systematic Error
Enter values for the six error coefficients.
(For information about sources for coefficient values, see page 251.
For more complete descriptions of the coefficients, see page 255.)
Relative Depth Error error relative to along hole depth, caused

by drillstring stretch and by using approximate lengths to measure
drillstring elements
Misalignment Error inclination and azimuth error caused by

tools being off-axis or out-of-center in the borehole
True Inclination Error inclination error caused by inclination-

dependent factors, such as weight-induced effects on the pipe
running gear
Compass Reference Error error in referencing north, which is

either the magnetic declination (if a magnetic compass is used) or
an error in fixing a surface reference point (if the reference is
established topographically)
Drillstring Magnetization azimuth error involved in magnetic

compass readings (caused by drillstring magnetization, and
sensitive to borehole direction and inclination)
Gyrocompass Azimuth inclination and azimuth error from

gimballed gyroscope readings (the uncalculated amount of gyro
drift, which increases exponentially at higher inclinations)

You can click on the arrow buttons to decrease or increase rates

incrementally, or click inside a field and enter a value from the
keyboard.
Table For complex instruments, you may want to specify

inclination and azimuth error according to the survey points
inclination. The illustration below shows an example of an
Inclination Azimuth Error table specified for a systematic error
model.
If you create an Inclination Azimuth Error table, its error

coefficients substitute for the coefficients specified for the True
Inclination Error, Drillstring Magnetization, and Gyrocompass
Azimuth coefficients.
Follow these steps to create an Inclination Azimuth Error table:
1. Select the Table button. The dialog box displays an empty

Inclination Azimuth Error table.
2. Click on Append. A row is added to the blank table. Enter
values for the fields in the row:
Click on the Inclination field to activate it, and enter a value
for the survey points inclination.
Click on (or tab to) the Azimuth Error field, and enter a
value for the azimuth error expected at the specified survey
point inclination.
Click on (or tab to) the Inclination Error field, and enter a
value for the inclination error expected at the specified
survey point inclination.

3. Create as many more rows as you need, by clicking on a field

to activate the row, then clicking Insert (for a row above the
active row) or Append (for a row at the bottom of the table).
You can create a number of rows, then enter values for the
fields in any order.
To delete a row, activate a row by clicking on a field in the row,
then click on Delete.
To interpolate calculations, click on Interpolate. By default, error

values are discrete. In the example table shown on page 261, using
discrete values means that all the survey points at inclinations
between 10.00 and 29.99 are assigned an azimuth error value of
1.000. If the computations are interpolated, survey points at
intermediate inclinations are calculated as intermediate values.
When the table is complete, return to steps 3 through 6 on

page 259: Name and describe the tool, choose whether to make it
the default tool, and save your changes.
Inclination Cone of Error

The inclination cone of error model produces a conical error range
with a radius that varies not only by depth, but also by inclination. A
table in the Tools dialog box defines the error rate for survey points at
each specified inclination. The illustration below shows an example of
an Inclination Cone of Error table.

Follow these steps to insert a new Inclination Cone of Error table:
1. Click on Append. A row is added to the blank table. Enter values

for the fields in the row:
Click on the Inclination field to activate it, and enter a value
for the survey points inclination.
Click on (or tab to) the Error/1000 field, and enter a value for
the amount of measured depth error (in feet or meters)
expected per 1,000 (feet or meters).
2. Create as many more rows as you need, by clicking on a field to

activate the row, then clicking Insert (to add a row above the active
row) or Append (to add a row at the bottom of the table).
To delete a row, click on a field in the row, then click on Delete.
To interpolate calculations, click on Interpolate. By default, error

values are discrete. In the example table shown on page 262, using
discrete values means that all the survey points at inclinations
between 10.00 and 19.99 are assigned an MD error value of 0.250
(feet or meters) per 1,000 (feet or meters). If the computations are
interpolated, survey points at intermediate inclinations are
calculated as intermediate values.
3. When the table is complete, click on Add/Update. The new tool is

saved to the database. The new tool appears in the Tools dialog box
tools list and in pop-up menus in the Single Well dialog box.
Editing Survey Tool Information

To edit a survey tools information, make any needed changes to the
tool fields (except for the Name field), and click on the Add/Update
button. (If you change the tools name, a new tool is created.) For
more information about the error model types, error coefficients, and
other tool fields see the topic just before this one, Creating Survey
Tools beginning on page 259.
For more information about the way your tool set modifications are
saved, and the project-wide effects of making tool set changes, see
page 269. For information about saving tool set modifications in a
data file, see page 266.

Deleting a Tool from the Survey Tool Set

To delete a survey tool from the tool set, click on the unwanted tools
name in the list at the top of the Tools dialog box, and click on the
Delete button. A confirmation message box appears. Click on OK to
carry out the delete operation. The changes are saved to the
OpenWorks buffer, and the tool is no longer available to the well
planning project team.
Importing Survey Tools from the COMPASS Application

You can import individual survey tools that were defined in the
COMPASS Application for the PC, and use these tools in your well
planning project. Each COMPASS tool is defined in a specially
formatted ASCII file. When you import a tool definition file, you add
the tool to the current OpenWorks projects survey tool set. Changes to
the project tool set are saved to the OpenWorks database. (The
additional tools are not saved in the core survey tool data file unless
the project administrator decides to redefine this data file.)
You use the Import Tool From Compass dialog box to find, select, and
import the file you need.
Displaying the Import Tool From Compass Dialog Box

To display the Import Tool From Compass dialog box, select File
Survey Tools Import Survey Tool from Compass in the
Uncertainty Utility window. The Import Tool From Compass dialog
box appears. The illustration below shows a COMPASS file selected
and ready to be imported.

The first time you open the Import Tool From Compass dialog box, it
displays the contents of (and path to) your home directory, and is set to
filter out any files from display in the Files box that do not have a .tex
extension. (COMPASS directional survey files have a .tex extension.)
The Import Tool From Compass dialog box is a standard file
navigation and selection dialog box.
Importing a COMPASS Tool Definition File

The basic steps to import a tool definition file are:
1. Specify a complete path and file name in the Selection box, by
using either of these methods:
Enter a text string directly in the Selection box, or
Navigate to the directory (by clicking on a series of choices in
the Directories list to select them), then click on the file you
need in the Files list to select it.
To move up in the directory structure, click on the Directories
list selection that ends in /...
To display a filtered list of files in the current directory, click on
the Filter button. To display all files with a .tex extension,
make sure the path in the Filter box ends with **.tex.
2. When the complete path and file name are correctly displayed in the
Selection box, click on OK.
The selected COMPASS file is imported into the OpenWorks
project survey tool set. The new tool appears in the Tools dialog
box and in any pop-up tool menus you display in the Single Well
dialog box.

Managing Project and Company Survey Tool Sets

The tasks described in this topic typically are performed by a senior
administrator or someone designated for the task by the Wellbore
Planner project team leader. These tasks can affect the operation of
Wellbore Planner on a project-wide or even company-wide basis.
Exporting the Current Tool Set as a Data File

When you or anyone on your project team opens the Tools dialog box
and makes changes to survey tool definitions, the new tool definitions
are saved to the OpenWorks database, but not to the core survey tool
data file (described on page 268). For example, if you import survey
tools from the COMPASS application, the additions to the tool set are
recorded only in the OpenWorks database.
You can export your projects current survey tool set as a data file (an
ASCII file in a specific data format). This data file can then be
distributed throughout the company, and be imported for use in other
projects and Wellbore Planner installations. Your project team
manager or a senior administrator typically chooses someone to
develop any custom tool sets that are needed, and chooses who will
make any updates to the company-defined tool set.
Displaying the Export Tool Set Dialog Box

To display the Export Tool Set dialog box, follow these steps:
1. Display the Uncertainty utility, if it is not already open. (For more

2. Select File Survey Tools Export Tool Set in the Uncertainty

Utility window.

The Export Tool Set dialog box opens, as shown below.
The first time you open the Export Tool Set dialog box, it displays
the contents of (and path to) the Wellbore Planner home dat
directory, and is set to name the new file SurveyToolsNew.dat.
Creating a Survey Tool Set Data File

To export a survey tool set, follow these steps:
1. In the Selection box, specify the path that Wellbore Planner will
use to find the new survey tool data file. You can click inside the
Selection box and enter the path from the keyboard, or you can
build the path by navigating to the appropriate directory.
To navigate to a new directory:
Enter the path to the directory in the Filter box. To display all
data files only (but no other files), make sure the Filter path
ends with /*.dat. When the Filter path is set, click on the Filter
button (or press Enter).

To display the directory immediately above the current one:

In the Directories list, click on the directory path that ends
with /.., then click on Filter (or press Enter).
The Filter box displays the new path, and the Files list shows
an updated list of files.
2. Specify a file name. You can do this in any of these ways:

Accept the default name SurveyToolsNew.dat.
Click inside the Selection box and enter a name.
Select a file name in the Files list by clicking on it.
Use the .dat extension with the file name.
Be careful when you assign the file name. If you save the current
tool set under the same file name and location as the currently used
tool set data file, you overwrite the original tool set.
click on OK.
4. If you have chosen the name and location of an existing file, a
verification message box appears and asks if you want to overwrite
the existing file. To continue with the operation, click on OK.
The file is saved to the selected directory. You can now import the
data file to use its definitions as the project tool set (as described on
page 266.)
To exit without saving changes, click Cancel.
Importing a New Survey Tool Set

If you are the Wellbore Planner project administrator (or are acting on
behalf of the project administrator), you use the Import Tool Set dialog
box to make company-issued updates to the standard survey tool set.
You can also use the Import Tool Set dialog box to restore the
standard survey tool set for the well planning project team after
making unwanted customizations. If you use this dialog box to import
a data file, the survey tool set is replaced for everyone on the team.
You cannot retrieve tool settings you overwrite, unless you first export
the tool set as a data file, then reimport it.

When to Update the Standard Survey Tool Set

To illustrate a situation that requires an update to the default tool set,
suppose your project team starts using Wellbore Planner. A team
member enables uncertainty display in one of the Wellbore Planner
sessions, and Wellbore Planner starts reading the tool set data file.
Halfway through the project, your company issues a new standard tool
set data file, which is to be used on a company-wide basis. An
administrator opens the Import Tool Set dialog box, and imports the
new tool set data file. The new tool set is now in effect for everyone on
the Wellbore Planner team.
Understanding How Survey Tool Definitions Are Stored

If your Wellbore Planner installation has not been customized, the
definitions for the core survey tool set are contained in a file
named SurveyTools.dat (located in the dat directory of your
Wellbore Planner home path). This data file has an OpenWorks
project-wide scope. That is, your well planning project team uses
the default tool set data file (either the original data file or an
edited version of the original data file), or your team uses a
custom tool set data file that your administrator has imported into
your Wellbore Planner project.
Locating the Default Survey Tool Data File
By default, the core survey tool data file (SurveyTools.dat), is located in the dat
directory of your Wellbore Planner home path.
When you or anyone on your project team opens the Tools dialog box
and makes changes to survey tool definitions, the new tool definitions
are saved to a buffer in the OpenWorks database, and affect everyone
working on your project team. The buffered changes, however, are not
saved in the survey tool data file. If you make additional changes to
tool definitions, the new changes are saved to the buffer, and replace
any previous modifications. To preserve a particular set of survey tool
definitions, you must export the new tool set information as a data file.
You can then import the new survey tool data file into your well
planning project, and make it the standard tool set for your Wellbore
Planner project.

If you overwrite the original SurveyTools.dat file when you export the
current tool set definitions, the new definitions in the file affect all
future Wellbore Planner projects. For this reason, only a designated
administrator should work with survey tools data files. You should
never overwrite the original core survey tool data file unless you are
sure you will never again want to use or examine the error margins in
the original tool set.
Displaying the Import Tool Set Dialog Box

To display the Import Tool Set dialog box, follow these steps:
1. Display the Uncertainty utility if it is not already open. (For more
2. Select File Survey Tools Import Tool Set in the Uncertainty

Utility window.
The Import Tool Set dialog box opens, as shown below.
The first time you open the Import Tool Set dialog box, it displays
the contents of (and path to) the Wellbore Planner home dat
directory, and is set to select the default survey tool set definition
file (SurveyTools.dat).

Importing a Survey Tool Set for Use in Your Well Planning Project
To import a data file that defines a new survey tool set, follow these
steps:
1. In the Selection box, specify the path that Wellbore Planner will
use to find the new survey tool data file. You can click inside the
Selection box and enter the path from the keyboard, or you can
build the path by navigating to the appropriate directory.
To navigate to a new directory:
Enter the path to the directory in the Filter box. To display all
data files only (but no other files), make sure the Filter path
ends with /*.dat. When the Filter path is set, click on the Filter
button (or press Enter).
To display the directory immediately above the current one:

In the Directories list, click on the directory path that ends
with /.., then click on Filter (or press Enter).
The Filter box displays the new path, and the Files list shows
an updated list of files.
2. Select the survey tool data file you need, in either of these ways:
Select a file name in the Files list by clicking on it.
Click inside the Selection box and enter a name.
click on OK. (To exit without saving changes, click Cancel.)
A verification box appears, asking you to verify that you want to
replace the current survey tool set definitions. Click on OK to
proceed (or Cancel to exit making any changes to the current tool
set).
If you click on OK in the verification box, Wellbore Planner

initializes the selected survey tool set. The tools defined in the new
file appear in the Tools dialog box and in the Single Well dialog box
pop-up tool menus.

Integrating with EarthCube
Overview
EarthCube communicates directly with Wellbore Planner, which

allows you to view the targets and well path simultaneously in both
applications. EarthCube has a graphic display window with a set of
options to control aspects of target and well plan behavior.
This section describes a workflow and provides instructions for editing

and saving well plans in EarthCube.
R2003.12 Integrating with EarthCube 272

EarthCube / Wellbore Planner Workflow
Overview
You can use EarthCube to pick targets that are based on data that you
display in an EarthCube three-dimensional presentation. You can then
use Wellbore Planner to apply a variety of engineering parameters to
the well plan that results from your target picks, and to calculate a well
path that incorporates the specified engineering values.
This topic provides a workflow for using EarthCube and Wellbore
Planner in an integrated work session to create targets and well plans.
This topic also describes how to edit your well plan and save the
results in either EarthCube or Wellbore Planner.
calculated
well plan
calculated and wellbore

wellbore plans plan
Display After Calculating the Well Path
Picking Targets in EarthCube

In EarthCube, you enter a new target by positioning the cursor over a displayed
object and clicking MB1. Pickable objects include:
horizons
faults
seismic data (sections, cube faces, opacity clouds)
gOcad surfaces
well boreholes
The following objects are not pickable:

RAVE points
well curves
well tops
Getting Additional Information About EarthCube

For additional information about using EarthCube, refer to the EarthCube user
documentation.

This workflow suggests just one approach for using Wellbore Planner
with EarthCube. As you become more familiar with these applications,
you may adapt this workflow to better suit your own needs.
Launch EarthCube and Wellbore Planner.
Display pickable data in EarthCube. This is the data you will use
to create targets for the well plan.
In Wellbore Planners main window,

select Tools Time/Depth Server.
Select a velocity model in Wellbore Planners

Time/Depth Server window.
Specify a surface location or kickoff point in Wellbore Planner.
Create targets in EarthCube.
Calculate the well path in Wellbore Planner.

(Check the results, modify the well plan,
and recalculate as desired.)
Save the well plan to the OpenWorks database.

Creating Well Plans in EarthCube

To set up an EarthCube display and create a new well plan:
1. Select EarthCube from the OpenWorks Command Menu.
2. When the EarthCube Project Selection dialog box appears, click on

a project name to select it, then click on the Open Project button.
select project
3. If you are using dual monitors, you are prompted to select the
screen on which you want to display EarthCube.
Typically, you place EarthCube on the left screen and Wellbore

Planner on the right. The left screen is usually faster and more
responsive due to differences in internal graphics cards.
The EarthCube graphic display window appears on the designated

screen.

Menu Bar
Graphic
Display Area
Wellbore Planner button
Status Line
4. Select File Open Session from the EarthCube menu bar to

display existing data, which you will use to pick targets for the
well plan.

5. Select View Setup to display the EarthCube Setup dialog box.

Toggle on the object button for each data type you want to display,
if it is not already on.
Object buttons
6. Display pickable data as indicated in the following note:
7. Click on the buttons located across the top of the Setup box to set
any additional display parameters.
For example, if you wish to pick targets in EarthCube for display in
Wellbore Planner, click on the Wells button. When the Wells
parameters appear, toggle on the WellPlans and the Targets
buttons. When you select these buttons, additional options appear.
Set them as desired.

1. Click on
Wells button.
2. Toggle on an
object button.
3. Set the object
parameters as
desired.
8. Click on Apply to accept the current parameter settings and go on

to setup another object. Click on OK to accept the current
parameter settings and close the Setup dialog box.
9. In EarthCube, click on the Wellbore Planner button ( ) to put

EarthCube in the well planning mode.
10. Press Button 3 and select New Plan from the Well Planning menu.
11. When the Create Well Plan dialog box appears, type a name for the
new well plan in the text field provided, and click on OK.
The new well plan is broadcast to Wellbore Planner. The well plan
name appears above the spreadsheet and in the Plans column of the
Wellbore Planner main window. The well plan is now part of the
active Wellbore Planner project file.

Creating Targets in EarthCube

You can pick (digitize) targets from within EarthCube. EarthCube
transmits the coordinates of the targets to the Time/Depth Server
utility. The utility uses the currently selected velocity model to convert
the z values from time to depth, then relays the targets to Wellbore
Planner.
Time/Depth Server EarthCube
Time Depth Well A
0.00 0.00
561.04 200.00
1177.22 400.00
1872.78 600.00
PD data Well A
2602.88 800.00 transmission
3408.70 1000.00
4266.90 1200.00
5069.40 1400.00
5947.28 1600.00
6867.27 1800.00
7753.60 2000.00
8525.77 2200.00
9300.84 2400.00
15501.40 4000.00
Working with Time-domain Values in EarthCube and Wellbore Planner
In order for Wellbore Planner to receive targets you create in EarthCube during an
integrated time-domain session, Wellbore Planners Time/Depth Server utility
must be running, and must have a velocity model set. Most EarthCube sessions
display time data, so you typically must run the Time/Depth Server utility.
However, depth data can be displayed in EarthCube (with some discrepancies in the
z annotation). If you are displaying depth data, you should select the No
Conversion option.

EarthCube, the Time/Depth Server utility, and Wellbore Planner

exchange target data through OpenWorks pointing dispatcher (PD),
a background process that transmits messages to listening applications.
Creating Unassigned Targets
Targets are automatically assigned to the active well plan in Wellbore Planner. To
create unassigned (floating) targets that you can use in multiple well plans, close the
active well plan before selecting any targets.
Pick targets with the well planning mode enabled in EarthCube.
1. In EarthCube display window, press Button 3 and when the popup

menu appears, select Target.
2. Move the cursor to the location where you want to place the first
target. When you can see the cursor coordinates displayed in
EarthCubes lower message bar, press Button 1.
The target name is broadcast to Wellbore Planner and displays in

the Selected list of the main window.
target created
in EarthCube.
3. Repeat step 2 until you have picked all of the targets that you want
included in the well plan.

Each new target is connected to the previous target by a dotted line

representing the digitized well plan. (Once you have selected all
of your targets, specified their order, and specified additional
engineering parameters, you can calculate the computed well
plan.)
Wellbore Plan
EarthCube Display after Picking Targets for the Well Plan
This line shows a sequence of targets picked in EarthCube. It does

not yet incorporate engineering parameters that can be set in
Wellbore Planner (such as the kickoff point, hold angle, entry angle,
etc.).
Check Target Order
Presumably, you selected targets in the correct order. They are broadcast and listed
in Wellbore Planner in the same order. You can re-order the targets if you wish.
Refer to Selecting and Sorting Well Plan Targets on page 115 for directions.
Calculating the Well Plan

Define the target penetration point, desired dog leg severity, surface
location (or sidetrack point), kick-off point (i.e. beginning of well
deviation) and elevation. If you want Wellbore Planner to calculate the
surface location or kick-off point for you, set the button in the Surface
Location area to Show Hold Angle.
Dog Leg Severity (DLS) is a measure of the overall sharpness of any
given bend in the well. A low DLS indicates a gentler bend, a high
number indicates a sharper bend. The algorithms in Wellbore Planner
use the desired Dog Leg Severity iteratively in the calculation; if the
targets cannot be reached with the desired DLS, it increments up and
tries a slightly higher one until the target can be reached. Drilling
Engineers can provide common acceptable DLS numbers for a given
area.

Commonly, a well is extended beyond its last target to provide room

for completion equipment, cement, etc. (i.e. rathole). Wellbore Planner
will extend the well by the Extend value, using the last directional
data.
If the Calculations mode is set to Manual, press the Calculate button.
The results are shown in the spreadsheet in Wellbore Planners main
window. The well path itself is shown graphically in EarthCube and in
any of Wellbore Planners viewing windows that are open. If any of
the above parameters are changed, recalculate the well plan.
Optionally, the Calculations mode can be set to Automatic, and any
change in the parameters will trigger recalculation.
Editing the Well Path

Once you have calculated a well path, you can modify it in Wellbore
Planner or in EarthCube and then recalculate the path. The new path
displays simultaneously in both applications.
Editing the Well Path in Wellbore Planner

In Wellbore Planner, you can make the following modifications:
change the target order (page 279)
change the Method, Dogleg Severity, and Sort settings (page 144)
move the targets graphically in the Plan View or Section View
windows (page 128)
extend the well path with the Extend option (page 144.)
modify target angles or penetration points by selecting Plans
Snap Targets (page 136)
Editing the Well Path in EarthCube

In EarthCube, you can edit target positions by dragging or deleting
them. Press Button 3 and select Edit from the Well Planning popup
menu.
To move a target, position the cursor on the target and when the
cursor assumes the shape of a four-headed arrow ( ), press
Button 1 and drag the target to a new position.
To delete a target, position the cursor on the target and when the
cursor assumes the shape of a four-headed arrow ( ), press
Button 2.

Saving the Well Plan
Saving the Well Plan in Wellbore Planner

To save the well plan with all its data and targets in Wellbore Planner,
move to the main window and click on the Save button or select the
Plans Save or Save As option. When you save the well plan, the
Wellbore Planner project file that contains the well plan is also saved.
You can also save all the well plans and targets in the current Wellbore
Planner project file by selecting File Save or File Save As in the
Saving the Well Plan in EarthCube

To save the well plan with the current display and display parameters,
select File Save Session or Save Session As.
Saving the Well Plan to the OpenWorks Database

If you want the well plan (or plans) to be available to all OpenWorks
applications, follow the instructions in Saving a Well Plan to the
OpenWorks Database as a Well on page 332.
To save a Wellbore Planner well plan in a format that other
applications can read, see Exporting Well Plans and Projects on
page 170.

Integrating with OpenVision and

StratWorks 3D
Overview
Landmarks OpenVision application is a 3D visualization tool that

enables you to display geoscience and engineering data from many
sources in correct geometric position in space. StratWorks 3D is
another Landmark application containing a subset of the OpenVision
functionality. This chapter specifically details how to use OpenVision
with Wellbore Planner. StratWorks 3D can be used with Wellbore
planner in a very similar manner.
You can use OpenVision to view, edit, and save changes to well plans
that you originally created in Wellbore Planner. (You cannot create
well plans in OpenVision.) You can import data, such as existing well
data from the OpenWorks database, and you can import data generated
in other applications (for example, SeisWorks, Stratamodel, gOcad,
ProMAX, or Z-MAP). You can use this imported data to pick digitized
targets and add them to well plans in Wellbore Planner. You can also
use OpenVision and Wellbore Planner interactively with other
applications for example, to check your target positions.
This section contains these main topics:
OpenVision / Wellbore Planner Workflow an example of a

complete workflow for using OpenVision and Wellbore Planner
together to create, modify, and save a well plan (page 286)
Setting Up an OpenVision / Wellbore Planner Session a set of

more detailed steps for setting up your OpenVision / Wellbore
Planner session (page 287)
Developing a Well Plan: An Overview steps for running an

OpenVision / Wellbore Planner session to create, develop, and save
a well plan (page 297)
Tips for Working in the OpenVision 3D Window a few pointers for

working with OpenVision/StratWorks 3D display tools (page 302)
R2003.12 Integrating with OpenVision and StratWorks 3D 284

For information about displaying well position uncertainty ranges in

OpenVision, see Viewing Uncertainty Ranges for Wells and Well Plans
in OpenVision or StratWorks 3D beginning on page 241.

OpenVision / Wellbore Planner Workflow
This workflow is an example of typical steps involved in an integrated

OpenVision / Wellbore Planner work session, a session in which you
create a new well plan in Wellbore Planner, set targets in OpenVision,
and save the well plan. For a more detailed description of setup tasks,
see page 287. For a more detailed description of typical tasks you
perform in an integrated work session, see page 297.
Launch OpenWorks, Wellbore Planner (page 37), and OpenVision

(page 288).
Add the Wellbore Planner interface to OpenVision (page 291). If

OpenVision is displaying time data, select Time as the domain and
specify the Datum.
If you are displaying time or mixed domain data, use the

Time/Depth Server utility to handle conversions (page 294).
If you have project data from other applications that you can use to
pick targets, display the data in OpenVision (page 295).
From the OpenWorks Command Menu, launch any other

applications you want to use in your integrated session to define
additional target surfaces.
In Wellbore Planner, create a new well plan (page 55), choose a

plan type, and specify a starting location and kickoff point, if
applicable (page 59).
Digitize targets in OpenVision (page 298).
Set target parameters in Wellbore Planner (page 117).
Calculate the well path in Wellbore Planner (page 144). Check the
results in OpenVision, modify the plan, and recalculate as desired.
Save the well plan project in Wellbore Planner (page 301).

Setting Up an OpenVision / Wellbore Planner Session
To set up an integrated OpenVision / Wellbore Planner work session,

perform these basic tasks:
1. Launch OpenWorks if it is not already running. (You must run in

the OpenWorks environment to have access to the OpenWorks
database and display data such as saved Wellbore Planner projects
or existing wells.)
2. Launch Wellbore Planner if it is not already running. (For

instructions, see page 37.) Create or open the project you want to
view. (For instructions on these steps, see Working with Projects
beginning on page 48.)
3. Launch OpenVision by following the steps in the next topic,

starting on page 288.
If you already have both applications running, and have set the
domain and datum appropriately in the OpenVision Launcher
dialog box and the Well Planning Options dialog box, start with
step 5.
4. Start an OpenVision session or open a previously saved session (as

5. Add the Wellbore Planner interface to OpenVision (as described on

page 291).
6. If you are using time or mixed domains to display data in

OpenVision, use the Time/Depth Server to handle domain
conversions (as described on page 294).
7. From OpenVision, display any existing project data that will help
you pick targets. Click on Data, and select a data source from the
drop-down menu. For example, you can import surfaces from
SeisWorks, Stratamodel, gOcad, ProMAX, or Z-MAP (page 295).
8. You can run other OpenWorks family applications if you need

additional data (such as target surfaces). From the OpenWorks
Command Menu, launch any other applications you want to
integrate into your session.

Launching OpenVision
To launch OpenVision, follow these steps:
1. Select Applications OpenVision from the OpenWorks

Command Menu.
The OpenVision Launcher dialog box appears (as shown below).

The dialog box displays default settings if this is the first time you
are launching OpenVision, or displays the selections you made in
your most recent OpenVision session.
To select any of the multiple-choice options, click on the

appropriate setting.
2. Domain Choose the domain appropriate for your upcoming

session. Some considerations for each setting are described below.
Choosing the Appropriate Domain
Data displays correctly in OpenVision only if you choose the appropriate

domain. If you choose time or mixed domain mode, you must run the Time/
Depth Server utility to convert data between domains as needed. (For more
information about the Time/Depth Server utility, see the topic beginning on
page 156.)
Depth For displaying data stored with depth values. If you

are not displaying any time-domain data, this is the simplest
mode to use. For example, use the depth domain for running
Wellbore Planner and OpenVision if you are only viewing
uncertainty ranges or you are using geologic (but not seismic)
data to edit targets.

Time For displaying all data in time. For example, you run
a session in which you know you do not need to see the data in
depth. Perhaps there are no depth values saved for the plan yet
because you are importing a well plan from a time-domain
application. You use the time domain, and run the Time/Depth
Server utility to save both time and depth values to the
OpenWorks database.
Mixed For a session in which you want to be able to view z

coordinate values as either time or depth. For example, you use
seismic surfaces to pick targets, and run the Time/Depth Server
utility to handle conversions between domains. When the plan
is more complete, you display the data in depth to view the
plan the way the driller will see it. (You change the domain by
switching the option selected in the Well Planning Options
dialog box.)
Mixed is the most flexible mode, but also the one that requires
the most care. You must make sure you run the Time/Depth
Server throughout your session, and you must pay attention to
any changes you make in the time-depth conversion method.
To continue the example, suppose you pick a target, change the
time-depth conversion method, and pick another target. The
depth values stored for the two targets may be inconsistent.
(For more information about possible inconsistencies, see
page 160.)
3. Surface Units Measurement units for x and y coordinates.
Choose Meters or Feet, as appropriate for your OpenWorks
projects measurement system. If you have already launched
Wellbore Planner, the preselected option should reflect the
measurement system you chose in the Select Measurement System
dialog box.
4. Depth Units Measurement units for depth (also called downhole

units), which appear only if the domain is set to Depth or Mixed. If
options for depth units appear, choose Meters or Feet, as
appropriate for your OpenWorks projects measurement system.
Again, if you have already launched Wellbore Planner, the
preselected option should match with the measurement system you
chose in the Select Measurement System dialog box.
5. Run Mode The display mode for running the dialog box. In
Standard mode, the basic options appear. These are the options
you typically set for using OpenVision with Wellbore Planner. In
Advanced mode, an extended option list appears. For information
about the additional options, see the OpenVision User Manual.

6. When the settings are correct, click on OK.

If you are using dual monitors, select a monitor (when prompted)
for displaying the OpenVision 3D Viewer window and the
OpenVision dialog boxes. Display OpenVision on the monitor with
the best graphics capabilities.
The OpenVision 3D Viewer window appears, as shown in the
illustration below.
bounding box
toolbox
shortcuts
viewport
(graphic
display area)
input field
controls
animation
controls
keyboard viewing controls

shortcut pointing dispatcher (PD) status border
tips (green = receptive to messages, x, y, and domain coordinate
red = not able to receive messages) fields (domain is expressed as
Depth, Time, or Z mixed)

Opening a Previously Saved OpenVision Session

When the OpenVision 3D Viewer window appears, you are
automatically set to begin a new session. You can proceed with the
new session, or open an earlier session that you saved. (For
information about the types of OpenVision / Wellbore Planner session
data that you can save and retrieve, see page 301.)
To reopen a saved OpenVision session:
1. Select File Open Session in the OpenVision 3D Viewer window.

2. In the Open Session dialog box, select a session name from the list,
and choose whether to replace the existing target data, or merge the
currently displayed data with the saved data.
Adding the Wellbore Planner Interface to OpenVision

To display Wellbore Planner data in OpenVision, initialize an interface
between Wellbore Planner and OpenVision. You specify Wellbore
Planner display options for OpenVision in the Well Planning Options
dialog box. You can change the options at any time during your
session by displaying the dialog box again (as described on page 294).
1. In the Wellbore Planner main window, select Tools

Add Wellbore Planner Interface to OpenVision (as shown in the
illustration below).
2. If you are using dual monitors, select a monitor (when prompted)

for displaying the upcoming dialog box.

The Well Planning Options dialog box appears (as shown below),
and displays the settings stored from your last session or displays
default settings, if no settings have yet been stored.
3. Select the display options you want to apply. To select any of the
multiple-choice options, click on the appropriate setting. For
single-choice options, click to toggle between selected and cleared
status. To edit option fields, select the field contents and enter new
values from the keyboard.
Domain Select Depth or Time as the domain mode for
displaying your Wellbore Planner data. If you have Wellbore
Planner data saved as both time and depth, you can choose
either domain.
Time is displayed in milliseconds, and depth is displayed in
feet or meters. Objects displayed in depth have zero (0) set as
mean sea level.
Seismic Datum If the well plans in your project use a

datum as a reference point, set the datum here. If you are
displaying data in time, make sure you specify the datum in the
same measurement units (meters or feet) that you use in
OpenVision. If you set the datum incorrectly, the Wellbore
Planner data may be inconsistent with existing wells or with
data from other applications.

If you are running in time, set the datum to match the one used
in your SeisWorks or EarthCube project. (To find the datum for
your SeisWorks project, select Defaults Project Datum in
the SeisWorks main window.)
Target Labels Choose whether or not to label targets that

appear in OpenVision. (You can define target names in the
Wellbore Planner Target Editor window.)
Target Fills Choose whether to display targets as outlines

or as solid shapes. (Set target shapes and colors in the Target
Editor window.)
Drawing Panel Choose whether to display the drawing

panel (a semi-transparent drawing wall). The drawing panel
can help you pick targets without displaying seismic sections.
Plan Labels Choose whether or not to label plans that

appear in OpenVision.
Position Choose the label position for both targets and

plans: above (Top) or below (Bottom).
Plan Type Specify whether to display well plans as lines or

as tubes in OpenVision.
Tube Radius If you select the Tube option as the Plan

Type selection, this option specifies the radius for well plan
display.
Target Prefix Specify the prefix for the labels of any new
targets you create in OpenVision.
4. When your selections are complete, click on Apply (to see the
effect of your choices without closing the dialog box) or click on
OK (to apply your choices and close the dialog box). To exit
without saving any changes, click on Cancel.

Changing Interface Options
You can display the Well Planning Options dialog box at any time by selecting
Tools Wellbore Planner in the OpenVision 3D Viewer window. The Well
Planning Options dialog box reappears. Specify and apply any changes you
need to make to the Wellbore Planner interface.
Closing the Interface Between OpenVision and Wellbore Planner
To close the interface between OpenVision and Wellbore Planner, click on

File Wellbore Planner Exit in the OpenVision 3D Viewer window. The
interface closes, and the Wellbore Planner Exit option disappears from the
OpenVision File menu. The two applications can no longer exchange
information. If you have opened multiple instances of the interface, use this
method to close extra interfaces until only one remains on the OpenVision File
and Tools menus.
Running the Time/Depth Server Utility

If you use OpenVision to display Wellbore Planner data (depth-
domain data) and time-domain data created in some other application,
make sure you run the Time/Depth Server utility. The Time/Depth
Server utility uses the specified conversion method to translate data
from one domain into another, so you avoid problems with
mismatched data. Keep the utility running throughout your session, so
data is converted as needed. If you save well plan changes, both depth
and time values are saved to the OpenWorks database.
Run the Time/Depth Server if you:

Choose Time as the domain in the OpenVision Launcher dialog
box or in the Well Planning Options dialog box.
Choose Mixed as the domain in the OpenVision Launcher dialog
box, then choose Time in the Well Planning Options dialog box.

To run the Time/Depth Server, follow these steps. (For full

instructions, see page 157.)
1. If the Time/Depth Server window does not open automatically,

display it by selecting Tools Time/Depth Server from the
2. From the Time/Depth Server windows File drop-down menu,

select a time-depth conversion method. When you select an option,
in most cases a dialog box appears, which you use to select a file,
curve, or model for converting domain values. (If you choose No
Conversion, you do not have to make any other specification.)
3. Leave the Time/Depth Server window open for the length of the
work session with Wellbore Planner. To keep the Time/Depth
Server open, leave the window on your screen either in full or
minimized mode. (To minimize the window, click on the Minimize
button in the windows upper right corner.)
Changing to a New Time/Depth Conversion Method
Changing the time-depth conversion method can cause inconsistencies in your

data in some circumstances. Before you change the conversion model typically
used for your project, make sure you are aware of the issues discussed on
page 160.
Adding Project Data from Other Applications

Your team may have already created some project data in other
applications that you can use to pick targets. From OpenVision, you
can connect to the OpenWorks database or connect to other
applications data directories. For example, you can import surfaces to
display from SeisWorks, Stratamodel, gOcad, ProMAX, or Z-MAP.
To add project data created in other applications, click on Data in the

OpenVision 3D Viewer window, and choose a project data source
from the drop-down menu. OpenVision connects with the database and
a data window appears. If necessary, select the projects, directories, or
files in which you want to browse. Next, select the appropriate tab to
find the type of data you want to display.

The list that follows identifies accessible project data sources and
notes some of the key types of data you can display from each source.
gOcad TSurfaces, SGrids, and opacity cubes
OpenWorks existing wells, surface grids, and fault grids
ProMAX any surface attribute data
SeisWorks seismic lines, horizons, and faults (from SeisWorks
2D data); and seismic lines, horizons, faults, and lines/traces (from
SeisWorks 3D data)
Statamodel surfaces, geocellular bodies, and grids
Z-MAP Plus MFD gridded surfaces, gridded attributes, and
cultural data
For more information about displaying data, refer to the OpenVision
User Guide.
Integrating Additional Applications into the Work Session

You may want to integrate other applications from the OpenWorks
environment into your work session (for example, in order to identify
more surfaces for selecting targets). From the OpenWorks Command
Menu, launch any other applications you want to integrate into your
session.
For more information about running these applications, see the
applications user documentation, and read any of the sections in this
manual that apply:
Integrating with EarthCube beginning on page 272
Integrating with SeisWorks beginning on page 304
Integrating with Stratamodel beginning on page 322
Integrating with Other Applications beginning on page 331

Developing a Well Plan: An Overview
This topic discusses typical tasks for creating a new well plan in an
OpenVision / Wellbore Planner integrated work session. Descriptions
of tasks that are specific to working with OpenVision follow this list,
and general Wellbore Planner task descriptions are in other parts of the
manual.
To begin a new well plan, you perform several tasks:
1. Create a new well plan (page 55).
2. Specify a well plan type (page 58).
3. Identify a starting location for the well and a kickoff point, if

appropriate (page 61).
4. Create digitized targets in OpenVision (page 298) or other

integrated applications.
5. Set target parameters in Wellbore Planners Target Editor window

(page 117).
6. Make any needed edits to the list of selected targets in Wellbore

Planner (page 115).
7. Redefine targets as necessary in OpenVision (page 300), Wellbore

Planner (page 128), or other applications that are integrated into
your work session.
8. Specify any appropriate engineering parameters that apply to the

well plan, such as maximum dogleg severity (page 145) or the
length of the well extension (page 146).
9. Choose a calculation method and calculate the well path

(page 144).
10. Check the newly calculated well path in OpenVision or other

applications. Modify the plan and recalculate if necessary.
11. Calculate well position uncertainty for any existing wells in your
project (page 223).
12. Add well position uncertainty visualization to the OpenVision

display (page 237).
13. Before ending your session, save the well plan (page 301).

Creating Targets in OpenVision

OpenVision and Wellbore Planner exchange target data through the
OpenWorks Pointing Dispatcher (PD), a background process that
transmits messages between listening applications. The default setting
for the Wellbore Planner PD button is Automatic. You typically do
not change this setting, so that you can see new Wellbore Planner data
automatically appear in the OpenVision 3D Viewer window.
A target in OpenVision appears as a:
point at the center of cross-hairs (the default display for new
targets)
filled shape (if you specify a target shape in the Wellbore Planner
Target Editor window)
or
outline of a shape (if you define the target as a shape in the Target
Editor window, but clear the Target Fills option in the Well
Planning Options dialog box)
To pick new targets in OpenVision:
1. Click on the Draw button. (The Draw button is shown at left. It has
an icon of a pencil drawing and is located near the main windows
upper right corner.)
The interaction mode changes from Select to Draw, and the cursor
appears as a pencil when it is in the graphic display area.
OpenVision is ready to create new digitized targets.
Creating an Unassigned Target
A new target you create in OpenVision is automatically assigned to the well

plan currently selected in Wellbore Planner. In some cases, you may want to
define targets before you decide to incorporate them into a particular well plan.
To create an unassigned target, clear the current well plan selection before
creating the target. (To clear the well plan selection, click on the highlighted
well plan name in the Plans list of the Wellbore Planner main window.)
Changing a Targets Assignment Status
To change a targets status from assigned to unassigned, click on the target

name in Wellbore Planners Selected list, then click on the Remove button.
The target name moves to the Assigned list. To assign an unassigned target to
a well plan, select the target in the Available list. The target moves immediately
to the Selected list, and is assigned to the active (highlighted) well plan.

2. In the graphic display area, locate the point at which you want to
create a target, and quickly press Button 1. The x, y, and z
coordinates reflect the pencils current position when it is in a
pickable location. (If you press Button 1 too slowly, the cursor
changes to Drag Rotate mode instead of creating a target.)
The new target is added to the well plan displayed in OpenVision
and in Wellbore Planner. (The new target appears in any Wellbore
Planner view windows that are open, and in the Wellbore Planner
main windows list of targets for the currently selected well plan, as
shown in the following example.) The target is named with the
prefix you specified in the Well Planning Options dialog box. If the
target is outside of parameters you have set for the well plan and the
Wellbore Planner Calculate button is set to Automatic, the new
target may cause an error message to appear.
newly created
targets that are
assigned to the
active well plan active well plan
button that opens

the Target Editor
window button that moves a highlighted
target from the Selected list to
the Available list
Removing an Unwanted Target

To remove an unwanted target from OpenVision, select the target by clicking on the
arrow button in the upper right corner, then clicking on the target with Button 1.
Next, click Button 3, and select Delete from the pop-up menu.
Changing the Order of Targets

Targets are added to the well plan in the order you create them. If you
create targets out of order, you can change the target order. You can
change the sort order for targets by selecting a new option for the Sort
button (to sort by depth or distance, for example). You can also
rearrange the target list by disassembling and rebuilding it. First
remove each misplaced target from the Selected list by clicking on it,
then clicking on the Remove button. One by one, the targets move
from the Selected list to the Available list. Add them to the Selected
list again, by clicking on each one in the correct order. For more

detailed instructions, see Selecting and Sorting Well Plan Targets on

page 115.

Once you have calculated the well path, you can edit the well plan in
Wellbore Planner or in OpenVision, then recalculate the well path. (If
the Calculations button in Wellbore Planner is set to Manual, you
must click on the Calculate button to update the calculations for the
well path.) Changes display simultaneously in both applications if the
Wellbore Planner PD button is set to Automatic.
(If the PD button is set to Manual, you must click on the Broadcast
button to update the OpenVision display.)
Making Well Plan Changes from Wellbore Planner
These are some of the changes you can make to the well plan, working
from Wellbore Planner:
Rearrange the target order (page 116).
Use the mouse to grab and move targets in the Plan View or Section
View windows (page 128).
Specify new target coordinates or delete targets in the Target Editor
window (page 117).
Modify target angles or penetration points by selecting Plans
Snap Target (page 136).
Optimize the target penetration points (page 138).
Specify a new calculation method (Method) and limit for dogleg
severity allowed (Dogleg Severity) (page 144).
Use the Extend option to extend the well path (page 146).
Eliminate all the changes you made to the well plan since the last
time you saved the file, by reloading the well plan. (To reload the
well plan, select File Open. The Well Planning Project Selection
dialog box appears. Select the project and click on the Replace
button.)

Making Well Plan Changes from OpenVision
In OpenVision, you can drag targets to new positions or delete them.

To move a target, position the cursor on the target and press Ctrl and
Button 2 at the same time. The cursor assumes the shape of a star
( ). Drag the target to its new position.
To delete a target:
1. Select a target. (To select a target, click on the arrow button if
you are not already in Select mode, then click on the target.)
2. Press Button 3 and select Delete from the pop-up menu (or
select Delete Selected to delete all currently selected objects).
The target (or group of selected objects) is deleted.
Saving the Session Results

You can save the well plan, and save some types of OpenVision
session data.

You can use several different methods to save a well plan in Wellbore
Planner:
Select File Save, and save the Wellbore Planner project under its
original name, with the current changes to the well plans data and
targets. The new data overwrites old project data in the OpenWorks
database. The project and well plan remain open. (If you enter a
new name for the file in the dialog box, you save it as a new project
under a different name.)
Select File Save As to create a new version of the Wellbore
Planner project under a different name, with the current changes to
the well plans data and targets. No changes are made to the original
project. The new project is added to the OpenWorks database, and
becomes the open project.
Select Plans Copy As to add the current version of the well plan
as a new plan in the original Wellbore Planner project. The new
plan is added to the existing project data in the OpenWorks
database. The project remains open, with the new well plan active.
To save a Wellbore Planner file in a format that other applications can
read, see Exporting Well Plans and Projects on page 170.

Saving OpenVision Session Data

When you save an OpenVision / Wellbore Planner session, you save
only a few types of data: the current OpenVision data source
connections and the displayed data objects from those connections.
OpenVision does not save the Wellbore Planner data that is currently
displayed.
To save this limited OpenVision session information, select
File Save Session.
When you exit from OpenVision, it autosaves the current list of
sessions, color maps, list of available data sources, and the most
recently selected dialog box settings.
Tips for Working in the OpenVision 3D Window
This topic describes some basic techniques for changing what you see
in the OpenVision 3D Viewer window. For complete information
about using OpenVision display capabilities, see the OpenVision User
Manual.
Changing well planning display options You can change the
interface settings in the Well Planning Options dialog box to
redefine the way your well plans appear in OpenVision. To display
the Well Planning Options dialog box, select Tools
Wellbore Planner in the OpenVision 3D Viewer window.
Removing all well plans from display in an uncertainty
visualization session You can remove your well plans from the
uncertainty display in OpenVision by closing the interface between
OpenVision and Wellbore Planner. The Uncertainty utility
continues to operate in standalone mode, and you can continue to
display uncertainty ranges for existing wells. (The Uncertainty
utility can also continue to display uncertainty projections for well
plans.)
Removing selected well plans or other elements from display
You can selectively hide well plans or other display elements in
OpenVision by selecting one or more objects, then clicking on the
Hide button (the button with the closed eye icon). To select an
object, click on the arrow button in the windows upper right corner
(if you are not already in Select mode), then click on the object you
want to select. The selected object is highlighted.
To redisplay the most recently hidden group of objects, click on the
Unhide button.

Selecting bounding box and background color preferences

To set display options for the bounding box and the background
color of the graphic display area, display the User Preferences
dialog box. Select View User Preferences in the OpenVision 3D
Viewer window.
Among other options, you can use this dialog box to show the
bounding box (as a semi-transparent box without a grid, as a semi-
transparent box with a grid, or as an invisible box with a grid). You
can also select the bounding box color, the grid color, and the
background color for the graphic display area.
Using shortcut buttons You can use many OpenVision display
options by clicking on the shortcut buttons found on the right and
left edges of the OpenVision 3D Viewer window. For information
about a shortcut button, position the cursor over the button. A brief
description appears.
Keyboard shortcuts Note the list of keyboard shortcuts at the

bottom of the OpenVision 3D Viewer window:
Press B1 OpenVision switches to Drag Rotate mode, so you

can drag and rotate the display viewpoint with the mouse. The
cursor appears as a three-dimensional four-cornered arrow in
the graphic display area.
Press B2 OpenVision switches to Drag mode, so you can

drag the display viewpoint without rotating. The cursor appears
as a flat four-cornered arrow in the graphic display area.
Press B1 + B2 OpenVision switches to Zoom mode, so you

zoom in and out by moving the mouse. The cursor appears as a
two-sided arrow in perspective in the graphic display area.
Press Ctrl + B2 OpenVision switches to Move Object mode,
so you drag a target with the mouse. The cursor appears as a star
( ) in the graphic display area.
Press Ctrl + B1 + B2 OpenVision switches to Drag Scale

mode, so you can scale an object by dragging the mouse. The
cursor appears as a slanted four-cornered arrow in the graphic
display area.

Integrating with SeisWorks
Overview
You can use SeisWorks and Wellbore Planner to perform the

following operations:
digitize targets on horizons and seismic panels
create digitized well plans consisting of multiple targets, joined

by straight well path segments
broadcast targets and well plans between these two applications and
to other Landmark applications that have well planning
functionality
apply various engineering parameters to the digitized well plan then

calculate and display computed well plans that incorporate these
engineering values
display computed well plans in SeisWorks and Wellbore Planner
display seismic data that coincides with the well paths of digitized
and computed well plans
write targets and digitized well plans to ASCII files
This section provides a workflow for using SeisWorks with Wellbore

Planner. It also discusses how to set display parameters in SeisWorks,
how to edit the well path, and how to save the well plan in Wellbore
Planner.
Getting Additional Information About Using SeisWorks
SeisWorks is a sophisticated software package that includes many options not

discussed here. For a detailed discussion of the complete suite of SeisWorks
options, see the SeisWorks User Guide.
R2003.12 Integrating with SeisWorks 304

SeisWorks / Wellbore Planner workflow
This workflow shows how to use Wellbore Planner and SeisWorks to

plan a well.
Launch SeisWorks and Wellbore Planner.

Set up the SeisWorks display
Display seismic data in Seismic View or a horizon in MapView.
Once you have identified the interval(s) of interest in your seismic

volume, activate the Wellbore Planning option in SeisWorks and
create a new well plan.
In Wellbore Planner, select Tools Time/Depth Server.

Select a velocity model in the Time/Depth Server window.
Set a surface location or kickoff point in Wellbore Planner.
Select one or more drilling targets in SeisWorks.
Set target parameters (including shape and orientation)

in Wellbore Planner.

Check the results, modify the well plan, and recalculate as desired.

Creating a Well Plan In SeisWorks

To set up an integrated SeisWorks work session, and create a new
well plan
1. Select Applications SeisWorks from the OpenWorks Command

Menu.
2. If you are using dual monitors, be sure to display Wellbore Planner

on a separate screen.
menu bar
graphic
display window
toolbox
controls
(buttons)
Wellbore Planner button
status line Help message line

3. Decide whether you are going to pick targets on a seismic panel or

on a horizon:
If you intend to pick your targets on a seismic panel, perform

the following steps:
Display the seismic in a Seismic View.
Open the Seismic Contents dialog box and enable the

appropriate well plan display options. If desired, set the
target, digitized well plan, and computed well plan colors.
If you intend to pick your targets on a horizon, perform the

following steps:
Display the horizon in a Map View.
Open the Map View Contents dialog box and enable the
Well Plans - Targets, Computed Plans, and Digitized
Plans options.
4. Start a Wellbore Planner session, placing the application on the

screen opposite SeisWorks (right screen).
In the Wellbore Planner main window, select Open File.
The Well Planning Project Selection dialog box appears, and the
Time/Depth Server start-up window appears.
5. Open a well planning project, and select a velocity model as

described in the next topic.
6. Display your data in SeisWorks.
7. Position the cursor inside the Map View or Seismic View window,
then click on the Wellbore Planner button ( ).
SeisWorks enters the well planning mode.

8. Press Button 3 and select New Plan from the Well Planning
popup menu, as shown in the illustration below.
The New Plan dialog box appears, as shown in the illustration

below.
9. Enter a name for the well plan that you want to create (or accept the
automatically generated name) in the dialog boxs text field and
click on OK.

The SeisWorks information box posts the name of the new well
plan as the active well plan. The new plan name also appears above
the spreadsheet and in the Plans list of Wellbore Planner. This well
plan is now part of the Wellbore Planner project you just created.
well plan name
The cursor assumes the shape of a pen ( ) to indicate that

SeisWorks is in well planning mode. If you digitize a target while
the cursor has this shape, the target is automatically appended to the
active well plan.

Creating Targets In SeisWorks

You can use Wellbore Planner with SeisWorks to pick drilling targets
for the well plan.
Displaying Data Generated in Time in Wellbore Planner
Most SeisWorks sessions display time data, so you will typically select one of the
three time/depth options. However, depth data can be displayed in SeisWorks (with
some discrepancies in the z annotation). If you are displaying depth data, you
should select the No Conversion option.
For more information on how time and depth values are stored, see Converting
Time and Depth Domain Values on page 155.
You can digitize targets directly within SeisWorks. It transmits the

target coordinates to the Time/Depth Server utility, which uses the
currently selected velocity model to convert the z values from time to
depth, if necessary. The Time/Depth Server utility then relays the target
to Wellbore Planner.

Time/Depth Server
Time Depth
0.00 0.00
561.04 200.00
1177.22 400.00
1872.78 600.00
2602.88 800.00
3408.70 1000.00
4266.90 1200.00
5069.40 1400.00
5947.28 1600.00
6867.27 1800.00
7753.60 2000.00
8525.77 2200.00
9300.84 2400.00
15501.40 4000.00
All three applications exchange target data through OpenWorks

pointing dispatcher (PD), a background process that transmits
messages to listening applications.
Pick new targets with the well planning mode enabled (toggle on the
Wellbore Planner button ). You can create targets in the Seismic
or Map View.

Creating Targets In a Seismic View

Position the cursor over the seismic event that you want the well plan
to intersect and click Button 1.
A target symbol appears at that point. It has the same shape as a top
symbol. Simultaneously, the targets x, y, and z coordinates are posted
in the X, Y, and Z(Subsea) boxes of Wellbore Planners Target Editor
window. The z coordinate is posted in depth.
Repeat until you have picked all of the targets that you want included
in the well plan. Each new digitized target is appended to the active
well plan and the software extends the digitized well path through each
target. This line shows a sequence of targets picked in SeisWorks. It
does not incorporate engineering parameters that can be set in
Wellbore Planner (such as the kickoff point, hold angle, entry angle,
etc.).
Press Button 1 to
create a new target.
Result: new target appears

in designated location.
Assigning a New Target (Seismic View)

Creating Targets In a Map View

Position the cursor over the horizon feature that you want the well plan
to intersect and press Button 1.
A target appears. It has a bar shape, similar to a top symbol.
Simultaneously, the targets x, y, and z coordinates are posted in the X,
Y, and Z(Subsea) boxes of the Wellbore Planners Target Editor. The
Z coordinate is the z value of the horizon pick that lies under the
cursor. It is posted in depth.
Each new digitized target is appended to the active well plan and the
software extends the digitized well path through each target. This line
shows a sequence of targets picked in SeisWorks. The engineering
parameters that can be set in Wellbore Planner (such as the kickoff
point, hold angle, entry angle, etc.) have not been incorporated yet.
Press Button 1 to
Result: new target
create a new target.
appears in
designated location.

The name of each target displays in the Selected list of the main
Wellbore Planner window as you select it.
Repeat until you pick all targets that you want included in the well
plan.
Creating Unassigned (Floating) Targets

Targets are automatically assigned to the open well plan. To create unassigned
targets, close the active well plan before selecting any targets.
Checking Target Order

Presumably, you selected targets in the correct order. They are broadcast and listed
in Wellbore Planner in the same order. You can reorder the targets if you wish.
Refer to Selecting and Sorting Well Plan Targets on page 115 for directions.
You can also assign existing targets to the active well plan from a
Seismic or Map View. Position the cursor over the existing target and
when the cursor assumes the top side shape ( ), press Button 1.
The target is appended to the active well plan.
Press Button 1
on existing
Result: target
target.
is appended
to active well
plan.
Using Valid Data to Assign Targets

In a Map View, you can not assign an existing target that does not lie over a valid horizon pick.
In a Seismic View, you can not assign an existing target that does not coincide exactly with the seismic section.

Setting the Display Parameters in SeisWorks

You can set display parameters for targets, digitized well plans, and
computed well plans in SeisWorks. These parameters apply to
SeisWorks displays only.
Perform the following steps
1. Click on the Contents button ( ).
The Seismic Contents dialog box opens. The Well Plans panel of
this dialog box provides options for enabling display of the
digitized well plans and setting their display color.
2. Set the display parameters.
for targets
To view targets, toggle the Targets button on.
The Seismic View posts the targets as tops symbols. It does

not use the shapes that you have defined in Wellbore
Planner.
To view the target annotation, toggle the Annotation

button on.
To set the target color within SeisWorks, click on the color

box and select the appropriate color.
This color setting is only applied to new targets. It is not

applied retroactively to existing targets.
for digitized well plans
To view the digitized well plans, toggle the Digitized Plans

button on.
To set the digitized plan color, click on the color box and
select the color that you want to view.
If you want to view the digitized plan name, toggle the

Name button on.
Select where you want the name to appearTop, Bottom,

or Both.

for computed well plans
To view the computed well plans, toggle on the Computed

Plans button.
To set the computed plan color, click on the color box and
select the color that you want to view.
If you want to view the computed plan name, toggle the

Name button on.
Select where you want the name to appearTop, Bottom,

or Both.
3. Click on Apply to apply your display settings.
Tips on Well Plan Color
The active well plan is always displayed in the SeisWorks annotation

color, even when well planning is not active. If you want to display the well
plan in the digitized color, select Close Plan from the Well Planning popup
menu to terminate its status as the active plan.
You cannot assign unique colors to individual digitized well plans. All the
digitized well plans are displayed in the same color.
The color that you assign in the Seismic View is used for displaying the
digitized well plans in all Map Views and Seismic Views.
The color that you select in SeisWorks does not affect the display of the
digitized well plan in other applications.
4. Set the Well Plan annotation and symbol size.
SeisWorks uses the standard well parameters for setting the size of
well plan annotation and well plan symbols.
In a Seismic View
Click on the Contents button ( ) to open the Seismic

Contents dialog box.
The Well Plans panel of this box contains options for

enabling the display of digitized well plans and their
annotation.

If not already on, toggle the Digitized Plans and

Annotation buttons on.
Set where you want the annotation to appearTop,

Bottom, or Both and click on OK.
From the Seismic View menu bar, select Well

Parameters to open the Well Parameters dialog box. The
Text and Symbols field of this box provides an option for
setting the well annotation size.
To adjust the well plan annotation size, enter an appropriate

value into the Well Text Size field and click on Apply.
The well plan annotation redraws using the specified the

specified setting.
In a Map View
Select Well Parameters.
The Well Parameters dialog box appears. This box provides

options for setting the well symbol and well annotation size.
To adjust the well plan symbol size, enter the desired value
into the Well Symbol Size.
To adjust the well plan annotation size, enter the desired

value into the Well Text Size field.
Click on Apply.
The well plan redraws using the specified symbol and

annotation sizes.
Tips on Well Plan Symbols and Annotation
You toggle the display of well plans on and off in the Map View with the
Well Boreholes and Well Plans option in the Map View Contents
dialog box.
Well plans are displayed with the standard OpenWorks location symbol.
This symbol appears over the last target in the well plan.
The well plan name appears next to the last target in the well plan.



area.

data.
If the Calculations button is set to Manual, press the Calculate

button. The results are shown in Wellbore Planners spreadsheet, and
the well path itself appears in SeisWorks and in any of Wellbore
Planners viewing windows that are open. If any of the above
parameters is changed, recalculate the well plan. Optionally, the
Calculations button can be set to Automatic, and any change in the
parameters will trigger recalculation.


Once you have calculated a well path, you can modify it in Wellbore
Planner or in SeisWorks and then recalculate the path. The new path
displays simultaneously in both applications.
Editing the Well Path in Wellbore Planner

In Wellbore Planner, you can make the following modifications:
move the targets graphically in Plan or Section view (page 128)
modify target angles or penetration points with Plans Snap
Target (page 136)
Editing the Well Path in SeisWorks
Attempting to Edit Targets Based on Invalid Data
You use the same techniques to edit targets in both the Seismic View and the Map
View. However, you can only perform these edits over valid data.
In a Map View, you cannot move or delete a target that does not lie over valid
horizon data.
For example, if you pick targets in Seismic View then view them in Map View,
the targets may appear in an area that has no horizon picks. In this case, you
will not be able to edit the targets in the Map View (unless you display a
horizon that coincides with the targets location).
In a Seismic View, you cannot deassign an existing target that does not coincide
exactly with the seismic section.
In SeisWorks, you edit target positions by dragging or deleting them.
To move a target
Position the cursor over the target that you want to move.
When the cursor assumes the top side shape ( ), press
Button 1 and drag the target to a new position.
Release Button 1 to leave the target at its new position.

To deassign a target
Position the cursor over the target that you want to deassign.
Button 2.
The digitized well plan reshapes to exclude the target. The

target becomes a free floating target.
To append a target to the active well plan
Position the cursor over the floating target that you want to
append.
Button 1.
The target is attached to the active well plan as the last target in
the well plan.
To delete a target
Position the cursor over the target that you want to delete. (It
must be deassigned before you can delete it.)
Button 2.
The target disappears from the Seismic View or Map View. It

also disappears from the Available list in Wellbore Planners
mains window.
In Wellbore Planners main window, click on the Calculate shortcut

button ( ).
The well plan is recalculated using the new target positions. The
spreadsheet in the Wellbore Planner main window is updated with the
edited well plan. Simultaneously, the computed well plan in
SeisWorks is redrawn.


You can save the well plan and make it available to all OpenWorks
applications.
Saving the Well Plan in Wellbore Planner

You can save all the well plans and targets in the current Wellbore
Planner project by using the File Save or File Save As options.
Saving the Well Plan in the OpenWorks Database

If you want the well plan (or plans) to be available to all OpenWorks
applications, follow the instructions in Saving a Well Plan to the
OpenWorks Database as a Well on page 332.
Deleting a Well Plan

Use the following procedure to delete a well plan in SeisWorks.
1. In a Seismic View or a Map View, select the well plan that you want
to delete.
2. Position the cursor inside the view, press Button 3, and select
Delete Plan from the Well Planning popup menu.
The well plan is deleted and the targets become unassigned.

Integrating with Stratamodel
Overview
You can use Stratamodel in an integrated work session with Wellbore

Planner, and plan your wells interactively between the two
environments.
This section contains a workflow for using Stratamodel with Wellbore
Planner. It also discusses how to view the well path from within
Stratamodel, edit the well path, and save your well plan.
Well Path Calculated and Displayed in Stratamodel
R2003.12 Integrating with Stratamodel 322

Stratamodel / Wellbore Planner Workflow
The following workflow uses Wellbore Planner with Stratamodel to

plan a well.
Launch Stratamodel and Wellbore Planner.
Create a Wellbore Planner project file to contain your well plan.
Set up the Stratamodel display.
Connect to Wellbore Planner with Stratamodels

Wellbore Planning option and create a new well plan.
Specify a starting location in Wellbore Planner.
Pick your targets in Stratamodel.

Check the results, modify the well plan, and recalculate as desired.

Developing the Well Plan
Picking Targets In Stratamodel

You will probably want to pick your targets within Stratamodel,
although you can also do so in Wellbore Planner. (If you want to
create targets in Wellbore Planner, see page 111.)
To pick a target in Stratamodel, press Ctrl-Shift and press Button 3

on a point in the display you want to designate as a target.
The SGM-Notifier dialog box displays data relevant to your target. In

Wellbore Planner, the target is assigned a default name and number,
and appears in the Selected list. Subsequent targets will be named and
displayed in the order in which you pick them.
Target information provided

by Stratamodel.
Target displayed in the

Wellbore Planner window
In addition, you can see the results instantly in Stratamodel. The target
snaps to the cell center.

Target name displays.
To get a better view of the target or targets in Stratamodels Show

Displays, toggle the Model Display button to Off.
Model with the Display Button Toggled Off

Four
Targets
Well Four
Path Targets
Well Path
Same display with

Model Display toggled off.
Additional targets selected.
Same Display with Four Targets
Selecting Targets
You may want to pick one target and set some default parameters, which you can
then apply to all subsequent targets. Otherwise, you can pick all your targets and
then set their parameters individually.

Viewing the Well Path in Stratamodel

After you calculate the well path, it appears as an object in the Object
Manager. Various options in the Object Manager control how the well
path is labeled and displayed in Show Displays. To make it easier to
see any changes you make in label position,
1. Click on the Wellplan button in the Object Managers tab menu.
2. Toggle on the Draw Button to turn the well path display on or off.
3. Click on the Wellplan Labels button and when the Wellplan Label
Position popup menu appears, select the desired option.
To see the path and targets in Stratamodels Show Displays with or

without the 3D display of the geological structure, toggle the Model
Display button on or off.


area.
data.
If the Calculations button is set to Manual, click on the Calculate
button. The results are shown in Wellbore Planners spreadsheet, and
the well path itself is shown graphically in Stratamodel and in any of
Wellbore Planners viewing windows that are open. If any of the
above parameters is changed, recalculate the well plan. Optionally, the
Calculations button can be set to Automatic, and any change in the
parameters will trigger recalculation.

In Wellbore Planner, you can make many types of modifications to the
calculated well path, including the following:
move the targets graphically in the Plan View or Section view
windows (page 128)
modify target angles or penetration points with Plans Snap
Target (page 136)
You cannot edit the well path from within Stratamodel at this time.

Completing Work on the Well Plan
Saving a Well Plan to the OpenWorks Database as a Well

database. The new well is linked to the originating well plan, and is
available to StratWorks and to all OpenWorks applications. You can
also save a line of section (LOS) to OpenWorks for use in StratWorks.
Currently, the OpenWorks database does not have a separate category
for Wellbore Planner plans, so the well plan is stored as a standard
well position log. The Status is set to Location. If the Time/Depth
Server window is open, and a time-depth velocity model is selected,
Wellbore Planner records that information in the database.
To save a well plan to the OpenWorks database, see the topic Saving
a Well Plan as an OpenWorks Well beginning on page 175.
How a Well Plan Is Written to the OpenWorks Database

Saving Well Plans

To save the well plan with all its data and targets in Wellbore Planner,
move to the main window and click on the Save button. When you
save the well plan, the Wellbore Planner project file that contains the
well plan is also saved.
You can also save all the well plans and targets in the current Wellbore
Planner project file by using the File Save or File Save As
options.
Exporting a Well Plan in Other Formats

To save a Wellbore Planner well plan in a format that other
applications can read, select File Export. See Exporting Well
Plans and Projects on page 170.
Exporting a Well Plan as an ASCII File

To export the well plan with all its data and targets to a specified
ASCII file, select File Export ASCII. (For convenience, use the
.depth.wbp extension for well plans in depth and the .time.wbp
extension for well plans in time.)
The resulting file contains the x, y, z values for the targets and the
engineering values generated when you calculated the computed well
plan. The file uses the same format as Compass, Landmarks well
planning product for the PC.

Integrating with Other Applications
Overview
Wellbore Planner provides an ASCII connection to several products.
You can export Wellbore Planner files in formats that can be read by
the following applications:
COMPASS for Windows

StratWorks
VIP
Z-MAP Plus
This section discusses how Wellbore Planner interacts with

StratWorks and COMPASS for Windows.
R2003.12 Integrating with Other Applications 331

Using StratWorks with Wellbore Planner
StratWorks is integrated with Wellbore Planner in the following ways:
As an OpenWorks application, StratWorks can read in any proposed

well written to the OpenWorks database by Wellbore Planner.
Proposed wells are distinguished from actual wells with a special
status and symbol.
Wellbore Planner can generate a line of section (LOS) along the

proposed well path. This LOS can be used in StratWorks MapView
and Cross Section.
Seeing the Well in StratWorks Cross Section
The well must be saved in the OpenWorks database before it can be projected
onto the LOS. To see the well in StratWorks Cross Section, use StratWorks
MapViews CrossSections Create Well Projection to project it onto the
LOS, then view using the Cross Section application.
You can write out Wellbore Planner targets as Free Form

Annotation files for display in StratWorks MapView or Cross
Section. Free Form Annotation files are specific to the LOS
described in the previous bullet.
Whenever you move your cursor in Wellbore Planners Redline

View window, you see the cursor position tracked in the StratWorks
MapView window. In addition, if you drag targets in Wellbore
Planners Plan View or Section View windows, you see the cursor
movements tracked in the StratWorks MapView window.
Refer to the StratWorks Mapping and Cross Sections manual for

further information.
Saving a Well Plan to the OpenWorks Database as a Well

database. The new well is linked to the originating well plan, and is
available to StratWorks and to all OpenWorks applications. You can
also save a line of section (LOS) to OpenWorks for use in StratWorks.

Currently, the OpenWorks database does not have a separate category

for Wellbore Planner plans, so the well plan is stored as a standard
well position log. The Status is set to Location. If the Time/Depth
Server window is open, and a time-depth velocity model is selected,
Wellbore Planner records that information in the database.
To save a well plan to the OpenWorks database, see the topic Saving
a Well Plan as an OpenWorks Well beginning on page 175.
How a Well Plan Is Written to the OpenWorks Database
Saving a Line of Section to the OpenWorks Database

To save a line of section (LOS) to the OpenWorks database, select
Plans Write LOS to OpenWorks in Wellbore Planners main
window. This action saves an LOS along the well path of the selected
well plan for use as across section in StratWorks MapView and Cross
Section applications. Selecting the Write LOS to OpenWorks option
brings up the Write LOS to OpenWorks dialog box.
The name of the selected well plan becomes the default name of the
LOS. To change the default, highlight the name and enter a different
one. When you click on OK, the LOS is saved to the OpenWorks
database.
For information on using the LOS in StratWorks, see Using
StratWorks with Wellbore Planner on page 332 or refer to the
StratWorks Mapping and Cross Sections manual.

Using COMPASS for Windows
The link between COMPASS and Wellbore Planner bridges the gap
between the geologist and the drilling engineer. Using Wellbore
Planner, the geologist can define targets based upon both geological
interpretation and engineering constraints. He can then export this
information to an ASCII file that a drilling engineer can import into
COMPASS. Likewise, the engineer can export units, target location,
geometry, Wellbore Planner color data, and well plan information
from COMPASS to a file that Wellbore Planner can read. See below.
COMPASS / Wellbore Planner workflow

Determine the geographic location of the well
Launch Wellbore Planner (or one of the integrated

applications) and design the well path. (This requires
specifying the kickoff depth, the build angle, and drop
Geologist
rate angle, the well path drift and direction, the targets,
engineering parameters, and the redline parameters.)
This process may take several iterations.
When the well plan is complete, export the data to an

ASCII file with the .depth.wbp extension and send it to
the drilling engineer.
The drilling engineer imports the ASCII file into

COMPASS, and reviews the well path. Corrects the path
to ensure minimal wear and tear on tubing and casing,
as well as, economic viability.
Drilling Engineer
The drilling engineer develops a design document and

sends the revised well path back to the geologist.
Upon approval of the design document, the engineer

drills the well.
Based upon logging information received during drilling,

the engineer corrects the well path model to fit
formation shifts.

Importing Wellbore Planner Files into COMPASS

COMPASS can import data from Wellbore Planner and selectively
import OpenWorks well trajectories. Wellbore Planner Import brings
in WBP-format files from Wellbore Planner.
You can import a well plan created in Wellbore Planner into

COMPASS for Windows for further refinement.
To import Wellbore Planner files into COMPASS, follow these steps:
1. FTP the WBP-format file to the COMPASS computer.
2. In COMPASS, select File Import Wellbore Planner.
3. In the dialog box that appears, select the Wellbore Planner file
(*.wbp) you wish to open. Keep these rules in mind:
If you are going to move the data to an existing Company, Field,

or Site, open these data fields before import.
If the import will not interfere with existing data, open a new
company.
If you are importing to an existing site, you are asked to

indicate which type of data you wish to import
Select To Import
All Data All data
WP Plans Wellbore Planner plans only
OW Wells OpenWorks well surveys
If a site is already chosen, you will see the following message:

Importing file xxxx.wbp to site yyyy, hit
OK to continue.
If the map coordinates contained in the Wellbore Planner file

are not compatible, you will view the message:
Well xxxx has strange starting coordinates.
While this data will still import, you should review it before
proceeding.

Exporting Wellbore Planner Files from COMPASS

You can export a file from COMPASS in the Wellbore Planner format
so that it can be read by another OpenWorks family application, such
as OpenVision.
What happens to my directional survey when I import a COMPASS

ASCII file?
When Wellbore Planner imports a COMPASS ASCII file containing a

directional survey and a well plan which references the directional survey, a
WBP plan is created for the COMPASS well plan but not the directional survey.
The plan is created in Wellbore Planner as a sidetrack, and the spreadsheet
information for the well plan is complete with the first point of the directional
survey added to the top of the plan.
To retain and use directional survey information, you can
use the ASCII file as a data store and keep the survey as a Compass Well
use the live link to create an OpenWorks well
in COMPASS, export the directional survey in DirSur format and import it
using OpenWorks Curve Data Loader
in COMPASS, export the survey in User Defined format and import it to the
database through Wellbore Planner; note that this will cause the TurnPoint
generation, loss of survey precision, and other problems.
To export a COMPASS file for use in Wellbore Planner, follow these

steps:
1. In the COMPASS application, open the Customer, Field, and Site

that interests you.
2. From the COMPASS main menu, select File Export

Wellbore Planner. The program asks for the name and destination
location of the export file.
3. In the dialog box that appears, select the Wellbore Planner file you
wish to open.
4. FTP the file from the computer that is running the COMPASS
application to the UNIX system where your Wellbore Planner files
reside.
Refer to the COMPASS for Windows Users Guide for further

information.

Using COMPASS Survey Tool Definitions in Wellbore Planner
You can import COMPASS survey tool definition files into Wellbore Planners
Tools dialog box, for use in calculating Wellbore Planner well position
uncertainty ranges. (For more information, see page 264.)

Workflows, Strategies, and Tips
Overview
This section provides instructions and tips for using Wellbore Planner
to plan common types of wells, to plan a platform well, and to
calculate a well path for simulation.
Building Well Plans
The examples used in this section show how to build some basic well plans using
Wellbore Planner alone. However, if you also use one of the integrated OpenWorks
family applications (such as EarthCube, Stratamodel, StratWorks, Seisworks, or
OpenVision), you can pick well plan targets in the integrated application.
Whats in This Chapter?

Creating and Working in Well Plans
Creating Well Plans on page 339
Setting a Targets Parameters on page 340
Setting the Well Plan Parameters on page 342
Planning Wells of Standard Types
Planning a Straight Well on page 344
Planning a Ramp Well (Build and Hold Well) on page 345
Planning a Continuous Build Well on page 347
Planning an S-shaped Well on page 347
Planning a Two-Target Well on page 350
Planning a Dual Kickoff Well on page 352
Planning a Horizontal Well on page 353
Planning a Platform Well Project
Setting Up a Platform Well Project on page 355
Optimizing the Platform Location Manually on page 357
Using Automatic Platform Location Optimization on
page 362
Monitoring a Wells Progress
Using the Look Ahead Feature on page 365
Reacting to Changes in Structural Interpretation on page 367
Reacting to Changes in the Velocity Model on page 367
Calculating a Well Path for Simulation
R2003.12 Workflows, Strategies, and Tips 338

Creating and Working in Well Plans
This workflow is divided into three basic phases:

Creating Well Plans describes each well plan type, and provides a
reference to the step-by-step instruction topic for each one.
Setting a Targets Parameters describes how to set the target
parameters.
Setting the Well Plan Parameters is a step-by-step guide to setting
the general well planning parameters that affect the calculations for
the well plan path.
Creating Well Plans

You can create well plans that are based on any of these starting
location types:
Unknown A well plan with an unknown location consists of a series
of targets that are not associated with a particular surface location or
with any existing well. The well path begins at the first target. (See
Creating an Unknown Type of Well Plan beginning on page 60.)
Surface Well The well path begins at a surface location (a location
that you specify or one recommended by Wellbore Planner). (See
Creating a Surface Well Plan beginning on page 61.)
Sidetrack The well path begins at a kickoff point on an OpenWorks
well or on a parent well plan in the Wellbore Planner project. You can
specify the kickoff point or use one recommended by Wellbore
Planner. (See Creating a Sidetrack Well Plan beginning on page 63.)
Look Ahead The well path begins at the bottom of an OpenWorks
parent well. Wellbore Planner calculates the path from the OpenWorks
well to the look ahead well plans targets. (See Creating a Look
Ahead Well Plan beginning on page 67.)
Complex Extension The well path begins at the bottom of an
existing well or well plan. With a complex extension well plan, you
can plan a well that has different parameters applied to each section of
the well path. (See Creating a Complex Extension Well Plan
Platform Location This type of well plan identifies the coordinates
of the platform location for the platform wells in the well planning
project. This type of well plan has no targets. (See Creating a
Platform Location beginning on page 71.)

Platform Well The well path begins at a specified measured depth

below the well planning projects platform location. (See Creating a
Platform Well beginning on page 74.)
Setting a Targets Parameters

Follow the steps below to set a targets parameters. (You can also set
target parameters, then save the current settings to be used as defaults.
1. Click on the Edit button in the Wellbore Planner main window.

The Target Editor window appears.
2. Select File New in the Target Editor window. A set of cross hairs
and a target name appear in the display area.
The values in the X, Y, and Z(Subsea) boxes specify the position of
the target in real world coordinates. You can create new targets and
enter coordinates manually in these fields. You can also pick target
points in the Plan View and Section View windows, and the target
coordinates appear in the Target Editor window. If you pick target
positions in integrated applications (such as OpenVision,
EarthCube, SeisWorks or StrataModel), the target coordinate values
are broadcast to Wellbore Planner, and those target coordinates also
appear in these fields.
3. Click on the Shape button and select a target shape from the drop-
down option list. (Target parameters are context-sensitive for
example, if you make a shape selection, the appropriate options
appear so you can define the shape.)
Specify a target shape that conforms to the structure that you want
the well path to penetrate. If you want to restrict the driller to a
single point, make the target a point. If you want to allow the driller
a margin of error, make the target a circle, ellipse, rectangle, or
irregular shape. (If you want to be able to optimize target location
by using the snap target feature or the Penetration Point Optimizer
dialog box, you must assign a shape other than a point to targets.)
The specified target shape and color apply to the way the target
appears in Wellbore Planner and in other integrated applications.

4. Specify the engineering parameters for the selected target shape.

Use the following guidelines:
For a circle, enter a radius in the Radius 1 box.

For an ellipse or rectangle, specify two radii one for the
width and one for the length in the Radius 1 and Radius 2
boxes.
Specify the radii as the permissible margin of error in real-
world measurement units. For example, if your units are feet
and you want to allow a margin of error of 100 feet, specify
100. If you want the well path to enter the target at point that is
offset from the targets center, specify the offset values in the X
Offset and Y Offset boxes.
To apply a particular inclination to the target, specify the

appropriate value in the Dip box.
If you want the target to point in a particular direction, specify

the appropriate azimuth value in the Azimuth box.
If you want the well path to be perpendicular to the target, click

on the Opt. Align Angle button, and select Locked from the
drop-down menu.
5. Assign a color to the target by performing the following steps:

a. Click on the Color button.
The Select Target Color dialog box appears.
b. In the Select Target Color dialog box, click on the appropriate
color, and click on OK.
6. If you want to apply the target parameters to the targets you create
during the current Wellbore Planner session, select File
Set Defaults in the Target Editor window.
Wellbore Planner is set to assign the new default target parameters
to new targets you create in Wellbore Planner or in integrated
applications that you run. (Location parameters are not included in
the default parameter set.)
You may want to set custom parameters for each target that you
generate. You can set the parameters in the Target Editor window
before you create the target, or you can adjust the target parameters
after you create the target.

Setting the Well Plan Parameters

By applying different well planning parameters, you can generate
more than one well plan from the same set of targets. You set the well
planning parameters in the bottom panel of the Wellbore Planner main
window.
Step 1: Select a Calculation Method

Click on the Method button, and select an option from the drop-down
list in order to specify the type of wellbore calculation to be
performed. Choose from these options:
Curve Only Use a splining algorithm to connect all targets with

curved well sections.
Curve and Hold Generate a well plan that consists of a series of
curve-straight line sequences. The curves steer the wellbore
toward the targets. The straight lines intersect the targets.
Optimum Align Generate a well plan that consists of a series of

curve-straight line-curve sequences. The wellbore begins with a
curve at the kickoff point, followed by a straight line, followed by a
curve that intersects the first target. This pattern is repeated for each
target except the last, which is connected to the preceding target by
a straight line only. The calculation forces the wellbore to intersect
all locked targets at an angle of 90 degrees.
Step 2: Specify a Target Sorting Order

Use the Sort button to select the target sequence that you want to use
for the well plan calculation. You have the following options:
None Connects the targets in the order they appear in the

Selected column of the Wellbore Planner main window.
Depth Connects the targets in descending depth order.
Distance Connects the targets in the order of proximity to the

surface location. (This sorting order uses the targets x and y
coordinates only. It ignores the z coordinates.)
Optimal Connects the targets that are closest to one another.

(This sorting order uses the targets x, y, and z coordinates.)

The starting point for the sort is determined by the well plan location.
A surface well plan begins at the surface location.
A sidetrack well plan begins at the kickoff point for the sidetrack.
A look ahead well plan begins at the bottom of the parent well.
A well plan with no surface location or kickoff point begins with
the target that is nearest to the surface.
Step 3: Specify a Dogleg Severity Value

If you use the Curve and Hold or Optimum Align well path
calculation method, specify a value for dogleg severity in the Dogleg
Severity box. The dogleg severity value specifies the largest allowable
angle of deviation for the wellbore. If you are working with feet as the
depth measurement units, specify this value in degrees per 100 feet. If
you are working with meters as the depth measurement units, specify
this value in degrees per 30 meters.
Step 4: Calculate the Well Plan

If the Calculations button is set to Manual, click on the Calculate
button (shown at left). (If the Calculations button is set to Automatic,
you do not have to prompt Wellbore Planner to make the calculations.)
Wellbore Planner calculates a well plan and posts the well plan data in
the Wellbore Planner main window spreadsheet. If you have selected
Depth, Distance, or Optimal for the Sort button option, the targets
are reordered accordingly. The new target order appears in the
Selected list of the Wellbore Planner main window.

Planning Wells of Standard Types
This topic presents some general instructions for planning different

types of wells.
Planning a Straight Well

Although Wellbore Planner is primarily designed for planning
directional wells, you can also use it to plan a straight well.
To plan a straight well, follow these steps:
1. Create a new well plan, by selecting Plans New in the Wellbore

2. Choose a target for the bottomhole location. Display the Target

Editor window by selecting Tools Target Editor in the Wellbore
Planner main window. To create a new target, select File New in
the Target Editor window. To select an existing target, select a target
name from the Available list in the Wellbore Planner main window.
3. In the Wellbore Planner main window, click on the Method button

and select Curve Only from the drop-down option list.
4. Click on the Type button and select Surface Well from the drop-
down option list. This sets the starting point for the well plan.
Change the Elevation value to the desired surface elevation.
Change the Kickoff Point (MD) value to 0.0 to prevent the
well path from deviating from vertical.

5. Click on the Calculate button to calculate the well path (if the
Calculations button is set to Manual). Your straight well should
look like the following one:
Straight Well
You can also plan a straight well with no targets, just by specifying a
plan type and specifying the kickoff depth as the TD (total depth).
Planning a Ramp Well (Build and Hold Well)

A ramp well is the most basic type of directional well plan. It can be
divided into three sections:
Top hole: a straight section of well between the surface location
and the kickoff point.
Build: the section of the well in which the angle of inclination
increases until it reaches the desired inclination along your desired
azimuth.
Hold: the section of the well that continues at the same inclination
and azimuth to the total depth (TD).
To build a ramp well

2. Choose a target for the bottomhole location. Display the Target
Editor window by selecting Tools Target Editor in the Wellbore
Planner main window. To create a new target, select File New in
the Target Editor window. To select an existing target, select a target
name from the Available list in the Wellbore Planner main window.


and select either Optimum Align or Curve and Hold from the
drop-down option list.
down menu.
5. The default surface location is located over the first target, so you
must modify the location. A good way to do this is to use the
Recommend Location option. Click on the button under the Hold
Angle button, and select Recommend Location from the drop-
down list.
6. Enter the desired build rate value in the Dogleg Severity box.
7. Click on the Calculate button (if the Calculations button is set to

Manual). Check the results in the Redline View window. Modify
the well plan as needed.
Ramp Well

Planning a Continuous Build Well

You create a continuous build well by using the same basic procedure
that you used for a ramp well. In place of step three, however, click on
the Method button, and choose Curve Only from the drop-down list.
Calculate the path, then check the results in the Redline View window.
Continuous Build Well
Planning an S-shaped Well

S-shaped wells add a drop section to a ramp well, which makes the
completion interval vertical or nearly vertical.
There are three methods you can use to plan an S-shaped well,
depending on whether you want a straight section at the bottom of the
well, and whether you require a target at the bottomhole location.
Planning an S-shaped Well with No Straight Section at the Bottom
To plan an S-shaped well with no straight section at the bottom:

2. Select or create a target for the bottomhole location. In the Target

Editor window, set the Opt. Align Angle button to Locked for the
new target.

and select Optimum Align from the drop-down option list. (Note
that the target lock is only applied if you set the Method button to

Optimum Align and the Opt. Align Angle for the target, in Target
Editor, to Locked. If the Locked option is selected for any other
Method, it will have no effect.)
down option list.
5. Enter a value in the Hold Angle box
6. Have Wellbore Planner recommend a starting location. Click on the

button under the Hold Angle button, and select Recommend
Location from the drop-down list.
7. Enter a build rate value in the Dogleg Severity box.

.
S-Shaped Well with No Straight Section at the Bottom
Planning an S-shaped Well with a Straight Section,

But with No Bottomhole Target
To plan an S-shaped well with a straight section but no bottomhole
target, follow these steps:
1. Follow steps 1 through 8 for the approach described on page 347.
2. Extend the path of your well by specifying a depth for the straight
section: enter a value in the Extend box at the bottom of the main
window.


S-shaped Well with a Straight Section and No Bottomhole Target
Planning an S-shaped Well with a Straight Section and a Bottomhole Target

To plan an S-shaped well with a bottomhole target:
1. Follow steps 1 through 8 in the approach described on page 347,

except in step 2, set the Opt. Align Angle button to Unlocked for
the new target.
2. In the Target Editor window, copy the active target (by selecting
File Copy As). This creates a copy of the target under a different
name.
3. When the Save Target As dialog box appears, enter a name for the
copy and change the z value of the new target to the desired
bottomhole subsea elevation.
4. In the Wellbore Planner main window, add the new target to the
well plan. (Click on the new target in the Available list to move it to
the Selected list.) Keep the same surface location parameters you
set for the first target.


S-shaped Well with Straight Section and Bottomhole Target
Planning a Two-Target Well

The convention for a two-target well is to have all of the building and
turning occur before the well hits the first target, so that the well is
straight between the two targets. To design a two-target well:

2. Choose two targets. Display the Target Editor window by selecting

Tools Target Editor in the Wellbore Planner main window. To
create a new target, select File New in the Target Editor window.
To select an existing target, click on a target name from the
Available list in the Wellbore Planner main window.
3. In the Target Editor window, click on the Opt. Align Angle button
and select Unlocked from the drop-down list.
select Surface Well from the drop-down list.
5. Request a recommendation for the location and kickoff point, or

enter your own values in the fields provided.
To request recommendations, click on the button under the Hold
Angle box, and select one of the appropriate options (described
below) from the drop-down list.:

Recommend Location If you provide a kickoff point, a hold

angle, an elevation, and a sequence of targets, Wellbore Planner
suggests optimum x and y values. The hold angle is the angle at the
end of the first build section, the point at which the well path
intersects the well plans first target.
Recommend Kickoff Point If you provide x and y coordinates,
an elevation, a hold angle, and a sequence of targets, Wellbore
Planner suggests an optimum kickoff point.

and select Optimum Align from the drop-down option list.
Using Reference Targets
Often a basic two-target well is designed with one or more intermediate targets
along the straight section to indicate penetrations of various horizons. If you
want to have these intermediate targets in your well plan, it best to make them
reference targets, so that the intermediate targets penetration points do not
affect the calculations for the well path. Otherwise the extra targets could cause
the Optimum Align algorithm to fail. (For more information, see Using
Reference Targets beginning on page 131.)

Two-Target Well

Planning a Dual Kickoff Well

Dual kickoff wells are commonly used to avoid obstacles. A dual
kickoff well starts out as an S-shaped well. At the bottom of the
S section, however, the well path kicks off again to penetrate one or
more targets by using one of the well designs described in previous
topics (a ramp well is often used). A dual kickoff well can be difficult
to design, but you can do it with Wellbore Planner.
To design a dual kickoff well:
1. Create a new plan for an S-shaped well using the calculation

method you prefer. Create two or more new targets if necessary.
2. Make sure the Calculations button is set to Manual.
3. Click on the Calculate button.
4. If the initial section of the well plan does not extend far enough,
enter a value into the Extend box equal to the distance you want to
extend the well path.
5. Create a second well plan, and make it a complex extension of the

first well plan.
6. Click on the Method button again and select an option from the
drop-down menu:
Curve Only for a continuous build well
Curve and Hold for a ramp well
Optimum Align for a two-target well or an S-shaped well
(Note that you can only lock targets in the Target Editor
window if you set the Method button to Optimum Align.
For an S-shaped well, make sure the targets Opt. Align Angle
button is set to Locked in the Target Editor window.)

7. If the targets are not listed in the correct order in the Selected list,
make sure you sort the target list. (See Sorting Targets on
page 146.)
8. Click on the Calculate button and check the results in the Redline
View window. Modify the well plan as needed.
Dual Kickoff Well
Planning a Horizontal Well

Horizontal wells do not usually require any special treatment other
than occasionally using a higher build rate (and dogleg severity) than
you typically allow when building to horizontal.
To create a horizontal well with a higher than normal build rate:
1. Create a ramp or continuous build well by using a deep kickoff

point, a high dogleg severity, and including only the first target.
Calculate the results.
2. Create a second well plan and make it a complex extension of the

first well plan.
3. Make sure the Calculations button is set to Manual.

4. If necessary, adjust the value in the Dogleg Severity box to

whatever value you want for the next target.
5. Enter a value in the Extend box to extend the path to the next
target.
6. Select the next target.
7. Click on the Calculate button. Check the results in the Redline

View window.
8. Repeat steps 3 through 5 as many times as necessary to hit all the

remaining targets.
Horizontal Well

Planning a Platform Well Project
This topic gives you step-by-step instructions about how to create a

project that contains well plans based on a platform location, and how
to use Wellbore Planner to manually and automatically optimize the
location of the platform.
Setting Up a Platform Well Project

This first phase of the exercise walks you through typical steps for
designing a new well plan project based on a platform location. Follow
these steps to create a new project, add well plans, and pick targets in
OpenVision:
1. Set up an integrated work session with an application (in the
OpenWorks family) that you plan to use for choosing your new
projects targets. For this exercise, set up an integrated OpenVision /
Wellbore Planner work session and select some targets in
OpenVision to include in your project. (This process is described in
the section, Integrating with OpenVision and StratWorks 3D,
2. Create a new Wellbore Planner project by selecting File New in

the Wellbore Planner main window (as described on page 50).
3. Create an initial well plan for the project by selecting Plans New
(as described on page 55). The New Plan dialog box appears. Set
up the well plan in this way:
In the New Plan dialog box, name the well plan Alpha-1, then
click on OK.
In the Wellbore Planner main window, click on the Type
button, and select the Surface Well option from the drop-down
list (as described on page 61).
Check these surface location specifications and make any
needed changes: X Coordinate, Y Coordinate, Elevation,
Kickoff Point, and Hold Angle (as described on page 61).
Set up redline parameters for the project in the Redline
Parameter Spreadsheet dialog box (as described on page 101).
(If you do not set redline parameters, Wellbore Planner uses the
most recent parameters you specified for a well plan in any
project, or uses default values.)
Do not select any targets for the Alpha-1 well plan at this time.

4. Open the Plan View window by selecting Views Plan in the

Wellbore Planner main window. (As you add targets and well plans
to your project, you will see them appear in the Plan View window.)
You may need to select viewing options to display all targets and all
plans. (To change the active viewing options, select Views
Options in the Wellbore Planner main window and make sure All
Targets and All Plans are selected.)
5. Create a second well plan, and name it Alpha. Click on the Type
button and select Platform Location as Alphas plan type.
Notice that when you make Alpha a platform location plan, it
inherits platform location coordinates from the projects surface
well plan, Alpha-1.
6. Make Alpha-1 the active well plan again by clicking on its name in
the Plans list. Change Alpha-1s plan type to Platform Well.
Alpha-1 is set to be a platform well, and the right side of the
Wellbore Planner window displays platform well fields and options,
7. Set up Alpha-1 in this way:

In the Platform list, click on Alpha to select the Alpha platform
location as the one you want to use as the basis for the active
well plan.
Alpha-1 becomes a collateral plan for (a plan based on) the
Alpha platform location plan.
Set the Kick Off Depth.

Select some targets to add to Alpha-1. If you have already

created some unassigned targets in OpenVision, you can click
on these target names in the Available list of the Wellbore
Planner main window. You can also add targets to the active
well plan by picking new targets in OpenVision.
To make the targets easier to see, set the targets you have
created as shapes (not as points) in the Target Editor window
(page 120). (To display the Target Editor window, select
Tools Target Editor.)
8. Create three more well plans for platform wells. Name them
Alpha-2, Alpha-3, and Alpha-4. Set up the well plans the same way
you set up Alpha-1 in the last step.
You now have five well plans in the Plans list of the Wellbore
Planner main window. The Alpha well plan identifies the platform
location for the four collateral platform well plans, Alpha-1 through
Alpha-4. You are ready to begin the next phase of the exercise, and
manually optimize the platform location.
Optimizing the Platform Location Manually

Follow these steps in this phase of the exercise to explore ways to
manually optimize the platform location for your project well plans.
1. Make sure the Plan View window is still open.

2. Set the Calculations button to Automatic in the Wellbore Planner
main window. (This enables you to immediately see the effect of
changes you make. If you leave the Calculations button on
Manual, remember to recalculate whenever you make a change.)
3. Select Alpha as the active well plan in the Wellbore Planner main
window, then change the x and y coordinates displayed in the
Wellbore Planner main window for the platform location (as shown
in the illustration that follows).

You can enter new values from the keyboard, or use the arrow
buttons to adjust the coordinates incrementally. You can also use
the mouse to drag the platform location in the Plan View or Section
View window. (To drag the platform location, first make the
Move Target platform location plan the active well plan, click on the Move
button Target button near the windows upper left corner, then use Button
1 to drag the platform location.)
4. Set the Calculations button to Automatic in the Wellbore Planner

main window.
The Plan View window and other windows you have displayed
(such as the OpenVision 3D View window) show all the platform
well plans move as you move the platform location. This visual
feedback helps you find a logical place for the platform location.
In addition, the Platform Monitor information box appears
automatically and displays information about how the new platform
location affects parameters for the collateral well plans (as shown in
the illustration that follows).

The Platform Monitor appears whenever you recalculate a platform

location plan that has more than one collateral well plan. (That is, it
appears when you alter a platform location that is the basis for
multiple well plans of these types: platform wells, sidetracks, or
complex extensions.) You use the Platform Monitor to see how the
changed platform location has affected the collateral well plans,
and see whether you want to change individual well plans or change
the platform location again.
These types of summary information appear at the top of the
Platform Monitor information box:
Number of Plans the number of collateral well plans in the
project that are based on the active platform location (the
number of plans summarized in the Platform Monitor
information box)
Cumulative MD the total amount of measured depth (also
known as along hole depth) for the group of collateral well
plans
Cumulative Directional the total amount of directional
drilling required to complete all the collateral well plans
Average DLS the average of the collateral well plans
dogleg severity, calculated as a percentage by comparing actual
dogleg severity data with the redline parameters set for your
well planning project in the Redline Parameter Spreadsheet
dialog box. (If you do not specify redline parameters for your
project, Wellbore Planner uses your most recently specified

redline parameters, or uses default values, if you have never

specified any redline parameters.)
Average Reach the average of the collateral well plans
reach (Reach is a straight-line measurement of the distance
from the well platforms starting location to the bottom hole
location.)
Color Coding in the Platform Monitor Information Box
The values for summary information in the Platform Monitor information box
are color coded to show whether the newly calculated value is increased (red),
decreased (green), or has remained unchanged (black).
The color coded values that initially appear are quickly replaced by values in
black text under these circumstances: You have set Wellbore Planner to
automatically calculate changes, and you move the platform location by
dragging it in the Plan View or Section View window. As you drag the
platform location, color coded values appear in the Platform Monitor, but as
you release the mouse button Wellbore Planner recalculates the values and
displays them in black in the Platform Monitor.
Color coding persists in the Platform Monitor if you change the platform
location by altering the coordinates in the Wellbore Planner main window, or
if you manually recalculate (instead of calculating automatically).
The Platform Monitor information box also contains a spreadsheet

that presents data for the collateral well plan with the highest value
for each of seven attributes. The first column identifies the attribute
(described in the following text). The second column gives either
the highest absolute value found in a well plan (for the Directional
and Reach attributes) or the highest percentage of a well plans
redline value (for the other attributes). The third column identifies
the well plan that has the stated value.
All attribute values displayed as a percentage reflect the attribute
value in relation to the maximum allowable value for that attribute
(the redline value) as specified for the project in the Redline
Parameter Spreadsheet dialog box.
The spreadsheet attributes are:
Directional the length of the well path that requires
directional drilling (expressed as an absolute number in feet or
meters (depending on the depth measurement units specified
for your OpenWorks project)
Dogleg Severity the percentage of allowable dogleg
severity (DLS) in the well path
Build the percentage of allowable build rate in the well path

Drop the percentage of allowable drop rate in the well path

Turn the percentage of allowable turn rate in the well path
Inclination the percentage of allowable inclination in the
well path
Reach straight-line distance from the well platform starting
location to the bottom hole location (expressed as an absolute
number in feet or meters, depending on the surface
measurement units specified for your OpenWorks project)
The Platform Monitor information box closes when you change the
active well plan or click on the Close button.
Correcting for Redline Values

You can examine redline values for the active well plan in the Redline
View window. To display the Redline View window, select Views
Redline in the Wellbore Planner main window. (Choose one of the
platform well plans and make sure at least one target is selected for the
plan.)
The Redline View window appears and displays the active well plans
specified engineering parameters, such as DLS, build, drop, and turn
rates (page 98). You can specify which parameters appear in the
window, as described on page 101.
Correct the platform location or well plans to eliminate values that
exceed redline values. You can change the platform location as
described on page 358. As you move the platform,Wellbore Planner
recalculates the location of all the platform wells and displays the
results in the Platform Monitor. Once the platform location is
established, you can correct for any problems you still have in
individual well plans by moving targets, optimizing target penetration
points, changing the calculation method for the well plan, or moving
the kickoff point.

Using Automatic Platform Location Optimization

Follow the steps in this final phase of the exercise to learn how to
automatically optimize the platform location for your project well
plans.
1. Make sure Alpha (the platform location well plan) is the active well
plan, then display the list of options for the optimization basis.
Display the drop-down option list by clicking on the button under
the Optimize based upon button (as shown in the illustration
below).
execution button for
automatic optimization
options for the basis

of optimization
2. Choose one of the options (described in the following table).

For each optimization basis, Wellbore Planner places the platform
location so as to achieve a particular aim for the collateral well
plans.
Optimization Basis Description of the Factor to Be Minimized

Cumulative MD Total measured depth (or along hole depth) of the well
plans added together.
Cumulative Directional Total amount of directional drilling required to complete
the well plans.
Average DLS Average rate of dogleg severity (DLS) for the well plans.
Average Reach Average reach (the straight-line distance from the well
platforms starting location to the bottom hole location).
In the exercise described in this topic, the average reach
is obtained by adding the four well plan reaches
together, then dividing this number by 4.

Optimization Basis Description of the Factor to Be Minimized

Maximum Directional Amount of directional drilling needed to complete the
well path that calls for the maximum amount of
directional drilling.
Maximum DLS Amount of DLS involved in the well plan that has the
highest DLS of any of the well plans (figured not as raw
data, but as the percentage of the well planning projects
redline DLS value).
Maximum Build Build rate for the well plan that has the highest build rate
of any of the well plans (figured as the percentage of the
well planning projects redline build rate).
Maximum Drop Drop rate for the well plan that has the highest drop rate
well planning projects redline drop rate).
Maximum Turn Turn rate for the well plan that has the highest turn rate
well planning projects redline turn rate).
Maximum Inclination Inclination for the well plan that has the highest rate of
inclination of any of the well plans (figured as the
percentage of the well planning projects redline
inclination rate.
Maximum Reach Longest reach for any of the well plans. (Also see
Average Reach.)
Weighted MD Multiple weighted factors for the well plans
(corresponding to redline parameter conformance,
cumulative MD, and cumulative directional drilling
required to complete the well plans). Landmark
Graphics recommends that you use Weighted MD as
the optimization basis for a typical project. The
weighting algorithm is described in the next topic.
3. Click on the Optimize based upon button.

4. If you have set the Calculations button to Manual in the Wellbore
Planner main window, click on the Calculate button.
Wellbore Planner calculates the optimum platform location on the
basis of the option you chose. The Platform Monitor information
box appears automatically and displays information about how the
new platform location affects parameters for the collateral well
plans (as described starting on page 358.)

Using Weighted MD to Optimize the Platform Location

Weighted MD is the basis Landmark Graphics recommends for
optimizing the platform location of a typical platform well planning
project. It is also the algorithm Wellbore Planner uses for calculating
mill outs (as described on page 66) and for optimizing penetration
points (as described on page 138). Wellbore Planner weights the
calculations by adding the following values for each turn section of the
well path:
For each turn section, add the measured length (ML).
If the section is directionally drilled, add the ML again.
If the sections inclination is greater than 90 degrees, add another 5
times the value of the ML.
For each redline parameter (other than inclination and cumulative
directional) violated in the turn section:
Add 2 times the ML
Add 20 times the percentage value that the redline value is over
the limit. (For example, if the section has a value of 110
percent of the allowable redline parameter, add 20 times 10 to
equal 200.)
Wellbore Planner calculates these weighted values for each turn

section of each of the associated well plans. Wellbore Planner then
searches for the platform location that minimizes the well plans
weighted MD.

Monitoring a Wells Progress
You can monitor the progress of a look ahead well as it is drilled, and
adapt to changes as they occur. This enables you to update the well
plan calculations so you can hit the remaining targets. This topic
describes some strategies for carrying out this type of real-time
geosteering.
Select or create the well file first.
When you select OpenWorks wells they are considered part of your well planning
project and saved as part of the current project file. If you select the OpenWorks
wells first, then open or create a new project, the wells will be cleared out in the
same way as your targets and plans. Consequently, you must select or create a
Wellbore Planner project before selecting the OpenWorks wells you are going to
use.
Using the Look Ahead Feature

Begin monitoring your well by using the Look Ahead feature as
follows:
1. Create or select a plan that represents the well path being followed
by the OpenWorks well (the well being drilled).
2. Select the OpenWorks well you want to monitor, and add it to the
Wellbore Planner project, as described on page 63.
Unable to Convert Units

If a warning appears that reports a mismatch between the OpenWorks project
surface measurement units and Wellbore Planners measurement units,
remember to check the units setting that appears in the lower right corner of the
To check the current measurement system for the OpenWorks session, display
OpenWorks Well Data Manager window. (Select Data Management
Well Data Manager in the OpenWorks Command Menu.) If you have
changed the OpenWorks measurement system since you launched Wellbore
Planner, relaunch Wellbore Planner to reset its measurement units to match
those in OpenWorks.
3. In the Wellbore Planner main window, click on the Calculate

button and select Automatic from the drop-down menu.

4. Click on the Type button and select Look Ahead from the drop-
down list.
The well you added to the well planning project appears in the
Look Ahead list.
Selected well
appears here.
5. Highlight the name of the well in the Look Ahead list.

Wellbore Planner calculates the well plan, and displays the well
path data in the Wellbore Planner main window spreadsheet, and in
the Plan View, Section View, and 3D View windows.
An algorithm automatically makes any targets that are penetrated
by an OpenWorks well in reference targets, so that the recalculated
plan does not double back to repenetrate those targets.
6. As it becomes available, load the actual survey data that comes

from the well being drilled into the OpenWorks database. Wellbore
Planner uses this data to recalculate the well plan from the last
surface point through the remaining targets to TD (total depth).
7. Examine the Redline View window to see if it is still feasible to hit

the remaining targets.
If it is not feasible to hit the remaining targets, you can make one or
more of the targets into reference targets to see if an altered plan
will penetrate the targets in some manner. (For more information,
see Using Reference Targets on page 131.)
Another option is to adjust targets and/or the penetration points. If
your well is close to a target without having actually penetrated it,
the proximity may blow the planning algorithm even though you
are on course to hit it. In this case, make the problem target into a
reference target.

Reacting to Changes in Structural Interpretation

As additional drilling reports are added to the OpenWorks database in
the form of directional surveys or position logs, the well plan is
automatically recalculated (if it is the active plan and you are in
Automatic calculation mode).
Sometimes, if a target that is important to the success of the well

cannot be reached, it is necessary to back out a little and sidetrack:
1. Make sure the appropriate well plan is still active.

2. Click on the Type button and select Sidetrack from the drop-down
list.
3. Set the measured depth of the sidetrack well plan back to a point at
which the required target can be reached in a reasonable manner.
To monitor the sidetrack well plan with the look ahead well being
drilled, you must either create a new OpenWorks well from the
sidetrack well plan, or use the old well plan to which the sidetrack
drilling reports have been loaded.
Setting a Target to Be Ignored
If daily drilling reports show that the next target is now economically or technically
impossible to reach, you can either remove it or set it to be ignored during well plan
calculations by making it into a reference target. To do this, activate the target in
the Wellbore Planner main window, and click on the Reference button.
Reacting to Changes in the Velocity Model

Sometimes, in the course of drilling, information is discovered that
changes either the geological interpretation, the velocity model (the
file used to convert time-depth values), or both.
The key to handling any changes in the conversion of time to depth is

to make sure that the applications running with Wellbore Planner
accurately reflect the new interpretation. Once the conversion is again
considered correct, you can either move your targets or pick new ones,
using them in place of the old ones in the plan.You can then
recalculate your well plan as either a look ahead or sidetrack.

Once your targets are in the corrected depths, you can recalculate a
look ahead well plan that is likely to hit them. Unfortunately, the
changes to the velocity model are often severe enough to cause the
targets to be reevaluated.
(For information on changing time and depth selections in mid-
session, see Converting Time and Depth Domain Values on
page 155.)
Calculating a Well Path for Simulation

The general rule for picking targets for a proposed well path is the
fewer the better. In other words, choose the exact targets you wish to
hit and let Wellbore Planners algorithms determine the path between
them.
Well planners often create targets as a series of points that steer the
course of the well path, rather than create the actual drilling targets.
The reasoning is that there is no point in determining the drillability of
a well plan before a path has been determined to be productive.
It is recommended that you try to create a drillable well path before
you run a reservoir simulation application (such as VIP). If you run the
simulation first, and the well path proves to be productive, you must
modify the well path again in Wellbore Planner to make it drillable.
You then must rerun the simulation.
Here are a few further tips on preparing a path for simulation:
Set the DLS fairly high. This technique will improve performance
and increase the likelihood that the algorithm will succeed.
Set the Calculations button to Automatic, and watch the status of
the calculations while you build the well path. As soon as the
algorithm fails, try a corrective action before creating more targets.
Corrective actions could include changing calculation methods,
changing the DLS value, making the next-to-last target into a
reference target, or moving the last or next-to-last target. If you do
not notice that the algorithm has failed until you are well past the
point when the failure occurred, the target that initially caused the
problem could be difficult to find.
If you are using a large number of targets, turn off the other well
plans, non-plan targets, and target labels to improve graphic
performance. (For information on turning these components off, see
Working with Targets beginning on page 108.)

Appendix: Directional Drilling
Introduction
This section is a brief introduction to directional drilling and survey

measurement techniques. This material is not a complete reference on
these subjects. A large volume of literature is available for anyone
interested in learning more.
Directional drilling is the science of drilling a well in such a way that

the planned well path reaches the intended drilling and/or geological
targets. The well must be drilled precisely according to the planned
directional parameters specified for the well. If the well steers off
course, its trajectory must be redesigned and directed so as to get the
well back on track.
Your team can use different planning techniques to plan wells of

varying complexities. Your team can use different tools to drill and
survey the well so that it follows the well plan as closely as possible.
Origins of Directional Drilling
Directional drilling dates back to the earliest wells drilled. While

drilling at Spindletop Texas, resourceful drillers put wooden wedges
(called whipstocks) down wells to deviate (direct) them towards
nearby gushers. This practice was known as poaching. To prevent
poaching, laws were enacted that required wells to be located inside a
lease boundary. In addition, wells were required to be surveyed for
deviation (for example, by the Texas Railroad Commission).
Deviation and survey measurement methods made it possible to direct
wells under obstacles, such as cities, lakes, seas, mountains, shallow
gas reserves, and pipelines. Sidetrack wells are intentional deviations
from an existing well in order to get past fish (lost drillstring), to
correct an unwanted deviation in the original well, or to reduce drilling
costs by reusing an existing well.
R2003.12 Appendix: Directional Drilling 369

Blowout relief wells (started in the 1920s) required precision control

because drillers had to steer the relief well within a few feet of a
blowout well. This made it imperative to know the exact location of
both the blowout and the relief well. This need greatly encouraged
early survey instrument development. When surveyors determined that
the relief well was close to the blowout well, the drillers pumped in
cement in order to plug the formation and control the pressure. In
modern relief wells, magnetic ranging methods are used to accurately
position the relief well in relation to the blowout well.
Platform drilling eliminates the need for building multiple platform in
a particular drilling site. Drillers use a single template underneath the
platform to gain access to a reservoir at a number of points. Drillers
use deviated well paths to tap an extended area of the reservoir from a
compact drill site. Salt Dome drilling enables drillers to access traps
that form on the upthrown side of the plug. Drilling can be problematic
in these circumstances, because casing can be deformed by the plastic
salt, and because high pressure gas may be found at shallow depths.
Sidetracks are drilled from existing wells located in depleted reservoir
zones.
Deflections in the well path, whether planned or unplanned, are called
doglegs. Bit walk is the natural tendency for BHAs to steer off course
due to inherent characteristics and changes in geologic formation. The
planned well trajectory can be corrected to eliminate this effect and
keep the well on target.
Origins for Directional Drilling

Early Means of Directional Control
Oriented Drilling
Directional drilling began with the use of devices such as whipstocks
and with techniques such as jetting, rotary assemblies for maintaining
course, and wireline steering tools for drilling orientation and survey
readings.
A whipstock is a wooden wedge. It was the first widely used tool for
deflecting the wellbore trajectory. A whipstock was run and oriented
on the drill pipe. This caused the drill bit to deflect off the
whipstock if the whipstock was harder than the formation. The
effectiveness of the whipstock was further limited by the fact that fill
in the hole could seriously reduce its performance. In addition, drillers
had to have a great deal of experience in order to use whipstocks
effectively.
The fulcrum and pendulum are mechanical methods of increasing or

decreasing wellbore angle, in a section of wellbore that has been built
at an angle. All BHAs cause a side force to be exerted at the bit that
makes the bit build, drop, or hold angle, in addition to turning to the
right or left. Each type of BHA is designed to perform in a particular
manner. The fulcrum and pendulum technique relies on using
stabilizers of particular diameters and placing them precisely, so that
they will stand-off and pivot the collars and bit. This effect, coupled
with the natural turning characteristics of the various bit types, gave
drillers three-dimensional, rotary, directional control.
Keeping the well vertical is very difficult when dipping or hard

formations are involved. The weight that is applied to crush rock at the
bit buckles the pipe and causes deflection into the dip. Drillers use
heavy collars and pendulums to counteract these trends. Oklahoma
measured depths is an example. This is an early study to determine
the pipe depth required to reach the top reservoir. Some wells required
10 to 50 percent more pipe to reach the reservoir in so-called vertical
wells. This was because hard Okie formations required so much
weight to drill. The resulting large compressive forces caused buckling
in drill pipe, and resulted in deflection of the drillstring.
Jetting is used in soft formations (gumbo). The driller enlarges and

orients one nozzle in a tri-cone bit in order to create a rathole, and
drops the string into the rathole. This technique has been very
successful in the Gulf of Mexico, but it has had much less success in
the North Sea. Jetting uses the hydraulic energy of the drilling fluid to

erode a hole along a given azimuth. Then the driller drops the string
into the rathole. This jet and drop procedure is performed for 3 to 6
feet without rotating the bit, in order to establish the new direction.
Rotary drilling then proceeds until a survey is taken in order to verify
the new wellbore trajectory. The success of this technique is relative to
the formation drilled. Weakly cemented sandstones and oolitic
limestones are good candidates for jetting, but very soft or hard
formations fail. The jet blows away too much hole in soft formations,
and does not have sufficient power to make new hole in hard
formations. The primary advantage of jetting is that it can be
performed with the same BHA that is used for drilling.
Survey Measurement
The well path trajectory is tracked and steered by surveys, which
measure inclination and direction at various measured depths. Early
measurement tools included the acid bottle and punch card. These
were used to record inclination and show that the well had not
deviated. These tools are run on slick-line (steel wireline). To run the
acid tool, the surveyor poured hydrofluoric acid into a glass bottle,
which etched the bottle and showed the angle at which the bottle came
to rest. The punch card technique is the basis for the TOTCO tool used
for inclination measurement.
Magnetic and gyroscopic tools are used to record inclination and

direction. They use either a single or multishot timed camera or
sensitized paper to record stations for deviated wells. Gyros are
usually run on a conductor cable. The conductor cable supplies power
and can transmit readings to the surface. In some cases, gyros are
battery powered and are run on a wireline inside casing. Magnetic
multishot tools are run on a slick line, sand line (braided cable), or are
dropped inside non-magnetic collars and brought back to the surface as
the string is tripped.

The muleshoe ensures that the single shot survey tool is consistently
located inside the bottom of the BHA in relation to the bent sub, jetting
bit, whipstock wedge, undergauge stabilizer blade, or other tool used
for orienting the BHA. As the survey tool lands in the BHA, a stub in
the muleshoe landing ring (in pipe) draws the recess in the survey tool
spear point around so that the tool is seated in the direction of the tool
face. For quality control, a lead slug is put in the recess in order to
monitor the quality of the survey orientation. Marks in the slug
indicate whether the landing ring was seated correctly in the muleshoe
recess.
Early Means of Directional Control

Modern Directional Drilling
During the 1970s, directional drilling requirements escalated. Drilling

at platform sites designed to access large reservoir areas became more
complex as the fields matured. As wells were added, they had to be
safely directed around the existing producing and injecting wells.
During the 1980s and 1990s, directional drilling techniques and
equipment improved even more dramatically when the demand for
horizontal drilling increased. Large numbers of horizontal wells were
drilled though fractured limestone reservoirs, at a great savings in cost
over traditional vertical wells. The Austin Chalk in Texas and the
Cretaceous chalks in the North Sea drove development of horizontal
well drilling.
Extended Reach Drilling (ERD) wells with departures that exceed

twice the well TVD. Different classes of ERD wells have evolved,
based on increasing reach/TVD ratios. These include conventional
directional drilling (<2.0), ERD wells (>2.0) and severe ERD wells
(>3.0).
Drillers use modern equipment and techniques to drill wells with 10

km stepouts at only 1.5 km of depth. The best example of this is
Wytch Farm in southern England, where the Sherwood Sandstone
reservoir underlies the environmentally protected Poole Bay. Parts of
the target are problematic because the reservoir dips onshore so that
the wells must hit the target downdip, build, then drill up through the
reservoir. These extended wells have been used as a test site for some
of the emerging technologies described in this section.
Horizontal wells were pioneered in fractured chalk reservoirs. Under

these conditions, vertical wells are impractical because they fail to hit
vertical fractures. Examples include Farmington (short radius), Austin
Chalk (medium radius) and offshore Denmark (long radius).
Horizontal wells are now drilled in reservoirs in which drillers expect
to drill fewer wells with increased life and productivity by limiting
water and gas coning. The economic success of these wells has made
horizontal wells standard. The question now is Why drill a vertical
well?.

In the case of Heavy Oil projects (Alberta, Canada) steam injection is

needed from horizontal wells a technique called Enhanced Oil
Recovery (EOR). One well is drilled for production. A second steam
injection well is drilled 10 to 20 feet underneath the first one, using
magnetic ranging from the MWD to the magnetized casing of the top
well path. The hot steam from the injection well reduces oil viscosity,
which enhances oil flow into the overlying producing well.
Multi-lateral well paths are drilled from the same well. Laterals are
planned sidetracks in which each path is selectively available to
completion equipment.
In a river crossing, a hole is drilled under a river to carry a pipeline or

cable. The wellbore is drilled and widened by using a mining rig on a
truck and deviated up to a target location. The pipeline is then attached
to the bit and pulled back through.
Modern Directional Drilling Techniques

Mud Motor
The mud motor is the workhorse of modern directional drilling, and
represents a major advancement in directional control. First employed
in the oilfield by Dynadrill (Halliburton) in 1968 as a directional tool,
Positive Displacement Motors (PDM) offer greater torque and better
pressure feedback than turbines. Drilling with motors is easier because
the surface standpipe pressure reflects motor torque, which in turn can
reflect weight on bit (WOB). As motor torque increases, standpipe
pressure increases and vice versa. Therefore, the directional driller
uses standpipe pressure to advance the bit by controlling torque. If the
bit stalls, pressure increases.
The motor is composed of four standard sections. The Dump Sub is

used to divert mud so that the roughnecks do not get wet feet. The
Dump Sub bypasses the fluid from the motor while the tool is tripped
into and out of the hole. Essentially it enables the drillstring to fill with
mud from the annulus while tripping in, and enables the drillstring to
drain while tripping out. This prevents the mud from flowing out onto
the drillfloor when a connection is made. When the pumps are started,
the fluid forces a piston down, closing the bypass ports and directing
fluid through the motor.
The Power Section converts hydraulic horsepower into mechanical

horsepower, which results in drill bit rotation. It consists of two parts:
the rotor and the stator, which when assembled form a continuous seal
along their contact points. The rotor is an alloy steel bar shaped into a
helix. It is specially coated in chrome to reduce friction, wear, and
corrosion. The stator is a length of tubular steel that is lined with an
elastomer compound and shaped into a helix to mate with the rotor.
PDMs use a reverse application of the Moineau pump principle to

generate power from the mud stream. Slugs of mud are driven through
slots in the rotor and stator, and generate torque, which causes the
rotor to cycle backwards through the grooves in the stator (in
epicyclical motion). Different rotor/stator lobe ratios (such as 1/2, 5/6,
and 9/10) are used for more power and lower speed. The most
common PDM is a half-lob motor in which the rotor has one lobe and
the stator has two. PDMs always have one more lobe in the stator than
the rotor. This results in a progressive series of cavities into which the
fluid will flow. The pressure of this fluid causes the rotor to rotate.
Torque is then transmitted to the universal joint.

A Universal Joint forms the coupling assembly that converts the

epicyclical motion of the rotor into rotation at the drive shaft
connected to the bit. It is either a U Joint (Car FWD) or a solid piece
of Beryllium Copper.
The Bent Housing was originated in 1982. Before this time, a bent sub
was used above the motor. The bent housing allows the whole motor
to be rotated to drill straight, or oriented from the surface to drill at an
angle. Bent housing angles are now adjustable.
The Bearing Assembly supports the motor drive shaft that transmits
drilling thrust and turns the bit. It consists of radial bearings and on
and off bottom thrust bearings. Of all the components in a mud motor,
the bearing assembly is the one most frequently exposed to harsh
conditions.
Controlled curved well paths are drilled by using a sequence of

curved/oriented and straight/rotating sections. The bend is always over
designed by 25 to 50 percent. The stabilizer on the bearing housing is
used to balance the bit and the bend for optimum direction control.
MWD data will tell the directional driller which way the bend is
pointing and the inclination and azimuth of the well heading.
Mud Motor

Measurement Systems
Accurate knowledge of the wellbore position helps you to:
Optimize the recovery from a reservoir by strategically positioning
the wellbore.
Build an accurate three-dimensional map of reservoir surfaces.
Enable the well to be relocated in the event of an underground
blowout.
Prevent loss of wells and damage caused by collisions between
wells.
Modern wellbore surveying tools include MWD and Gyros.
Magnetometers are the primary measurement method used during

drilling. The MWD and multishot tools have triaxial magnetometers
and accelerometers. Magnetic surveys are affected by variations in the
earth's magnetic field and from steel in the drillstring. Magnetic tools
require special non-magnetic drill collars to be placed around the
survey tool.
Gyroscope surveying produces more accurate well position logs. This

type of survey is normally run inside casing, although some gyros have
been adapted for pump down and MWD. The rate gyroscope
(developed for cruise missiles) has become the industry standard. It
uses one fixed axis gyro, with its gimbal axes held steady by electro-
magnetic resolvers. The amount of current that is required to prevent
swing indicates the rate of turn of the assembly. These tools are
sensitive enough to pick up the earths motion. The surveyor uses
Gyro Compassing to detect the initial angle of the tool, then the
sensors detect movement as the tool moves down the wellbore on a
wireline. The movements are calculated as angles, then as positions.
Because gyros are generally more accurate than magnetic surveys,

they are typically used to correct a wellbore trajectory that has been
calculated from magnetic survey data. For example, suppose a
magnetic survey indicates that the well was not drilled in accordance
with the well plan, and some serious discussion results between
drillers and geologists. The best course of action is to run a gyro
survey, recalculate the wellbore trajectory, and compare it with the
well plan.

Magnetic and Gyroscopic Systems
Measurement While Drilling

MWD tools are the instruments that send signals to the surface with
information about the wellbore and the formation at the drill bit. The
original use of MWD was for directional information (Inc/Azi). This
replaced the single shot instrument data then in use. In the early 1980s,
formation information was available that included short normal
resistivity and natural gamma ray tools. Recent developments include
sensors that measure formation acoustic velocity (sonic) and provide
electrical images of dipping formations. These types of tools are called
Logging While Drilling (LWD) because they provide data of such high
quality data that wireline survey runs are no longer needed.
MWD tools typically consist of a power system, telemetry system,

directional sensor, and formation measurement tools.
Power is supplied to the tool by a turbine or by batteries. Batteries can

supply tool power without drilling fluid circulation. Turbine energy is
abundant because it is created by fluid flow.

The Telemetry equipment transmits data back to surface. The signals

are sent through mud pulses, which are interpreted by a pressure
transducer in the stand pipe at the surface. An example of this is
negative pulse, which is made by diverting mud from the pipe to the
annulus and reducing the pressure in the stand pipe. Pressure pulses
are slow. A single pulse takes about one second to transmit. A
digitized angle (Toolface) can take 10 to 20 seconds to transmit in
digital form. Positive pulse is also widely used, in which the pulse is
caused by a valve that restricts flow in the pipe. Both methods drive
the valve by using a solenoid driven by a bank of capacitors. Some
other methods for signalling the surface that have been tried are cable
in the pipe (which wears out quickly) and radio transmission. (VLF is
used for this purpose, but is limited by depth).
Directional survey information is detected by triaxial magnetometers

(electronic compass) and triaxial accelerometers (electronic plumb
bob).
Geophysical traces are transmitted for geo-steering, These are the

Gamma Ray detector (a Geiger counter) and resistivity (via
electromagnetic wave coils).
At the surface, the pulses are converted into log data. The log data is
available at the rig floor in the form of dial readings, and is available
to the operator in the form of logs. Log plotting requires a depth
tracking system and computer software.
Recent additional information provided by MWD systems include

downhole WOB, downhole pressure at bit (PWD), drillstring dynamics
data (vibration), neutron porosity, bulk density, and ultrasonic calliper
measurements. These types of information help to geo-steer the well.

MWD at the Rig Site
The inability to steer mechanically during rotary drilling resulted in the

design and implementation of Variable Blade Stabilizers (VBS)
also known as Adjustable Gauge Stabilizers (AGS). These tools are
designed to enable drillers to change blade diameters on the fly. Along
with other fixed-gauge BHA stabilizers, these tools are also used to
change the build and drop tendency of rotary and steerable BHAs with
a simple pumps-on/pumps-off procedure. This enables the BHA
steering tendency to be changed downhole without having to trip the
assembly. Other benefits include the ability to control inclination when
sliding is no longer possible, an improvement in hole cleaning due to
continuous rotation of the drillstring, and a reduction in torque and
drag tortuosity by limiting dogleg severity.

Emerging Technologies
A number of new technologies are emerging in directional drilling in

order to enable drillers to achieve extended reach or designer well
trajectories.
Coiled Tubing/Under Balanced Drilling

Coiled Tubing (CT) rigs were originally developed for workover
operations inside existing wells. Now, however, CT rigs have been
adapted for sidetracking and drilling. CT rigs can drill short length
wells (1500 feet horizontal) at a lower cost and in less time than a
conventional drilling rig and with a smaller footprint. The coiled
tubing (2-inch steel) is coiled onto a drum and fed into the wellbore
through an injector with spools that can push or pull the tubing into the
hole. The standard steering combination of bent mud motor and MWD
has been modified for CT rigs by adding a ratchet indexing device for
orienting the motor bend. This is necessary because CT cannot be
rotated for orientation.
Underbalanced (UB) Drilling is a method in which the drilling fluid is

made less dense than the formation fluid inside the reservoir. As a
consequence, the formation fluid flows into the wellbore. This flow
pattern is desirable because if the drilling mud overbalances pore
pressure, it invades the reservoir pore space and reduces permeability.
This invasion results in reduced formation productivity, particularly in
horizontal wells in which the reservoir is subject to longer contact
times with the drilling fluid, and open hole completions are more
prevalent. In addition to reducing formation invasion, underbalanced
drilling can reduce the drilling time due to increased ROP, increased
bit life, and a reduced chance of differential sticking. In normal
drilling, lower mud densities are avoided because of the risk that
pressure problems (blowouts) will occur, which can be difficult to
control.
In UB drilling, the pressure can be regulated with a special blowout

preventer and choke at the surface. Fluid densities can be reduced by
using foam drilling or by injecting nitrogen into the drilling fluid.
Special equipment is used at the surface for separating solids and
sampling cuttings.

A major drawback of the technique has been an inability to use MWD,

and therefore geo-steer. This problem is caused by the presence of
compressible gas in the annulus, which prevents mud pulse systems
from transmitting back to the surface. Electro-magnetic tools (EMT)
have solved this problem for shallow wells, by enabling direct
transmission back to the surface. EMT use is limited by depth,
temperature, and formation restrictions. Repeaters/transmitter
technology, however, seems to enable EMT tools to be used at lower
depths.
Coiled Tubing Rig and Underbalanced Drilling

Multi-laterals
Planned multi-lateral (ML) wellbores are now a part of modern
completion practices. Lateral wellbores allow simultaneous production
from two or more zones without the cost of the extra upper wellbore
and surface equipment. Additional wellbores can be drilled at 30
percent of the cost of the original well. This method suits only those
reservoirs that have good mechanical stability.
ML wells are made up of a parent wellbore with one or more

secondary wellbores (laterals) all of which produce or inject fluids
or provide information. Their classification is based on the junction
mechanism between the parent and sibling wellbores. The
classification criteria are whether the junction is open or closed, or
whether the tubing or casing is installed across the junction. A
common classification scheme contains six variants of increasing
complexity:
Level 1 provides no zonal isolation, (for example, open hole

sidetracks). Specific branch access is difficult, sometimes
impossible.
Level 2 have a cased and cemented parent wellbore with a milled

and slotted liner in the sibling, but provides no zonal isolation or
pressure integrity across the junction.
Level 3 have contained, cased, and cemented parent and sibling

wellbores with cement or epoxy at the junction. The junction
provides no zonal isolation and cannot sustain a differential
pressure greater than the formation fracture pressure.
Level 4 have the same characteristics as Level 3 ML wells, but

contain cement at the junction, which is designed to provide
pressure support greater than the fracture pressure. Packers in the
parent wellbore placed on both sides of the sibling provide zonal
isolation.
Level 5 achieve full zonal isolation by using a downhole deflector

at the junction and a system of packers in both the parent and
sibling wellbores. This enables production tubing to be
mechanically sealed.
Level 6 use mechanical splitters to achieve full zonal isolation

along both branches.

The lateral wellbore shown below (a Level 3 wellbore) has casing

installed in the primary wellbore with a window joint positioned and
rotated in the desired direction. A protective sleeve is removed, and a
drilling whipstock is oriented and installed. The window is opened
with a milled tooth bit run on a steerable motor. Once the lateral is
drilled, the junction is cased off with a short liner, then the section of
the primary wellbore is washed over and recovered. Drilling of the
lower lateral is then performed through the primary wellbore. You can
re-enter into the upper lateral at any time by installing a retrievable
workover whipstock.
Multi-lateral Level 3 Completion
ML wells can also be classified on their relative geometry. Different

types include opposed dual laterals, stacked dual laterals, multi-
laterals, branched multi-laterals, splayed multi-laterals, and forked
dual laterals.

Rotary Steerable Systems

Rotary steerable devices (also known as Steerable Rotary Drilling
SRD) make it possible to correct inclination and azimuth during rotary
drilling. The concept was first introduced in 1991 by Camco. As of
1999, there are five rotary steerable systems in an expanding market.
A number of different system types are in trial.
Rotary steerable systems offer considerable advantages over steerable

mud motor systems:
Drillstring torque and drag should decrease, and result in less

tortuous wellbores. This should reduce stuck pipe and make
workovers and completions easier.
Drilling in rotary mode should reduce bit walk.
ROP should increase 50 to 100 percent by enabling bits to be

selected on performance reasons, rather than on the basis of
steerability.
The number of trips required to directionally drill a well should

decrease.
LWD data quality should improve due to drilling in rotary mode. In

addition, the data should be more accurate because it is obtained
closer to the bit. Drilling course corrections can be made earlier.
Cuttings transport is improved in rotary mode, which results in

easier hole cleaning, and less chance of forming cuttings beds and
getting stuck.
Fewer wiper runs are required (for example, due to a smoother

wellbore, fewer cuttings beds).
Dogleg severity and wellbore spiralling should decrease, and easier

completions should result.
Improved steering capabilities should enhance production by

keeping the well within the reservoir.
In comparison with rotary steerable devices, mud motor systems are

slow when steering because the drillstring is not rotating. In addition,
the string picks up friction and cuttings. The resulting extra drag
becomes so great that the motor becomes unsteerable, especially if the
pipe buckles. Therefore, a rotary steerable system drills faster and
further. They do not offer the range of radii of motors, however, and so
are best suited to use in extended reach wells.

A rotary steerable device consists of two sections. The bias unit is

located immediately above the bit. It has three actuator pads which can
be operated in synchronism with rotation of the bit in order to provide
a lateral displacement in a constant direction and hence steer the well.
The pads are operated hydraulically with the drilling fluid, and are
controlled by a rotary valve which is mechanically connected to the
control unit.
The control unit is mounted inside a non-magnetic drill collar and

contains a directional sensor package, roll sensors and control
electronics.
The example below (a hybrid of three designs) has a nonrotating

stabilizer body with three buttons on hydraulic pistons in each blade.
Pressurized oil is driven through a rotating valve to one blades
pistons. This imparts thrust to the wall, which by reaction will drive
the bit in the opposing direction and cause it to drill laterally (by side
cutting). The rotating valve determines which direction the thrust
moves,. The valve itself is driven by an electric stepper motor to a
position synchronized with the rotation as detected by a Hall effect
transistor. The rotation movement drives an oil pump.
Hybrid Rotary Steerable Device

Geo-steering
Geo-steering is directional steering carried out within the close
confines of a pay zone. The well path adjustments that are made are
based on real-time geological and reservoir data, in addition to drilling
observations. The goal is to maintain a bit position at an optimum
depth near the top of a producing formation.
Geo-steering enables the planned well path trajectory to be evaluated

against the geological model while the well is drilled. The planned
build trajectory may be compromised by inaccurate depths from
seismic data, which results in the formation tops coming in higher or
lower than expected. Formation markers are detected by Gamma/
Resistivity sensors while drilling the well. The planned trajectory is
adjusted to any changed formation tops to ensure that the well meets it
geological requirements.
Steering in the pay zone is accomplished by watching the

petrophysical sensors for signs of the producing formation and steering
away from poor formations. Shales and non-productive formations
have high gamma counts (radioactivity) and low resistivity. Productive
formations are ideally clean of radioactive clay minerals and therefore
show low gamma counts and high resistivity (especially in oil and gas
zones).
The geo-steering equipment consists of detectors near the bit which

provide faster reaction times than sensors located 40 to 80 behind the
bit. This enables the driller to aim confidently at a thinner pay zone. In
a thick productive zone, other indicators may be used. For example,
the driller may examine cuttings from the shale shakers, looking for
microfossils in limestone, or may evaluate hydrocarbon returns at the
surface. These measurements can be more immediate if ROP is low
through the reservoir.

Geo-steering Equipment at the Bit
Geo-steering is conducted as a team effort, so that reaction times are

kept to a minimum. This team effort requires close coordination
between the driller, the directional driller, the MWD operator, and the
geologist who is interpreting the formations. With a typical ROP of
30 per hour, the engineers have two data points per foot on which to
interpret the well against the predicted geological/petrophysical model.
Log curves must be compared and interpreted against predicted
responses to ensure that the well is being directed toward its planned
target. These interpretations are fed back to the directional driller, who
makes any necessary adjustments to the well trajectory.

Geo-steering as a Team Effort at the Rig Site

Glossary
active well plan
The well plan that is currently selected for displaying, editing,

adding targets, and computing. The active well plan is highlighted
in the Plans list of the Wellbore Planner main window.
azimuth
1. Direction, as in a compass direction; clockwise angle of departure

from a reference direction (typically geographic North) to a
particular point.
2. In Wellbore Planner, the direction of the targets dip, measured in

degrees clockwise from the North.
build
The section of a well where the direction of the well is changed

until it reaches the desired inclination and azimuth.
build rate
At any particular depth, the rate of inclination increase of the

wellbore, measured in degrees per 100 feet, or degrees per 30
meters.
closure
Horizontal straight line distance between the surface location and

the designated point.
computed well plan
A well plan that you have calculated in Wellbore Planner. This plan
incorporates engineering values that you specify and generally
combines curved or looping segments with straight segments.
Numerical and directional values for these segments are reported in
the Spreadsheet panel in the Wellbore Planner main window.
R2003.12 Glossary 391

digitized well plan
A preliminary well plan, consisting of a series of connected targets.

These targets are connected by straight lines representing the
borehole. The targets represent the plans turning points.
dip
In a Wellbore Planner target, the angle of inclination between the

target and horizontal, measured in degrees.
dogleg severity (DLS)
A parameter calculated from a formula involving the build, turn,

and drop rates. This is a measure of how curved or twisted the
wellbore is, measured in degrees per 100 feet or per 30 meters.
down thickness
In a Wellbore Planner target, the vertical thickness below the Z-

coordinate, measured in depth units.
drop rate
At any particular depth, the rate of inclination decrease of the

wellbore, measured in degrees per 100 feet or per 30 meters;
basically a negative build.
elevation
Distance of the surface location from sea level, usually at height

above sea level and therefore a positive number. Also called surface
elevation or Kelly Bushing elevation.
ew offset
1. Distance from the surface location to a designated point, measured

from West to East.
2. In Wellbore Planner, the East-West distance the penetration point

is from the center of a target.
file
An ASCII file that contains one or more proposed plans for drilling
a well site.

free floating targets
A target that is not assigned to a well plan. You can digitize

multiple free-floating targets, then assign them to a well plan in the
integrated application or in Wellbore Planner.
hold angle
Angle at the end of first build section. In Wellbore Planner, hold

angle is not an actual plan parameter. It is provided to help calculate
location or kickoff point or to judge the reasonableness of the
location and kickoff point you selected.
hold section
The section of a well that begins at the point where the build stops
and continues at the same inclination and azimuth to total depth
(TD).
inclination
At any particular depth, the current value of inclination from

vertical, measured in degrees.
kickoff point
The depth of the point at which a well begins to deviate from

vertical.
look ahead
In Wellbore Planner, a plan that is an extension of an OpenWorks

well currently being drilled. The starting location is the bottom of
that well.
measured depth (MD)
Actual distance of the wellbore measured from the surface location

to a designated point. Also referred to as the along hole depth
(AHD).
mill out
In a Sidetrack plan, the point at which the sidetrack leaves the

original hole.

ns offset
1. Distance from the surface location to the designated point,

measured from North to South.
2. In Wellbore Planner, the North-South distance the penetration

point is from the center of a target.
orientation
Direction of the radius of a circle or ellipse, or of the side of a

square, or the long side of a rectangle, measured in degrees
clockwise from the North.
penetration point
Point at which the well path enters a target. The penetration point of
normal targets is at the center of the target unless an x or y offset has
been set in the Target Editor. The penetration point of a soft target
does not have to be at the center or specified offset.
rat hole
Slang for a segment of the borehole dug at the end of last target to
hold drilling equipment.
reference target
In Wellbore Planner, a target that, although part of a well plan, is

not used in the calculation of the well path.
sidetrack
The drilling of a new and different hole from an existing wellbore.
soft target
Former term for reference target.
subsea (elevation)
Distance from sea level to the designated point, usually measured

as depth below sea level and therefore a negative number.

surface location
The actual starting point of the wellbore. In Wellbore Planner, the

surface location is specified in terms of the real-world x and y
coordinates and the elevation (distance from sea level).
target
An area, represented by an object such as a circle or a point,

through which a calculated well path must pass. The size and shape
of the target set the boundaries within which the wellbore is to be
drilled. Because targets are available to an entire file, they can be
assigned to one or more plans or to no plan at all.
tool face
The angle made by the plane of the bent sub (a part of the course
correction tool) with a reference direction, either magnetic North or
the direction of the high side of the hole.
top hole
A straight section of well extending between the surface location

and the kickoff point.
total depth (TD)
The vertical straight line distance from a reference elevation and the
bottom of the wellbore.
total directional (cumulative)
At a designated depth, the cumulative number of feet or meters of

wellbore requiring directional control; provides an indication of the
cost associated with drilling.
true vertical depth (TVD)
Vertical straight line distance from the surface location to a

designated point.
turnpoint
Point where a well starts building, dropping, or turning or stops

building, dropping, or turning. A section of the well over which you
plan to average the same build/turn/drop rate or lack thereof.

turn rate
At any particular depth, the rate of turn of the wellbore, measured

in degrees per 100 feet.
unknown location
In Wellbore Planner, an unspecified starting location for a plan.

When calculated, a plan with an unknown location begins at the
first target.
up thickness
In a Wellbore Planner target, the vertical thickness above the Z-

coordinate, measured in depth units.
velocity model
A file containing sample time-depth conversion data, which

Wellbore Planners Time/Depth Server utility uses to translate
between time and depth measurements when working with
applications that record data in time.
well plan
A component of a Wellbore Planner project file, a well plan is

composed of a set of targets, with instructions for how to drill them.
Plans can relate to one or more proposed well sites.

Index
Wellbore Planner User Guide
Numerics Non-plan targets 79

Other Plans and Wells 79
3D View window 96
PD 131
general display options 78
Plan View 77, 83
Redline graph 77, 98
A Reference 132
active well plan Remove 115
copying 56 Section View 77, 91
selecting 56 Show Hold Angle 62
additional information Sort 116
related OpenWorks documentation 12 Type 58
along hole depth error, illustrated 230
applications, using with Wellbore Planner C
see individual application names
Calculate (Well Path) button 149
ASCII files
calculating the well path 143-152
importing WBP-format files 167, 170
automatic/manual mode 149
automatic calculation mode 149
factors involved 143
Auto-Tile option 82
introduction 7
azimuth
locking targets optimum alignment 126
defined 391
method of calculation 145
spreadsheet parameter 152
PD updates to other applications 131
target azimuth illustrated 125
sorting target list 116
spreadsheet parameters 152
B targets included 115
build and hold (ramp) well plan 345-346 understanding the order of data 151
build rate calculating uncertainty 223-236
as redline drilling parameter 103 for a single well 226-233
defined 391 for multiple wells 234-236
for horizontal wells 353 casing
spreadsheet parameter 151, 152 adding/editing for a linked well 182
buttons (main window) 77 basing view window colors on 185
3D View 77, 96 Casing Editor dialog box 182
Auto-Tile Windows 82 CGM-format file
Calculate (Well Path) 149 creating from Diagram Preview 217
Calculate Kick Off Depth 75 creating from view windows 213
Calculations 149
Edit 114
Method 145
R2003.12 Index 397

closing default survey tool

OpenWorks 46 keeping records on changing 225
well plans 142 selecting 224
Wellbore Planner 46 default target parameters, setting 131
closure, defined/illustrated 100 Definitive Survey spreadsheet
color described 228
Platform Monitor color coding 360 deleting
selecting scheme for view windows 81 well plan from project 57
setting for targets 119 well planning project 53
comparing well plans to wells depth values
in Proximity report 208 as source domain for conversions 164
using Uncertainty utility 220-271 how data is stored 155
COMPASS for Windows developing a well plan 47-153
importing ASCII files from 167 Diagram Preview window 104
importing survey tool from 264 capturing contents as a graphic file 217
using with Wellbore Planner 334-336 setting up graphic file save mode 106
completion section dialog boxes
adding/editing for a linked well 186 Casing Editor 182
basing view window colors on 188 Completion/Perforation 186
Completion/Perforation Editor dialog 186 Create Faults From Targets 192
complex extension well plan 69 Create Picks From Targets 188
briefly described 58 Display Grids 94
for dual kickoff well 352 Export 172
for horizontal wells 353 Export Compass (ASCII) File 170
starting location illustrated 59 Export Tool Set 266
computed well plan, defined 391 Hardcopy (for 3D View window) 215
continuous build well plan 347 Import Compass (ASCII) File 167
conventions used in documentation 14 Import Tool From Compass 264
copying Import Tool Set 270
well plan under another name 56 Interpolate Targets From Grids 133
well planning project 53 Multiple Wells 235
Create Faults From Targets dialog box 192 New Plan 55
Create Picks From Targets dialog box 188 OpenVision Visualization 242
cross-section OpenWorks Well Manager 179
well planning cross-section defined 173 OpenWorks Wells 63
cursor tracking Penetration Point Optimizer 138
between Redline/other view windows 99 Plan View Controls 86
between spreadsheet/view windows 150 PlanView Hardcopy 215
Curve and Hold calculation method 145 Project Selection 49
Curve Only calculation method 145 Proximity Report 209
Reconnect Current Plan 195
D Redline Parameter Spreadsheet 101
Reports 199
datum Section View Controls 93
for OpenVision uncertainty Section View Hardcopy 215
display 250, 292
R2003.12 Index 398

Tools 253 digitized and computed plans 281

using basic features 24-31 editing the well path 282
Well Planning Options (OpenVision) 291 enabling well planning mode 278
Well Planning Project Save As 50 graphic display window 276
Well Planning Project Selection 49 picking targets 279
Write LOS to OpenWorks 333 saving the well plan 283
Write to OpenWorks 175 setting up a session 275
ZGF File Selection 88 using with Wellbore Planner 272-283
digitized well plan, defined 392 editing
dip target in Target Editor window 114
defined 392 well path in EarthCube 282
illustrated for target 124 well path in OpenVision 300
directional drilling, origins of 369 well path in SeisWorks 319
disconnecting a plan-to-well link 194 well path in Stratamodel 328
Display Grids dialog box 94 Error Ellipses report
dogleg severity creating 199
defined 392 viewing 207
interpreting on spreadsheet 151 error model
redline parameter for 102 error cone 254
specifying 145 inclination cone of error 256
spreadsheet parameter for 152 overview of model types 254
stategy for setting 368 systematic error 255
down thickness EW offset spreadsheet parameter 152
defined 392 Export Compass (ASCII) File dialog 170
target down thickness illustrated 126 Export dialog box 172
drillers targets formats supported 173
displaying in view windows 239 Export Tool Set dialog box 266
drilling exporting
background information 369-390 customized tool set file 266
changing velocity model during 367 projects in WBP-format files 170
drilling diagram well plan data in various formats 172
creating in Diagram Preview 217 well plans for COMPASS 170
drilling viability well plans from COMPASS 336
assessing in Redline View window 98 extending the well path (MD) 146
strategy for building well path 368
drop rate F
drilling parameter 103
dual kickoff well plan 352-353 faults
dual monitors adding/editing for a linked well 192
advice for using 37 feature name
associating with target 126, 188, 192
files
E
hierarchy of well planning files 47
EarthCube integrated work session Filter button (in dialog boxes) 28
creating a well plan 278
creating an unassigned target 280
R2003.12 Index 399

G model type described 256

integrated applications
graphic file
introduction 8
creating from Diagram Preview 217
updating the displays 149
creating from view windows 213
Interpolate Targets From Grids dialog 133
setting Diagram Preview file save
interpreter
mode 106
selecting/adding for OpenWorks 33
grid
displaying as backdrop in Section
View 94 K
using to create interpolated targets 133 kickoff point
defined 393
H included on spreadsheet 151
specifying/calculating for surface plan 62
Hardcopy dialog box (for 3D View) 215
hardcopy reports
creating 199-212 L
creating a Proximity report 208 launching
viewing options 203 EarthCube 275
hiding OpenVision 288
Redline View parameters 101 OpenWorks: Change OWSYSSID 33
hold angle 62 OpenWorks: Choose Well List 35
hold, defined 345, 393 OpenWorks: Select Interpreter 33
horizontal ellipse/ellipsoid OpenWorks: Select Measurement
described 230 Units 34
illustrated 248 OpenWorks: Select Project 33
horizontal well plan 353-354 SeisWorks 306
history/illustration of 374 Wellbore Planner 37, 49
line of section
I see LOS
loading a time-based project 162
Import Compass (ASCII) File dialog 167
location, choosing
Import Tool From Compass dialog box 264
for complex extension well plan 69
Import Tool Set dialog box 270
for look ahead well plan 67, 365-368
importing
for platform location 71, 355-364
customized tool set file 268
for platform well plan 74, 355-364
survey tool from COMPASS 264
for surface well plan 61
WBP-format files 167
for unknown type of well plan 60
well plan data into StratWorks 332
look ahead well plan 67, 365-367
well plans into COMPASS 335
adding wells to project 63
Importing Targets 109
briefly described 58
inclination
monitoring the wells progress 365-367
as a redline drilling parameter 103
starting location illustrated 59
as a spreadsheet parameter 152
displaying in Redline View window 102
inclination cone of error
Inclination Cone of Error table 262
R2003.12 Index 400

LOS (line of section) well planning project during startup 49

defining LOS in Plan View window 85 well planning project in mid-session 51
exporting to Stratamodel 173 OpenVision integrated work
saving to the OpenWorks database 333 session 284-301
setting Section View projection choosing the domain 288
distance 93 creating targets 298
using in StratWorks 332 deleting targets 301
displaying a wells uncertainty 244
M displaying position log 249
Draw button 298
manual calculation, setting 149 editing the well path 300
MD (measured depth) effect of Calculations button setting 242
defined 62, 393 effect of running Uncertainty utility 242
depth readout 99 ending visualization session 250
error illustrated 230 list of well planning tasks 297
spreadsheet parameter 152 overview of capabilities 284
measurement units setting up a session 287
determining for OpenWorks project 365 tips for using 302
error message 365 viewing uncertainty in 241-250
for well planning project 144 Well Planning Options dialog box 291
measurement systems described 34 Wellbore Planner interface
setting for the OpenWorks session 34 adding 291
merging pick data 191 removing 294
mill out depth workflow 286
specifying/calculating for sidetrack 66 OpenVision Visualization dialog box
minimizing windows 22 displaying 242
monitoring wells uncertainty display options 244
structural interpretation changes 367 OpenWorks Command Menu
velocity model changes 367 displaying 37
mouse, using to edit targets 128 OpenWorks database
Multiple Wells dialog box saving line of section to 333
displaying 235 OpenWorks project
using after survey tool updates 234 creating a new project 33
MWD (measurement while drilling) selecting a project during startup 33
background information 379 OpenWorks well
creating 175-198
N information saved for well 178
OpenWorks well list
New Plan dialog box 55 adding well to 198
Non-plan targets button 79 described 35
NS offset spreadsheet parameter 152
O
online help, using 13
opening
well plan in a project 56
R2003.12 Index 401

OpenWorks Well Manager dialog box in SeisWorks 310-314

adding/editing casing data 182 in Stratamodel 324-326
adding/editing completion data 186 interpolated from grids 133
adding/editing fault data 192 using Target Editor window 112
adding/editing well target picks 188 picks
disconnecting a plan-to-well link 194 adding/editing for a linked well 188
displaying 179 merging/replacing wells pick data 191
OpenWorks Wells dialog box 63 Plan Colors menu options
Optimize based upon button selecting view window color scheme 81
options for running optimization 362 Plan View Controls dialog box 86
optimizing using uncertainty options in 239
platform location 357, 362 Plan View window 83
target penetration points 138 displaying a ZGF backdrop 88
Optimum Align calculation method 145 dragging targets in 130
orientation of target enabling uncertainty display in 238
specifying 123 general display options 78
orthogonal ellipse/ellipsoid picking a new target 111
described and illustrated 230 saving display as a graphic file 213
Other Plans and Wells button 79 selecting uncertainty display options 239
OWSYSSID (OpenWorks System ID) target and label display options 86
choosing a database server 33 viewing uncertainty ranges 237-240
Plans list
P selecting an active well plan 56
plan-to-well link
PD (Pointing Dispatcher) disconnecting/reconnecting 194
effect of Uncertainty utility on 242 PlanView Hardcopy dialog box 215
setting mode for 131 platform location well plan 71
penetration point briefly described 58
defined 394 illustrated 59
optimizing for well path 138 optimizing automatically 362
snapping for reference target 136 optimizing manually 357
Penetration Point Optimizer dialog 138 Platform Monitor information box 358
parameters described 140 Platform Monitor information box 358
Penetration Point report platform well plan 74
creating 199 briefly described 58
viewing 205 illustrated 370
perforation data workflow 355-364
see completion section plotter file
pick capsule creating from Diagram Preview 217
described and illustrated 248 creating from view windows 213
picking targets position log
from grids in Section View 94 in OpenVision uncertainty display 249
from ZGF image in Plan View 88 PostScript file
in EarthCube 273, 279-281 command for printing 216
in OpenVision 298-299 creating from Diagram Preview 217
in Plan/Section View windows 111 creating from view windows 213
R2003.12 Index 402

project S
see well planning project
saving
Project Selection dialog box 49
copy of a project (Save As) 53
Proximity report
customized tool set 266
creating 208
lines of section to OpenWorks 333
viewing 211
well planning project file 53
Proximity Report dialog box 209
Section View Controls dialog box 93
using uncertainty options in 239
R Section View Hardcopy dialog box 215
radii of shaped targets 123 Section View window 91
ramp well plan 345-346 defining LOS for display 85
Reconnect Current Plan dialog box 195 displaying a grid backdrop 94
reconnecting a plan-to-well link 194 dragging targets in 130
Redline Parameter Spreadsheet enabling uncertainty display in 238
dialog 101 general display options 78
specifying values in 103 picking a new target 111
toggling parameter view on/off 103 saving display as a graphic file 213
redline parameters selecting uncertainty display options 239
described 101 setting to display Worms Eye View 99
Redline View window 98 setting view corridor 93
depth and location readouts 99 target and label display options 93
displaying/hiding parameters in 103 using vertical exaggeration 92
saving display as a graphic file 213 viewing uncertainty ranges 237-240
setting parameters for 101 SeisWorks integrated work session
Worms Eye View button 99 deleting targets 320
Reference button 132 deleting well plans 321
reference target 131 editing the well path 319
converting to a normal target 133 launching 306
creating 132 picking targets 310-314
defined 394 in Map View 307, 313
interpolating from grid 133 in Seismic View 307, 312
snapping at right angle 137 selecting a velocity model 310
snapping into alignment 136 setting display parameters for
using in two-target well plan 351 targets/plans 315
when to use 131 setting up/creating a well plan 306
Remove button 115 tips for assigning well plan color 316
renaming targets 141 using with Wellbore Planner 304-321
Reports dialog box 199 workflow 305
resizing windows 22 Shape button (Target Editor) 120
RKB (Rig Kelly Bushing) 74 shortcut view buttons
rotating restricting range of plans/targets 79
in 3D View window 97
in the Target Editor window 128, 129
R2003.12 Index 403

sidetrack well plan 63 surface elevation 62

adding wells to project 63 illustrated 100
briefly described 58 surface location
illustrated 370 defined 395
specifying/calculating mill out depth 66 on spreadsheet 151
starting location illustrated 59 shown in Plan View window 83
steps for creating 65 surface well plan 61
simulating a well path, advice on 368 briefly described 58
Single Well dialog box specifying/calculating kickoff point for 62
calculating uncertainty data in 228 starting location illustrated 59
customizing a survey history in 231 survey history
Definitive Survey spreadsheet 228 customizing for a single well 231
slot x offset 74 restriction on tool types used 231
slot y offset 74 working with individual survey
snapping reference targets histories 226-233
at right angles along well path 137 Survey Point report
to align with well path 136 creating 199
sorting targets 115 viewing 203
Sperry-Sun applications survey tool
exporting plans for 173 assigning to multiple wells 234-236
spreadsheet in main window choosing a survey tool 257
data displayed 150-152 creating 259
S-shaped build well plan 347-350 customizing 258-271
starting location deleting 264
see location, choosing editing 263
straight well 344-345 error model types described 254
Stratamodel file formats field tools compared 378
exporting plans in SM1/GXY format 173 getting information for creating 258
Stratamodel integrated work session hard/soft coding of survey tool data 223
editing the well path 328 history and background 369-390
exporting well plan in depth/time 330 how tool set files are stored 269
labels on targets 327 importing a customized tool set 268
Object Manager, well path in 327 importing tool from COMPASS 264
picking targets 324 keeping records on default changes 225
saving the well plan 330 locating default tool set data file 269
using with Wellbore Planner 322-330 overview of specifying 223
viewing the well path 327 overview of the default tool set 251
workflow 322 restriction on mixing wells tools 231
strategies for planning wells 339-368 role in calculating uncertainty 234
StratWorks file formats saving a customized tool set 266
exporting plans for StratWorks 173 selecting a default 224
StratWorks integrated work session updating uncertainty data after
saving line of section for 333 modifying 234
using with Wellbore Planner 332 using for calculating uncertainty 251-271
subsea elevation 99
illustrated 100
R2003.12 Index 404

systematic error model x, y, z coordinates 118

basis for model cited 251 Target Editor window 111
coefficients described 255 graphically editing targets 128
Inclination Azimuth Error table 260 perpendicular view 129
vertical view 128-129
T locking/unlocking Opt. Align Angle 126
orienting target viewing plane 117
target setting target parameters 117-131
adding/editing fault data 192 Shape button 120
adding/editing pick data 188 Target Shape report
advice about creating targets 368 creating 199
also see reference target viewing 206
Available/Selected list placement 115 text file
color setting for 119 exporting well plans as 173
creating from grid in Section View 94 tiling windows 82
creating from ZGF image in Plan View 88 time values
creating in OpenVision 298 as source domain for conversions 164
creating in Plan/Section View 111 how data is stored 155
creating in Target Editor window 112 loading project in time-based mode 162
defined 47, 395 time/depth file
defining a target as a shape 120 creating 166
deleting from well plan 115 Time/Depth Server 155-166
displaying drillers targets 239 choosing a velocity model 159
dragging in Plan/Section View 130 creating a time/depth file 166
editing 117-126, 128-130 displaying Time/Depth Server 158
editing graphically 120, 128 effects of changing velocity model 160
editing in Target Editor window 114 loading project in time-based mode 162
excluding from calculations 131 overview of using 157
Feature Name setting 126 using Preferences option 164
importing targets 109 when to use 156
including in well path 115 Toggle button (Redline View) 101
irregularly shaped 120-122 tool
locking/unlocking Opt. Align Angle 126 see survey tool
making into a reference target 132 tool face spreadsheet parameter 152
optimizing penetration points of 138 Tools dialog box
orientation parameter 123 creating a survey tool 259
parameters 117-126 dialog box elements described 253
radii of shaped target 123 displaying 253
renaming 141 error models described 254
selecting for a well plan 115-116 overview of functions 252
setting default parameters for 131 total directional drilling parameter
setting display style in Plan View 86 described 103
sorting target list 115 displaying in Redline View window 102
steps for setting parameters 340 true vertical depth
unassigned target 111 see TVD
working with 108-142
R2003.12 Index 405

Turn Point report V

creating 199
velocity model
viewing 203
changing while drilling a well 367
turn rate
choosing for time/depth conversions 159
described 152
creating a time/depth file 166
interpreting on spreadsheet 151
defined 396
redline parameter 103
effects of changing 160
turnpoints
strategy for changing 161
defined 150, 395
vertical exaggeration
order of 151
using in Section View window 92
parameters 152
View target parameter 117
TVD (true vertical depth)
view window options
depth readout 99
Auto-Tile button 82
spreadsheet parameter 152
restricting range of plans/targets 79
two-target well plan 350-351
selecting a plan color scheme 81
Type options (well plan types) 58-75
specifying 78-82
viewing
U Error Ellipses report 207
unassigned target Penetration Point report 205
creating/assigning 111 Proximity report 211
uncertainty 220-271 redline values in Redline View 98
calculating 223-236 Survey Point report 203
calculating for multiple wells 234-236 Target Shape report 206
calculating for single wells 226-233 targets in Target Editor window 114
enabling for view windows 238 Turn Point report 203
error model types described 254 well plans 76-107
hard/soft coding of survey tool data 223 well plans in 3D View 96
how survey tools are assigned 234 well plans in Diagram Preview 104
introduction to 220 well plans in Plan View 83
overview of tasks 221 well plans in Section View 91
selecting a default survey tool 224 viewing uncertainty 237-250
viewing 237-250 adding the Wellbore Planner/OpenVision
in OpenVision 241-250 interface 291
in Wellbore Planner 237-240 in OpenVision 241-250
workflow for 222 in Wellbore Planner 237-240
working with survey tools 251-271 OpenVision Visualization dialog 244
unknown well plan type 60 removing Wellbore Planner/OpenVision
briefly described 58 interface 294
illustrated 59 setting Enable option 238
up thickness setting view window display
defined 396 options
target up thickness illustrated 125 239
Well Planning Options dialog 291
VIP Simulator
exporting well plans for 173
R2003.12 Index 406

W deleting targets from 115

developing 47-153
WBP-format files
exporting as a file in various formats 172
importing 167, 170
finding problems in Redline View 98
Weighted MD optimization paradigm
method of calculation 145
opening 56
formula described 364
saving/managing as a well 175-198
well
specifying a well plan type 58-75
adding look ahead to 67
steps for setting parameters 342
adding to well list 198
strategies for developing 338-368
adding to well planning project 63
viewing 76-107
adding/editing casing 182
well plan types
adding/editing completion sections 186
adding/editing faults 192
complex extension 69
adding/editing picks 188
continuous build well 347
calculating uncertainty for
dual kickoff well 352-353
multiple wells 235
horizontal well 353-354
creating from plan 175-198
illustration of types 59
disconnecting/reconnecting
look ahead 67, 365-367
plan-to-well link 194
platform location 71, 152
information saved for 178
platform well 74
managing a linked well 179
ramp well 345-346
sidetracking from 63
sidetrack 63
working with survey histories 226-233
S-shaped well 347-350
well path
straight well 344-345
calculating 143-152
surface 61
extending measured depth 146
two-target well 350-351
factors involved in calculating 143
unknown 60
method for calculating 145
Well Planning Options dialog (OpenVision)
optimizing target penetration points 138
displaying initially 291
sorting target list for 116
redisplaying 294
spreadsheet parameters 152
well planning project
tips for preparing a simulation 368
adding OpenWorks wells to 63
understanding the order of data 151
copying under a new name 53
Well Path (Survey Point) report
creating a new project file 50
creating 199
defined 47
viewing 203
deleting 53
well plan
introduction 48
adding a well plan copy to the project 56
opening a project during startup 49
calculating 143-152
opening a project in mid-session 51
closing 142
saving 53
creating a new well plan 55
Well Planning Project Save As dialog 50
creating hardcopy reports for 199
Well Planning Project Selection dialog 49
creating in EarthCube 278
well position uncertainty
creating in SeisWorks 307
see uncertainty
defined 47
R2003.12 Index 407

Wellbore Planner Write LOS to OpenWorks dialog box 333

exiting 46 Write to OpenWorks dialog box 175
launching 37
main window layout 51 X
typical workflow 44
using with COMPASS 334-336 x coordinate
using with OpenVision 284-301 of surface location 61
using with SeisWorks 304-321 of target 118
using with Stratamodel 322-330 x offset
using with StratWorks 332-333 illustration of 100
Wellbore Planner Interface to OpenVision
adding 291 Y
removing 294
Window Menu buttons y coordinate
illustration of 21 of surface location 61
windows of target 118
3D View 96 y offset
arranging on monitor 82 illustration of 100
Diagram Preview 104
minimizing 22 Z
Plan View 83 ZGF backdrop
Redline View 98 clearing from Plan View window 90
Section View 91 displaying in Plan View window 88
Target Editor 111 ZGF File Selection dialog box 88
Time/Depth Server 158 Z-MAP Plus
using basic window features 1-36 exporting well plans for 173
workflows
continuous build well plan 347
dual kickoff well plan 352-353
for multiple integrated applications 42
for using Wellbore Planner 44-45
for working with COMPASS 334
for working with EarthCube 274
for working with OpenVision 286
for working with SeisWorks 305
for working with Stratamodel 323
horizontal well plan 353-354
platform well project 355-364
ramp well plan 345
setting target parameters 340
setting up the OpenWorks session 32
setting well plan parameters 342
S-shaped well plan 347-350
straight well plan 344-345
two-target well plan 350-351
Worms Eye View (Redline View) 99
R2003.12 Index 408

WBP

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

WBP

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

WBP

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wellbore Planner Users Guide

2004 Landmark Graphics Corporation

Part No. 161888, R2003.12 February 2004

Landmark Graphics Corporation

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Main Window Layout ......................................................................................... 3

Main Menu ..................................................................................................... 4

Overview of File Menu Items ................................................................. 4

Overview of Plans Menu Items .............................................................. 4

Overview of Views Menu Items ............................................................. 5

Overview of the Tools Menu Items ........................................................ 6

Overview of the Wellbore Planner Main Window Spreadsheet ............... 6

Calculation Parameters ............................................................................... 7

How Wellbore Planner Interacts with Other Applications ............................. 8

Applications That Connect Directly to Wellbore Planner ......................... 8

Other Applications That Communicate with Wellbore Planner ............... 9

Finding the Information You Need ................................................................... 10

Organization of Sections ............................................................................. 10

Other Sources of Information ..................................................................... 12

Using Online Help ........................................................................................ 13

Conventions Used in the Documentation .................................................. 14

R2003.12 Contents iii

Managing Windows and Dialog Boxes ............................................................ 15

Common Window Features ......................................................................... 16

Using Lists .............................................................................................. 17

Using Menu Bars .................................................................................... 17

Using Menu Options ............................................................................... 18

Using Scroll Bars .................................................................................... 19

Resizing Windows .................................................................................. 21

Moving Windows .................................................................................... 22

Raising and Lowering Windows ............................................................ 23

Activating Windows ................................................................................ 23

Using Dialog Boxes ..................................................................................... 24

Common Features .................................................................................. 25

Other Dialog Box Buttons ...................................................................... 27

Using a File Selection Dialog Box ......................................................... 28

Accepting Parameters ............................................................................ 30

Opening Button 3 Popup Menus ........................................................... 31

Selecting Items from a List .................................................................... 31

Tabbing Through Dialog Boxes ............................................................ 31

Getting Started ................................................................................................... 32

Setting Up the Initial OpenWorks Session ................................................ 32

Selecting the Database Server for the OpenWorks Session .............. 33

Selecting an OpenWorks Project .......................................................... 33

Selecting an Interpreter .......................................................................... 33

Selecting a System of Measurement .................................................... 34

Selecting an OpenWorks Well List ........................................................ 35

Choosing the Order of the Well List ..................................................... 36

Choosing a Well Name Format .............................................................. 36

Launching Wellbore Planner ............................................................................ 37

Integrated Well Planning Workflow ............................................................ 42

Designing Well Paths in Wellbore Planner ................................................ 44

Exiting Programs and Applications ................................................................. 46

Exiting Wellbore Planner ............................................................................. 46

Exiting OpenWorks ...................................................................................... 46

Creating a Well Plan ............................................................................. 47

Working with Projects ....................................................................................... 48

About Well Planning Projects ..................................................................... 48

Selecting a Wellbore Planner Project to Display ...................................... 49

Creating a New Project During the Current Session ................................ 50